HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM User Manual

HYPACK Web Address: www.hypack.com

56 Bradley St. Technical Support:
[email protected]
Middletown, CT
Phone: (860) 635-1500
06457
 •

1- 2
Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION-1-1
I. Welcome to HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM!- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
II. Opening the Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
III. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
A. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Items List - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
B. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Toolbars- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
1 Configuring the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Toolbars and Menu Bar - - - - - - - 1-7
2 Using the Measuring Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9
C. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Area Map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-10
1 Setting Chart Transparency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
2 Querying Area Map Features - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13
3 Saving Screen Captures of the Area Map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
D. Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel- - -1-16
1 General Display Settings in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
2 Grid Display Settings in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-17
3 Soundings Display Settings in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - 1-18
4 Track Line Display Settings in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - 1-22
5 Planned Line Display Settings in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - 1-24
6 Chart Display Settings in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-24
7 Target Display Settings in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-30
E. Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM- - - - - - - - - - - - -1-32
1 About Color Styles - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-33
2 Modifying Color Zones in the COLOR EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-34
3 Generating the Color Bands for a Palette in the COLOR EDITOR - - - - - - - 1-35
4 Modifying Color Bands in the COLOR EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-37
i Changing Individual Band Colors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-37
ii Smoothing Band Colors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-38
iii Adding Color Bands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-39
iv Removing Color Bands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-42
5 Loading a HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Color File to a Palette - - - - - - - - - 1-42
F. Language Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-43
IV. Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-43
A. The Project Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-44
B. Managing Project Group Folders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-45
1 Assigning the Group Location - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-46
2 Adding and Removing Project Group Folders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-46
3 Renaming Project Group Folders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-47
4 Navigating Project Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-47
C. Opening an Existing Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-49
1 Opening Recent Projects - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-50
2 Filtering Your Projects - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-51
3 Manually Navigating through the Project Manager Display - - - - - - - - - - 1-52

Last Updated May / 2017 3

Table of Contents

D. Creating a New Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-53

E. Copying an Existing Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-54
F. Transferring Projects Between Project Group Folders - - - - - - - 1-54
G. Tagging your Projects - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-55
H. Renaming your Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-56
I. Hiding and Restoring your Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-57
J. Deleting your Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-58
V. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-58
VI. Managing Files in your Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-61
A. Loading Files to your Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-62
B. Enabling and Disabling Files- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-63
C. Renaming Project Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-63
D. Unloading Files from your Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-64
VII. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Data Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-65
A. Raw Data Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-65
B. Edited Data Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-65
C. Sorted Data Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-66
D. Catalog Files (*.LOG) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-66
1 Creating a New Catalog File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-66
2 Editing Catalog Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-67
3 Merging Catalog files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-68
4 Show Lines Report for Catalog Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-69

PREPARATION-2-1
I. Background Charts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
A. Loading Background Charts to the Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4
1 Loading ARCS Charts to HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
i Installing ARCS License and Chart Permits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
ii Installing ARCS Charts on your Computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
iii Loading ARCS Charts to your Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7
2 Loading VPF Charts to the Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-9
3 Loading S63 Charts to the Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-10
4 NOAA and ACOE Electronic Charts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-11
i Checking for Updated Chart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-12
ii Loading NOAA and ACOE S57 Charts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-13
5 Geo-referenced PNG Charts from the Internet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-14
i Adding a Web Server to the Web Maps Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-15
ii Removing a Web Server from the Web Maps Panel - - - - - - - - - - - -2-16
iii Generating Geo-referenced PNG Charts from Internet Images - - - - - - -2-16
6 AutoKMZ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-18
B. Chart Display Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19

4
Table of Contents

1 Displaying CAD Charts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19

2 Displaying Chart Layers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19
3 Displaying S57 Charts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20
4 Displaying SHP Charts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23
C. Creating Georeferenced TIF Charts in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - 2-25
1 Exporting Georeferenced TIF Charts of your HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Display - 2-
25
2 Converting Image Files to Georeferenced TIFs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-29
D. Exporting Map Features to Google Earth - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-33
II. Project Geodesy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-37
A. Entering your Geodetic Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-38
B. Selecting Ellipsoids and Projection Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - 2-39
1 Using Predefined Grids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-39
2 Manual Grid Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-40
3 Local Grids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-41

III. Planned Survey Lines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-45

A. Offset Patterns for Planned Lines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-45
B. Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-48
1 Line Naming Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-49
2 Creating 2-Dimensional Planned Lines - Spreadsheet Method - - - - - - - - - 2-50
3 Creating 2-Dimensional Planned Lines Using the Cursor and Offsets Method - 2-53
4 Importing Waypoints From a Text File to the LINE EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - 2-54
5 Creating Planned Lines to Fit Your Survey Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-56
i Clipping Planned Lines to the Survey Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-57
ii Creating Planned Lines inside a Border File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-58
6 Editing your Planned Line File in the Line Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59
i Undo Offsets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
ii Extending or Shortening Lines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
iii Inserting Equidistant Lines within a Line File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61
7 Appending Line Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-63
8 Creating Waypoints Using Distance and Bearing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-63
9 Creating Curved Lines with the Line Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-64
C. Line Reports - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-66
1 Show Lines Report - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-66
2 Estimating Survey Time and Distance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-66

IV. Border Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-68

A. Creating a Border File with the Cursor Method - - - - - - - - - - - 2-68
B. Creating a Border File with the Spreadsheet Method - - - - - - - - 2-70
C. Importing Border Points To the Border Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-72
D. Adjusting Border Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-74
E. Border Reports - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-75
V. Configuring your Hardware - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-76

Last Updated May / 2017 5

Table of Contents

A. Principles of Sub-bottom Profiling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-76

B. Types of Sub-bottom Profiling Systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-77
C. Installation & Towing Configuration Recommendations - - - - - - - 2-78
D. Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE - - - - - 2-79
1 Mobiles and Mobile Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-80
i Adding a Mobile - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-81
ii Mobile Offsets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-82
iii Assigning the Tracking Point - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-83
iv Assigning a Boat Shape to Each Mobile - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-84
2 Configuring your Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-85
i Specifying Devices in HARDWARE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-86
ii HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Device Functions and Options - - - - - - - - -2-86
iii Configuring Connections for HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Devices - - - - - -2-88
iv Testing Serial Communication with WCOM32 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-91
v Testing Network Communication for All Network Devices - - - - - - - - - -2-94
vi Testing Network Device Connections Using Wireshark - - - - - - - - - - -2-95
3 Offsets and Latency in HARDWARE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-96
i Measuring Hardware Offsets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-96
ii Specifying Offsets in HARDWARE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-97
4 System Settings in HARDWARE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-99
E. Sample Sub-bottom HARDWARE Configuration - - - - - - - - - -2-100
F. Configuring Analog Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-102
1 Analog Input/Output Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-105
2 Analog Trigger Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-105

VI. Matrix Files (*MTX) in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - -2-108

A. Creating a Matrix File with the Matrix Editor - - - - - - - - - - - -2-108
B. Matrix File Backups in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - -2-109
C. Editing an Existing Matrix File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-110
VII. Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-111
A. Marking Targets with your Cursor in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM- - -2-112
B. Target Display Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-112
C. Zoom Extents on Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM- - - - - - -2-113
D. TARGET EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-113
1 Details Tab - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-114
2 Spreadsheet Tab - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-115
3 Creating Targets in the TARGET EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-117
4 Target Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-118
5 Editing Target Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-119
i Editing Target Properties in the Details Tab - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-120
ii Editing Target Properties in the Spreadsheet Tab - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-120
iii Assigning S57 Display Symbols from the Project Items List - - - - - - - - 2-121
6 Offsetting Targets in the TARGET EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-122
7 Deleting Targets in the TARGET EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-123

6
Table of Contents

E. Importing and Exporting Target Data to the TARGET EDITOR- - - 2-123

1 Importing Text Files to the TARGET EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-124
2 Exporting Text Files from the TARGET EDITOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-125
3 Target Database Comparisons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-126
F. Target Reports - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-128
G. Managing Targets and Target Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-129
1 Adding Target Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-130
2 Adding Targets to Target Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-130
3 Removing Target Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-131
4 Removing Targets from Target Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-131
5 Renaming Target Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-132

VIII. Plotting Sheets (*.PLT) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-132

A. Creating Plotting Sheets in the Plotting Sheet Editor - - - - - - - 2-132
B. Editing an Existing Plotting Sheet File in the Plotting Sheet Editor - 2-134
C. Generating Plotting Sheet Layout Graphics - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-135
IX. Boat Shape Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-136
A. Creating a Boat Shape - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-137
B. Modifying an Existing Boat Shape - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-139
1 Modifying Object Coordinates in your Boat Shape - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-139
2 Relocating the Vessel Origin in your Boat Shape - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-140
3 Scaling your Boat Shape in the Boat Shape Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-141

X. Plotting Sheets (*.PLT) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-142

A. Creating Plotting Sheets in the Plotting Sheet Editor - - - - - - - 2-142
B. Editing an Existing Plotting Sheet File in the Plotting Sheet Editor - 2-144
C. Generating Plotting Sheet Layout Graphics - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-145

SURVEY-3-1
I. HYPACK® SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
A. Windows in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
1 Area Map in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
2 Left-Right Indicator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4
3 Data Display Window in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
4 Device Windows in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
5 Comments in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-8
6 Alarms in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
7 Configuring your Window Display with the Window Manager - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
B. Shared Memory Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
1 Memory Viewer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
2 Shared Memory Output Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13
i Setting your Memory Output Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
ii Setting your Memory Output Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15

Last Updated May / 2017 7

Table of Contents

iii Broadcasting Survey Data over the Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-17

3 NMEA Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-17
4 Odometer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-19
5 Graphical Motion Reference Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-19
6 Heading and Speed Indicator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-20
C. Configuring your Area Map Display in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - 3-21
1 Loading Files to your Area Map Display in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-21
2 Area Map Layer Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-22
3 Area Map Menu Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-22
4 Area Map Grid Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-23
5 Area Map Tracking and Orientation Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-24
6 Area Map Range Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-25
D. Measuring Distance and Bearing in the Area Map - - - - - - - - - 3-25
E. Boat Features in HYPACK® SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26
1 Specifying the Main Vessel in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-27
2 Boat Shapes and Symbols in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-28
3 Boat Track Parameters in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-31
4 Vessel Heading in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-31
5 Position Filters in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-32
F. Chart (Background) Files in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
1 Loading Charts during SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-33
2 Unloading Charts During SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-34
3 Displaying Hazard Contours in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-34
G. Configuring the Data Display Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
H. Sub-Bottom Profilers in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-38
1 Configuring the Sub-bottom Device Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-39
i Sub-bottom View Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-39
ii Sub-Bottom Corrections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-40
2 Layback for Towed Sub-Bottom Systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-42
I. Targets in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-42
1 Marking Targets in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-43
2 Editing Target Properties in HYPACK® SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-44
3 Target Properties in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-45
4 Deleting Targets in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-46
5 Choosing Targets to Display in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-47
6 Removing Targets from the Display in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-47
7 Setting the Active Target in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-48
8 Target Display Defaults in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-48
9 Connecting Targets with Survey Lines in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-50
10 Connecting Targets to the Boat Position in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-50
J. Matrix Files in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-51
1 Loading and Unloading Matrix Files in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-52
2 Multiple Matrix Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-53
3 Saving Soundings to a User-defined Matrix in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - -3-53
i Interpolating Matrix Depths While Logging - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-55

8
Table of Contents

ii Interpolating Matrix Depths When Not Logging - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-56

4 Editing Matrix Depths in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-56
5 Matrix Display Options in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-58
6 Matrix Color Settings in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-59
7 Saving Matrix Files in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60
K. Corrections in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
L. Navigating Planned Lines in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-63
1 Selecting Survey Lines in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-64
2 Changing Survey Direction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-64
3 Selecting Segments on Multiple Segment Lines in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - 3-65
M. Adding New Lines in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-66
1 Digitizing Planned Lines in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-66
2 Creating Parallel Line Offsets in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-67
N. Logging Data in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-67
1 Project Information in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-70
2 Raw Data File Options in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71
i Raw Data File Naming Convention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71
ii Data Directories for Raw Data Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-73
iii Closing Data Files Based on Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-73
3 Logging Events in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-73
4 SURVEY Keyboard Shortcuts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74
5 Recording Comments in SURVEY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-75
O. Printing Survey Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-76
II. SURVEY DATA TRANSFER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-78
III. SURVEY LOG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-80

SUB-BOTTOM POST-PROCESSING-4-1
I. Sub-bottom Processing Work Flows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1
A. Plotting Sub-bottom Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
B. Generating CAD Chart Files from Sub-bottom Data - - - - - - - - - 4-3
II. Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM - - - 4-4
A. Harmonic Tidal Predictions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
B. Manual Tides Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
1 Tide Corrections from High-Low Water Times and Heights - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
2 Tide Corrections with Manual Observations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
3 Importing Tide Data to the Manual Tides Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11
i Importing Tide Data from a Text file - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11
ii Importing NOAA Tide Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13
4 Editing Tide Files in the Manual Tides Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14

III. Sound Velocity Corrections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15

Last Updated May / 2017 9

Table of Contents

A. Creating a Sound Velocity File in the SOUND VELOCITY Program - 4-16

B. Importing Sound Velocity Data from a Text File- - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
C. Importing Sound Velocity Data from a SonTek CastAway - - - - - - 4-20
IV. Calculating Sub-bottom Latency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21
V. Sub-bottom Processing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-22
A. Windows in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - - 4-22
B. Running the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
C. Modifying your Data Set in SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - 4-26
D. Display Options in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - 4-27
1 Display Tab in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-27
2 Dynamic Range Tab in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - -4-30
3 Time Varying Gain Controls in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - -4-31
4 Frequency Filter in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-33
E. Corrections in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR- - - - - - - - - - 4-34
i Sound Velocity Corrections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-34
ii Tide Corrections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-35
iii Latency Corrections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-36
iv Layback Corrections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-36
F. Limiting Data with a Border File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-37
G. View Tracks View Options in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - 4-38
H. Bottom Tracking in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - 4-40
1 Calculating the Bottom Track in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - -4-40
2 Bottom Track Tools and Options in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - -4-42
I. Digitizing Layers in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - 4-43
J. Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-44
1 Displaying Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - - -4-44
2 Marking Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-45
3 Removing Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - - -4-46
K. Exporting your Digitized Depths - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-46
L. Fence Diagrams - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-48
1 Generating the Fence Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-48
2 Fence Display Options in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - -4-48
M. Storing Screen Shots from the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR - - - 4-50
N. Saving Project Configurations in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR- 4-51
VI. SORT Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-53
A. Running the SORT Program- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-53
B. Sort Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-55

FINAL PRODUCTS-5-1
I. HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1

10
Table of Contents

A. Running HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2

B. Setting Display Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4
1 Border Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
i Chinese Standard Border Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
ii Russian Standard Border Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8
iii New York and Norfolk Standard Border Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9
2 Chart Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
3 Grid Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14
i Projection Grids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14
ii Lat./Lon. Grids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-15
4 Track Line Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-16
5 Soundings in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17
6 Matrix Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-21
7 Planned Line Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22
8 Target Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23
9 Title Blocks in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23
10 Import of Graphics in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
11 Text Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-27
12 North Arrow Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28
13 Color Bar Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29
14 Compass Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
15 Ruler Options in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-32
16 Plotting Sheet Information in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-32
C. Creating a Custom Title Block Title Block Editor- - - - - - - - - - - 5-33
1 Editing a Title Block - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-34
2 Setting Title Block Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-34
3 Working with Title Block Elements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-35
4 Title Block Editor Display Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-36
D. Plotting Sheet Templates- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-37
E. Plotting Methods in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-38
F. Exporting your Plots to Chart Files in HYPLOT - - - - - - - - - - - 5-39
1 Exporting your Plotting Sheet to CAD Formats - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-39
2 Saving your Plot to PDF Format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40
3 Saving Your Plot to a Georeferenced TIF Graphic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-41

II. EXPORT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-44

A. Running the Export Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-45
B. Export Options in Export - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-47
1 Input Options in Export - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48
2 CAD Output Settings in Export - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48
i CAD Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48
ii DGN Origin and Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-50
iii CAD Planned Line Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-51
iv CAD Shoreline Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-52
v CAD Sounding Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-52

Last Updated May / 2017 11

Table of Contents

vi CAD Target Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-55

vii CAD Plot/Tic Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-55
viii CAD Track Line Export Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-56
ix Edit Folder Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-57
x Anchor Sweep Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-58
3 XYZ Parameters in Export - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-58
4 Custom Output Formats in EXPORT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-61
5 User-Defined Output from EXPORT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-62

APPENDIX-6-1
I. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Minimum System Requirements- - - - - 6-1
II. Installing your Software - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
III. Windows® System Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
A. User Account Controls in Windows®- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6
B. Windows® Regional Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6
C. Windows® 7 Data Execution Prevention Settings - - - - - - - - - - 6-7
D. Firewalls - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8
IV. Network System Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8
V. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Licensing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9
A. License Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
B. Updating your License- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11

12
CHAPTER 1 Introduction

WELCOME TO HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM!

Sub-bottom profilers are used extensively in offshore, coastal and
port engineering and geotechnical site surveys, renewable energy
surveys, dredging studies, mineral exploration and habitat mapping
projects. The interpreted data from these systems includes the
thickness and qualitative sediment characteristics of the different
sediment layers that comprise the sub-bottom strata.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM is a specialized software package for
sub-bottom profiling surveys. It provides all of the tools needed to
design the survey, and collect and process sub-bottom profiler
data.
The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR displays SEG-Y sub-bottom
data and provides tools with which you mark targets, and digitize
your layers. The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR displays the sub-
bottom profiles and converts the digitized points to the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM All format or XYZ format, which may then be
displayed with the targets in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen,
plotted from HYPLOT or converted to other formats in EXPORT.

More Information
• “Opening the Program” on page 1-2
• “HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface” on page 1-2
• “Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM” on page 1-43
• “HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Files” on page 1-58
• “Managing Files in your Project” on page 1-61
• “HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Data Files” on page 1-65

Last Updated May / 2017 1-1

Opening the Program •

OPENING THE PROGRAM

When you install the software on your computer, it creates a
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM desktop icon and a Windows® Start
menu item. To launch the software, click on either one.
FIGURE 1. Launching HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM —Windows® Start Menu
(left), Desktop Icon (right)

The first time you start the package, it loads a default project;
otherwise, it returns to the project where you worked most recently.

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM INTERFACE

The unified HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM user interface displays the
data and project files included in your project.

1- 2 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

FIGURE 2. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM User Interface (Main Program)

Title Bar
Menu Bar
Toolbar

Panels:
• Project
Manager
• Project
Items List
• Web Maps

Status Bar

Area Map Map View Tools

All of the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM programs can be accessed

from the interface. Start programs from either the toolbar or
from the menu bar. The icons and menu selections are
enabled according to your type of license (dongle).

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM PROJECT ITEMS LIST

The HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM user interface includes a tree view
listing of the files associated with the current project, and each file
location, called the Project Items list.
To display the Project Items list, select VIEW-PROJECT ITEMS
or click the Project Items tab.
In the Project Items list, you can do any of the following:
• Control which files are loaded to your project and displayed
in the area maps.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 3

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Items List

• Checkbox checked: File is enabled in your project (drawn

to the screen).
• Checkbox clear: File is disabled.
Tip: Use the Options menu to quickly disable the data files,
the project files, or all files in the Project Items list.
• Red X: File is not available at the designated location.

NOTE: The red X is visible only when OPTIONS-FOLDER

ICONS is selected. Otherwise, the file appears in the
Project Items list without a checkbox.

To remove these files from your project list, select

OPTIONS-REMOVE MISSING FILES from the Project
Items menu.
• Remove files: Select one or more files or folders in the File
Items list then right-click and select REMOVE FILE or
REMOVE FOLDER FILES respectively. The process
unloads them from your project, but does not remove them
from your hard drive.
• Delete files: Select one or more files in the File Items list
then right-click and select DELETE FILE. The unloads them
from your project and moves them to the Windows®
Recycle Bin.
• Rename files via a right-click menu. HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM does not allow you to rename S57, S63, ARCS or
VPF charts.
• Collapse/expand the tree view based on your needs by
clicking the plus and minus signs on the left side.
• Customize the folders displayed using the Options menu
selections:
• Folder Visibility: Select the project file folders to include in
the File List. With these options you can omit folders that
are not applicable to your project.
• Hide Empty Folders: Choose to show all folders selected
under Folder Visibility, or only those that currently contain
project files.
• Folder Icons: Choose traditional Windows® folder and file
icons or just checkboxes.
• Sort the display order of files in each folder. Right-click on
the folder and select Sort by and your choice of sort method: By
name, date or file type.

NOTE: These sort settings remain only until you leave the
project or close HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM.

1- 4 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

• Open any ASCII file in NotePad: Right-click and select ‘Open

in Notepad’.
• Open Windows® Explorer to the folder in which any file in
your project is stored: Right-click and select ‘Open in
Explorer’. Alternatively, open the project folder by selecting
FILE-WINDOWS EXPLORER.
To widen the display area drag the right border horizontally
across the screen.
FIGURE 3. Project Items

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM TOOLBARS

The menu and toolbars in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM shell
access the program modules and display controls. You can toggle
the toolbars on and off through a right-click menu or drag the
toolbars to whatever position you prefer—even outside of the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM window.
The screen controls in each Area Map window remain docked in
the window, but you can dock it to any side.

Menu Bar The HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM menu bar selections group all of
the component programs into basic functional areas.
In addition, the File, View and Settings menu items provide tools
with which you will manage your project and its display settings.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 5

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Toolbars

Toolbar The toolbar quickly launches a program with a click on its icon. As
with all toolbars in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, if you hover the
cursor over an icon, a tool tip appears which describes the function
of the icon.
FIGURE 4. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Toolbar

To turn the toolbar display on/off, right-click in the toolbar area

and select/deselect ‘HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM toolbar’.

Map View Tools The map view tools enable you to quickly adjust the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM screen display. Many of its functions are also found
in the Draw and View menus for each Map window.
To turn the Map View Tool display on/off, right-click in the
toolbar area and select/deselect Map View Tools.

TABLE 1. Map View Tools

Icon Function
Zoom Extents: Draws the display at a zoom scale that displays
all enabled data.
To zoom to the extents of an enabled file, right-click on it in the
Project Items list and select Zoom Extents.
Zoom In/Out: When this option is selected, a left-click decreases
the scale (zoom in) and a right-click increases the scale (zoom
out).
Zoom Window: Select this option and drag a rectangle in the
window to define the extent of your desired view. The program will
redraw the screen to display the defined area optimally.
Pan: Select this option, then click in the window and drag the
cursor to the position where it should be displayed. As you drag,
the program displays the distance and azimuth of the cursor
motion. When you release the mouse button the display updates
accordingly.
The Query Tool displays attribute information about objects in
S57 and SHP charts, as well as about several types of HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM files. When you click the Query Tool icon, the
cursor changes to an Interrogate tool. When you click or drag an
area in the area map, it displays the attribute information for any
object within 2mm of the defined location. All supported objects
within range of your query are listed in the top of the Query
Results window. Select the object on the top and its attribute
information appears below.

1- 6 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

Icon Function
Default Cursor changes the cursor back to the default arrow
used for most general HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM operations. The
cursor position is displayed in the status bar.

NOTE: The Lat-Long grid is displayed in the Lat-Long of the local

datum.

The Measuring Tool measures the distance and azimuth

between points in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM area map.

Rotate to North Up sets the map to position north at the top of

your screen.

Undo reverses the last Zoom operation.

The Sounding Display icon provides quick and easy access to

the sounding style and color options from the Control Panel.

Add Target toggles Target Editor mode, to mark targets with the
cursor in the Map window. For each click, HYPACK® marks a
target in the map and saves it in the Shell target group in the
Project Items list.
Editor Mode: Some of the modules used to create and edit
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM ‘support files’ (ex. border, matrix,
target and plotting sheet editors) allow you to record data in the
editor by clicking positions or manipulating file borders in the area
map. During these processes, you may need to temporarily
interrupt this type of work to adjust the map view which would
require a different cursor tool. To resume recording information to
the editor, you must select your editor from the drop-down
associated with this icon.

CONFIGURING THE HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

TOOLBARS AND MENU BAR
The HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM menu and toolbars are installed
with a default set of items and icons. However, you can configure
them with any number of programs and commands available
according to your license (dongle) type.
1. Right-click on any toolbar and select ‘Customize’. A tabbed
dialog will appear.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 7

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Toolbars

2. In the Toolbars tab, select which toolbars to display,

generate new ones, rename existing bars or delete custom
toolbars you no longer need.
FIGURE 5. Toolbars Tab

• To select which toolbars display, check the

corresponding checkbox in the toolbars list.
• To generate a new toolbar, click [New] and name your
toolbar in the dialog provided then use the Command tab to
add the items you need.
• To rename a toolbar, select the toolbar in the list and click
[Rename]. Enter the new name in the dialog provided and
click [OK].
• To delete a toolbar, select the toolbar in the list and click
[Delete]. You cannot delete the default toolbars.
3. In the Commands tab, configure your menus and icons.
Each menu heading is listed on the left and the commands
applicable to the selected heading are listed on the right.
FIGURE 6. Commands Tab

• To add icons or commands.

1- 8 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

i.Select the menu where the required command is listed

by default.
ii. Drag the command from the list on the right to the
desired menu bar or toolbar location.
• To remove icons or commands from the toolbars drag
from the toolbar to the dialog.
4. In the Options tab, set options for how your menus and
toolbars display.
FIGURE 7. Options Tab

5. Return to the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen by clicking

[Close].

USING THE MEASURING TOOL

You can use the measuring tool to measure the distance and
azimuth between points in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM area
map.
FIGURE 8. Distance and Azimuth Toolbar

Measuring the To measure the distance and azimuth between two points:
Distance and Azi- 1. Click the measuring tool icon in the Map View
muth Between Tools.
Two Points:
2. Use the drop-down list to set the units in which
you want to measure: U.S. feet, meters, kilometers or nautical
miles.
3. Click and drag between the two points on the map. The
measurements will appear in the measuring tool.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 9

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Area Map

Measuring the To measure the distance along a multi-segmented line:

Distance Along A 1. Select [Path].
Multi-segmented
2. Click along the line you want to measure at the beginning,
Line:
at each point where the line changes direction and at the
end. At each click, the toolbar displays the total distance along
line and the azimuth of the most recent segment.

NOTE: The Line to Cursor icon, used together with the

Path, displays the path between the previous
point and your current cursor position.

Beginning a New To begin a new path, click the Clear icon. The Path
Path: button will remain depressed so you can begin another
set of measurements.

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM AREA MAP

The area map displays your project items. It enables you to
preview your map display as you prepare to begin a project, and to
view the results of many of the files generated in post-processing.
The Map window may optionally include one or more widgets:
• The color bar reflects the project colors set in the Color Editor
panel.
• The status bar below the map displays the current cursor
position in X,Y and Lat./Lon. (Local Grid) coordinates, and
indicates the rotation and scale of the area map display.
• The geodesy bar above the map displays the project geodesy
according to current options in the GEODETIC PARAMETERS
program.
:

• The pan/zoom/rotate control to adjust your map

display with your mouse.

• A north arrow

You can display your project data, enabling and disabling files and
with all of the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM view options without
owning a HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM license (Viewer Mode).

1- 10 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

However, a dongle with current license information is required to

access the supporting program modules and do any work.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM provides numerous tools and settings
that enable you to optimize the display of enabled project files.
These settings are configured in one or more locations in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM interface.
• In the menu and Map View tools for each Map window
• In the Control Panel
• In the Project Items List
• In the COLOR EDITOR

SETTING CHART TRANSPARENCY

Background charts and matrix files are often solid areas of color.
Even if they are not solid, they can obstruct your view of another
file drawn beneath it.
Sometimes you can modify the draw order to place the ‘solid’ file
below the file it is obstructing. However, if you have two solid files,
changing the draw order will not help. In this case, you can set the
transparency of the top file so you can see through it to the file
below. Transparency only applies to charts and matrix files.

NOTE: The Transparency option is not available for ARCS, C-Map,

S64, SHP or VPF charts.

To set file transparency:

1. Select one or more files, in the Project Items list, for which
you want to adjust the transparency to the same level.
2. Right-click on the selection and select ‘Transparency’. The
transparency dialog will appear.
FIGURE 9. Transparency Dialog

3. Adjust the level of transparency with the slider.

4. Preview the effect. (Optional) Click [Apply].
5. When your setting is satisfactory, click [OK].

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 11

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Area Map

FIGURE 10. TIF Overlaid on an S57 with 60% Opacity

FIGURE 11. File Transparency - The transparent matrix allows you to see the
TIF chart beneath

You can also set a specified chart color to be transparent. It would

be useful to set, for example, the background color of a DXF chart
to be transparent. Then you could see the data beneath the DXF,
but retain the display of its features.

NOTE: This only works if the color specified is an exact match to the
one in your chart.

To set a transparent chart color:

1. Open the transparency dialog for your chart.
2. Click the Colors Icon and a Color Select dialog will
appear.
3. Select the color you want to become transparent
and click [OK].

1- 12 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

QUERYING AREA MAP FEATURES

The Query Tool displays attribute information about objects
in S57 and SHP charts, as well as about several types of
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM files. When you click the Query
Tool icon, the cursor changes to an Interrogate tool. When you
click or drag an area in the area map, it displays the attribute
information for any object within 2mm of the defined location. All
supported objects within range of your query are listed in the top of
the Query Results window. Select the object on the top and its
attribute information appears below.

FIGURE 12. Sample Query Results—Matrix File (left), Planned Line (right),
Channel (center)

S57 and SHP Click on any feature in your S57 or SHP chart, and the query
Charts window presents information about the chart itself, as well as the
features at your click location. Some charts have purple
information tags. Use the query tool to access the chart information
embedded in the chart.
S57 information will be in either text, *.JPG or *.TIF files, which
must be in the same folder as the chart file.
SHP charts require the corresponding DBF files (with the same
root name) which provide the object attribute information.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 13

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Area Map

FIGURE 13. Sample S57 Information in TIF Format Shows a Profile View of
the Bridge Queried in the Chart.

HYPACK® SUB- Click on a line of All Format data and the Query Results window
BOTTOM All For- presents information about the survey and the individual sounding:
mat Data Files To see survey information, and geodesy and hardware settings,
select the line name in the Query Results window.
Select a sounding to see statistics about that sounding such as the
raw and corrected values, all corrections and quality information.
FIGURE 14. Results of All Format Query—Line Query (left), Sounding Query
(right)

1- 14 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

FIGURE 15. S57 Feature Information

SAVING SCREEN CAPTURES OF THE AREA MAP

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes a simple tool with which you
can export a bitmap (*.BMP) image of your current Area Map
display (excluding the north arrow, color bar and screen controls).
1. Select FILE-CAPTURE IMAGE. A File Save dialog will appear.
2. Navigate to the location where you want to save your
image.
3. Name your file and click [Save].
FIGURE 16. Original HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Screen (left) with the
Captured Image (right)

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 15

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel

DISPLAY SETTINGS IN THE HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

CONTROL PANEL
Select SETTINGS-SETTINGS (F9) to control the presentation in
the area map.
[Apply] enables you to preview your settings before exiting the
Control Panel.
Set as Default saves the current settings and uses them any time
you create a new project.

GENERAL DISPLAY SETTINGS IN HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
FIGURE 17. Control Panel—General Tab

The General Tab sets the display colors of several features.

Data Color Control enables you to select various file types and
click [Color] to specify the color used on the screen.
Default Display determines the Lat/Lon format for data input and
in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM status bar.
Automatic Searching options are used when you return to the
main HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen from one of the program
modules.
• Search Data Files loads all Raw, Edited and Sorted data files
in the project that are not currently loaded to the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM display.

1- 16 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

NOTE: To save time, it loads but does not enable HS2 or HSX
files.

• Search Project Files tells HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM load all

project files in the project to the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
display.
• If you also check the Scan Project When Opened option,
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM reloads the files indicated by the
first two options when you enter the project.
These options are selected by default, however, if you have an
excessive number of files in your project, you may want to manage
the files loaded to your display manually. To do this, deselect one
or both of the search options and the Scan Project option, then
manually draw or remove them in the display as needed using the
Load and Remove options in the right-click menu for each file type
of the Project Items list.

GRID DISPLAY SETTINGS IN HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
FIGURE 18. Grid Tab

The Grid Tabs enable you to specify how HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM displays projection grids and latitude-longitude (lat./lon.)
grids. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM displays the lat./lon. of the local
datum.
Plot toggles the grid display on and off.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 17

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel

Automatic Spacing is the default setting to determine the spacing

between projection grid lines. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
automatically changes the spacing as you zoom in/out.
Fixed Spacing specifies the meters (or feet) between projection
grid lines and seconds of arc between lat/lon grid lines. This will be
kept constant while you zoom in/out.
Style enables you to draw your projection grid using either lines or
tics.
Label Projection enables you to assign which sides of the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen you wish to have the projection
labels placed.
Font enables you to assign the font of the projection grid labels.
Standard Windows® Color Selection and Font Selection dialogs
are presented for your choices.

NOTE: Select only true type fonts to achieve the correct rotation.

Color sets the color for your projection grid lines and labels.
The Latitude-Longitude Grid has an additional setting to those
found under Projection Grid. Format enables you to specify how
the lat./lon. labels are written in the grid and in the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM status bar.

SOUNDINGS DISPLAY SETTINGS IN HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
The Soundings Tab enables you to set how the soundings are
presented and plotted.
To toggle the display of the soundings, right-click the data file
folder and select ‘Enable Soundings’.

1- 18 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

FIGURE 19. Soundings Tab

Orientation draws XYZ data at a user-specified angle relative to

the first LNW file listed in the project files list. Elect to plot
soundings:
• Perpendicular to the planned line,
• Parallel to the planned line
• At a user-defined Fixed Angle. This is the angle the text
appears relative to the map window. (It is unrelated to the map
orientation.) Any angle from -360 to +360 is permissible

Style: Choose the format with which to write your sounding.

• Decimal Point on the Mark (USACE) option places the
decimal point at the location of the sounding and writes a
normal size fraction.
• Cartographic (IHO) centers the integer portion of the sounding
at the sounding location and then writes a smaller, lower
fraction.
• Spanish Navy (IHM) places the decimal point at the location of
the sounding and then writes a smaller, lower fraction.
• Pixel: represent the location of each sounding with a color-
coded Pixel (dot) of a user-defined size.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 19

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel

• Russian: The sounding location is marked with a dot with the

sounding value from the TIN MODEL Input file to its right. If you
have a second TIN model, the depth from the Additional file
appears left of the sounding position.

Color: Defines predefined sounding color settings (Black or

ECDIS) or the value HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM is color-coded
according to a user-defined palette.
When you select the Color by Depth option, click [Color Table] to
assign and configure the color palette in the COLOR EDITOR from
within the Control Panel. This also affects the palette displayed in
the Color Bar.
• Black: HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM ignores the project colors
and draws all soundings in black.
• Color By File enables you to set specific colors for each
catalog or individual file through the right-click menus in the
Project Items list. Files loaded as part of a catalog all inherit the
color of the catalog. When you assign a color to a file, the file
name appears in the same color in the Project Items list.

NOTE: To color individual files, you must first load them to the
project separately.

• ECDIS Colors: HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM ignores the project

colors and draws all soundings according to ECDIS
convention.
• Color by Depth colors your data based on the Z-values.
Configure your palette according to your expected Z range.

Resolution enables you to specify soundings to either one 1

Decimal (Tenths) resolution or 2 Decimal (Hundredths) resolution.
Rounding enables you to determine how the soundings are
presented.
• None displays the soundings decimal places according to the
resolution setting.
• Truncate to Tenth just leaves off the hundredth digit. For
example, 6.97 is written as 6.9.
• HYPACK:
• Depth below Nearest Tenth value: Round to nearest tenth
using a x.05 rounding point (e.g 12.46 -> 12.5)
• Depth below Nearest Half value: Round using 3 rounding
points:
<x.3 =x.0 (e.g 42.28 -> 42.0)
<=x.8 = x.5 (e.g. 42.6 -> 42.5)
> x.8 = (x + 1).0 (e.g. 42.83 -> 43.0)

1- 20 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

• Depth above Nearest Half value: Round to a whole

number using x.8 rounding point (e.g. 123.7 -> 123.0, but
123.8 -> 124.0).
• ROK Rules (Republic of Korea):
• Depth < the specified Nearest Tenth threshold, it is
displayed at the specified decimal resolution.
• Depth >= 31, it is truncated to a whole value, otherwise it is
truncated to the first decimal.

NOTE: The rule stated 31 meters as the whole value threshold

but, if you are using depths in feet, the threshold will be
interpreted as 31 feet by the sounding engine.

• UKHO Rules (United Kingdom Hydrographic Office):

• Depth < 0: Drying Heights are rounded nearest tenth using
a x.03 threshold.
• Depth below Nearest Tenth value: Round to nearest tenth
using a x.08 threshold.
• Depth below Nearest Half value: Output x.0 or x.5 using a
x.5 threshold.
• Depth above Nearest Half value: Round to a whole
number using a x.75 threshold.
• NOAA (National Oceanographic and Atmospheric
Administration):
• Depth < 0: Drying Heights are rounded to nearest whole
number using a x.5 threshold.
• Depth below Nearest Tenth value: Round to nearest tenth
using a x.075 threshold.
• Above Nearest Tenth (Nearest Half not used) Round to a
whole number using a x.75 threshold.
• AHOI (Australian Hydrographic Office):
• Depth < 31: (designed for meters) Display in Tenths, round
at a x.065 threshold.
• Depth >= 31: Display as a whole number, round at a x.65
threshold.
[Test Rounding] provides a quick test platform to aid in
understanding how your current settings affect your sounding
display, and to ensure that the rounding rules have been
implemented correctly. Just enter any sounding value in the dialog
provided and see the display value based on the current option set.

The Options settings contain the following items:

• Negative Soundings get "+" does just that. If you have
processed your sounding data in elevation mode (z values are

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 21

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel

negative), this setting will display them on the screen in depth

mode (z values are positive).
• Hide Soundings Above a user-defined level plots only
soundings deeper than the specified depth.
• Hide Soundings Below a user-defined level plots only
soundings shoaler than he specified depth.
• Depth 1 Text and Depth 2 Text (HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Control Panel only) are the terms by which you, personally, call
the depths in a dual frequency data string. If you prefer a term
other than ’Depth 1’ and ‘Depth 2’, enter them in the fields
provided. Your terms will then replace ‘Depth 1’ and ‘Depth 2’ in
this and other HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM dialogs.

NOTE: These labels have not been fully implemented . They

occur initially in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM and
HYPLOT Control Panels, and in the SB SELECTION
program.

Draw Mode: Select a method and set the corresponding

parameters.
Fonts: [Font] displays the Windows® Font dialog where you can
set font, and font size. (Ignore the remaining options; HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM does.)
Vector options: Set the Vector Scale at which you expect to plot
your survey, then enter a Vector Size that appears as you wish.

More Information
• “Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM” on page 1-32

TRACK LINE DISPLAY SETTINGS IN HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
The Track Lines Tab affects the drawing and labeling of events and
track lines.
To toggle the display of track lines to the screen, right-click the
data file folder in the Project Items list and selecting Enable Track
Lines.

1- 22 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

FIGURE 20. The Track Lines Tab

Event Display Draw Event Symbol instructs the program to draw the event
Options: symbol at points where the SURVEY program generated event
marks.
Label Increment defines how often the event marks will be
labeled. An increment of 1 means every event mark is labeled. An
increment of 5 means every 5th event mark is labeled.
Labels tells the program whether to label Events with Event
Number or Event Time.
Label Orientation sets the angle at which event labels will be
drawn. Elect to label events Perpendicular or Parallel to the
planned line, or define another angle. Fixed Angle is the angle the
text is drawn relative to the map window. (It is unrelated to the map
and sounding orientations.)
[Font] is used to determine the font of the event labels.
[Color] is used to set the color of the event labels.
Track Line Display Draw File Name enables you to label the track lines with its file
Options: name.
File Name Orientation affects track line labels in the same
manner as the Label Orientation affects the event labels.
Additional Track lines enables drawing the track lines of up to 7
vessels (positioning systems) to the screen. We all know that
towfish don't follow the same track of the vessel towing it. Now you
can see both track lines accurately displayed. Track line 1 will
always belong to the vessel designated as the main vessel in
SURVEY.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 23

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel

PLANNED LINE DISPLAY SETTINGS IN HYPACK®

SUB-BOTTOM
The Planned Lines tab includes checkboxes where you can
choose whether to display the lines and the labels.
Click [Line Color] to access a color dialog where you can choose
the color that the planned lines will display.
The Label Orientation and [Font] options are the same a track
line options.
Draw Template Points: If you have a planned line with template
information, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM draws small circles at each
template inflection point in the area map display.
FIGURE 21. The Planned Lines Tab

More Information
• “Planned Survey Lines” on page 2-45

CHART DISPLAY SETTINGS IN HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
The Charts Tab provides display options for background charts.

1- 24 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

FIGURE 22. The Charts Tab

Raster Options: Hide Border displays only the map part of the chart file, omitting
the text, scales and other ‘extraneous’ information around the
outside.
CAD Drawing Display Normally (default) draws your chart using the colors
Option: specified in the file.
Display All Black and Display All White override the chart colors
in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM display.
Hide Soundings above Safe Contour displays soundings, other
than those in the Project Items list, greater than the Safety Contour
value in the S57 Options.
Over scale Lines tell you that you are viewing the chart at a
smaller scale than that in which it was created. An over scale chart
will appear with diagonal, white-dotted lines. These appear on
ARCS chart displays.
Show Text includes item labels in the display. If you have several
labeled items in a small area or if you are viewing a large area at a
small zoom scale, the labels may become confusing. If this is the
case, clear this option to display only the symbols.

S57 Options: [S57 Options] in the displays the ECDIS Display Options dialog.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 25

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel

FIGURE 23. S57 Options Dialog

Symbols: Choose between Traditional and Simplified.

Boundaries: Choose to have them marked with symbols
(Symbolized) or as plain lines (Plain).
Units: Displays depths in your choice of U.S. feet or meters.
Scheme:
• S52: The industry standard where the colors progress from
darkest to lighter shades of blue as depths increase.
• Bathy Blue: The reverse of S52 where the deepest water is
the darkest color.
• Red Yellow Green: Displays three categories of depth areas:
• unsafe (red),
• safe with caution (yellow)
• safe (green)

1- 26 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

FIGURE 24. S57 Color Schemes: S52 (left), Bathy Blue (center), Red Yellow
Green (right)

Safety Depth displays depth labels in different colors above and

below this depth.
Safety Contour, Shallow Contour and Deep Contour define
different depth ranges which will be displayed with backgrounds of
different shades of blue.

NOTE: This option is overridden by the Two Depth Shades option.

Scale Minimum displays different map features and symbols at

varying zoom scales according to S57 standards. This option
prevents your Map window from becoming overly cluttered. If this
option is clear, everything will be displayed regardless of the zoom
scale.
Two Depth Shades uses only two shades to display depths
greater than and less than the Safety Contour.
Shallow Pattern draws a pattern in the areas of the map where
the depth is shoaler than the safety contour.
Full Sector Lights includes data regarding direction and color of
lights. If this is off, you will see only the position of the light source.
Show Soundings toggles the display of chart soundings.
Visual Quality of Data: S57 charts include markings that indicate
whether the chart has been tested for accuracy and, if so, how
accurate it is. Check this option to clear this ‘clutter’ from your
display.
Draw Information Boxes: Draws S57 markers at all points of
interest. Clearing this option will provide a less cluttered display.
Load Chart Updates: When you load a base chart (typically *.000)
and there are update charts (typically *.001, *.002…) in the same
folder, checking this option loads all related chart information to
provide the most updated display.
Seasonal/Time Period Filter: Object attributes may specify time
ranges when they would be most applicable to display. Check this

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 27

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel

option to display only objects whose attributes match the current

time.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Soundings Display: When 'Show
Soundings' is checked, this option toggles between ECDIS display
and HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM display options.
Isolated Danger in Shallow Water assures that those features
coded as isolated dangers are always displayed.
Hide Extra Contours: Omits any contour that is above the deep
contour or below the shallow contour. They are valid contours, but
do not contribute to the safe navigation of your vessel.
Text Display Groups: Charts can get cluttered with excessive
text. Select only those text features you want to see in your chart
display.

Contour Tab: The Contour Planning tab provides options that adjust the display
by additional user-defined variables related to your vessel and tide
conditions. It also enables you to search for features, such as
bridges, that may be too low for your vessel to safely pass under.
FIGURE 25. Contour Planning View Options

Tide: Tide level expected when you will be on the water.

Keel Depth: Distance from the water surface to the tip of the keel.
Safety Margin: Enables you to adjust the contours to allow for this
amount of clearance beneath the keel.

1- 28 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

Ship Height: Distance from the water level to the highest point on
your vessel.
Set Shallow Contour to Keel Depth and Safety Contour to Keel
Depth + Safety Margin calculates the adjusted contours based on
your Keel Depth and Safety Margin variables.
Adjust Contours to Tide: Depth areas, contours and spot
soundings are displayed accounting for changing tide levels to
provide more accurate, real-time depth information for the
helmsman.
Calculating the To calculate the adjusted contour levels without affecting the
Adjusted Con- chart display, enter your variables and click [Update]. The lower
tours part of the dialog compares your contour depths as defined in the
General Display tab and their adjusted values based on your
contour planning options.
Checking Vertical To verify safe vertical clearance, click [Vertical Clearance]. The
Clearance program lists chart features that include the Vertical Clearance
attribute, and use the user-defined Keel Depth, Vessel Height and
(optionally) tide to calculate locations where your vessel has
inadequate clearance.
FIGURE 26. Vertical Clearance Report

VPF Display Check the features listed in the Feature Selection you wish to have
Options: drawn and click [Apply] and [Close].

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 29

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Display Settings in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel

FIGURE 27. VPF Display Options

Raster Options: Hide Border allows you to draw ARCS and BSB
charts without the border visible.

More Information
• “Background Charts” on page 2-3

TARGET DISPLAY SETTINGS IN HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
FIGURE 28. Target Display Settings

The Targets tab of the Control Panel sets the target display in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM main window. The SURVEY display
settings are set independently.

1- 30 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

Target Display Options:

• Circle displays a plain target. Additional display options apply:
• Number of Circles: Circles drawn around each plain target
to make them more visible on your map displays.
• Circle Radius: Distance, in survey units, between the
target and target circles around each target.
• Draw Target Label toggles the display of the target name
when you are drawing circle targets. Too many target labels
may clutter your display.
• Orientation sets the angle at which target labels will be
drawn when the circle target display is selected. Elect to
label targets Perpendicular or Parallel to the planned line,
or define another angle. Fixed Angle is the angle the text is
drawn relative to the map window. (It is unrelated to the
map orientation.)
• Alarm includes a flag with the target name. Its background
changes color according to the Alarm Distances settings. In
SURVEY, alarm flags also display distance and bearing from
the tracking point to the target.
• Alarm Distances: If you display the alarm flags, you can
set them to change color according the distance between
the targets and the boat origin. In the previous figure, the
alarm flag will turn green when the vessel comes within 500
survey units of the target, yellow when it is within 200 units
and red when it reaches 50 units from the target. These are
the default colors and may be changed using the program.
• Set the orientation of the alarm flag in SURVEY through
the Target Properties dialog or by entering the number of
degrees rotated from north under ‘Angle’ in the TARGET
EDITOR.
• S57 Symbols can also be displayed at target locations. The
symbols are set in the TARGET EDITOR.
FIGURE 29. Sample S57 Symbols at Target Locations

Target Label Color and Font can be set through a Windows®

Font dialog. Just click […] and make your changes. The alarm flag
will automatically resize to fit the label information. (If your labels
are too large, try a smaller font.)

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 31

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

More Information
• “Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM” on page 2-111
• “TARGET EDITOR” on page 2-113
• “Target Display Options” on page 2-112
• “Targets in SURVEY” on page 3-42

PROJECT COLORS IN HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

Palette 1 defines the default project colors that color-code your
sounding and matrix files, or select calculated values in your
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM displays. You can override the palette
colors with some of the Color options in the Soundings tab of the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel: Black, ECDIS Colors,
and Color by File.
FIGURE 30. Color-coded Sounding Data

Alternatively, you can assign a palette to a particular XYZ or matrix

file through its right-click menu in the Project Items list.
Use the COLOR EDITOR to create color palettes for the value
ranges that are represented in your data. Each palette option in the
Colors menu has a default HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Color File
(*.HCF) that stores the latest settings:

TABLE 2. Default Files

Colors Menu Selection Default HCF File Name

Palette 1 color.HCF
Palette 2 clr01.HCF
Palette 3 clr02.HCF

1- 32 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

Colors Menu Selection Default HCF File Name

Palette 4 clr03.HCF
Palette 5 clr04.HCF
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM overwrites the HCF file for your current
palette each time you apply the colors to your project .
The COLOR EDITOR panel is used only to configure the 5
palettes. The project colors are always Palette 1. Assign any of the
additional palettes to a select XYZ or MTX file through its right-click
menu in the Project Items list (SET PALETTE).
Tip: You can create additional HCF (HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Color File) files using different file names. Doing so enables you to
quickly restore the same colors by loading the desired HCF file into
the selected color palette.Your selections of color style, zone
colors and band settings define your palette colors. Once you
select your color style, you can further customize the colors and
the values they represent by editing the color range, zones and
bands.

The Color Zones set the color sequence used by your color style.
The COLOR EDITOR evenly distributes the zone colors over the
user-defined color range, then smooths (interpolates) the colors for
the bands (value increments) between each zone color. Some
color styles have fixed zones, however, most allow you to change
one or more colors in the sequence. If the zone colors are editable,
the Color Zones display appears below the menu in the COLOR
EDITOR.

Bands are the value increments in your color palette. Typically,

each band has a unique color so you can distinguish data values in
your graphical displays.

ABOUT COLOR STYLES

The Color Style initiates a predefined sequence of colors (zones)
that is used to color-code your data in your area map. Select your
style from the Style menu in the COLOR EDITOR.

• RGB Color uses a rainbow spectrum, automatically distributing

the colors over the specified depth range. The color zones, and
bands are editable. RGB Color is the only style in which the
colors can be smoothed (interpolated).
• DXF Color works in similar manner to RGB Color. However,
color selection is limited by the AutoCAD Color dialog and only
individual color bands can be edited.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 33

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

• Light, Medium and Dark Spectra automatically calculates a

preset range of colors over the depth range. The individual
color bands cannot be edited, but the sequence of colors that
create the spectrum (zones) can be customized.
• Relief and Chart automatically calculate a preset palette of
colors over the depth range. You cannot edit zones or bands.
• DXF Spectrum distributes a DXF compliant rainbow spectrum
over 20 bands. When you select DXF Spectrum, HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM automatically adjusts the current increment to
evenly distribute the specified range over the 20 bands. You
cannot edit zones or bands.
• Contrast uses a series of highly contrasting colors to provide
distinct transitions between band ranges. You cannot edit
zones or bands.
• Side Scan Options: There are several ‘Sidescan X’ options in
the Color Style list are specifically designed to display side
scan data. They automatically change the number of bands to
range from 0 to 63 and apply color combinations that mimic the
colors from the Colors tab in the Side Scan Controls dialog.
You cannot edit individual bands.
Different color styles support different sets of editing capabilities:

TABLE 3. Color Style Editing Capabilities

Color Style Color Zones Band Color Color Smoothing

RGB Yes Yes Yes
DXF No Yes No
Light, Medium Yes No No
and Dark
Spectrum
DXF Spectrum No No No
Relief, Chart, No No No
Gray Scale and
Contrast
Side Scan Yes No No
Options
All styles allow you to invert your colors across the color range.

MODIFYING COLOR ZONES IN THE COLOR EDITOR

The Color Zones set the color sequence used by your color style.
The COLOR EDITOR evenly distributes the zone colors over the
user-defined color range, then smooths (interpolates) the colors for

1- 34 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

the bands (value increments) between each zone color. Some

color styles have fixed zones, however, most allow you to change
one or more colors in the sequence. If the zone colors are editable,
the Color Zones display appears below the menu in the COLOR
EDITOR.

To change a zone color, do the following:

1. Click on the zone. A color dialog appears.
2. Choose a color and click [OK]. Your color is inserted in the
selected zone and smoothed into the neighboring colors.
3. Click [Apply]. This updates your displays with the new color
palette and stores your current palette in the corresponding
HCF file.
FIGURE 31. Original Medium Spectrum (left), First Color Zone Changed to
Yellow (right)

GENERATING THE COLOR BANDS FOR A PALETTE IN

THE COLOR EDITOR

When you have selected your palette, and color style, you are
ready to define the value range for the palette and generate the
color bands that compose the palette.
Bands are the value increments in your color palette. Typically,
each band has a unique color so you can distinguish data values in
your graphical displays.

When you define the initial color palette in your project, you set the
minimum and maximum values that your colors represent. Data

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 35

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

values less than the defined minimum use the color of the first
band in the palette, while values greater than the maximum use the
color of last band.
The Increment option determines the number of color bands:

Number of Bands = (Maximum - Minimum) / Increment (EQ 1)

There are two exceptions to this rule:
• The DXF Spectrum color style defaults to 20 bands and
adjusts the increment accordingly.
• The Side Scan styles set the minimum to zero, the maximum
to 63 and the increment to 1, then apply the colors across the
bands.
1. Select BANDS-SET BANDS. The Depth Ranges dialog
appears.
FIGURE 32. Depth Ranges Dialog

2. In the Depth Ranges dialog, do the following:

a. Check the Clear Existing Ranges option. This tells the
editor to generate a color palette based only on the
currently selected style and the information in this dialog.
b. Enter the minimum and maximum values.
c. Enter the increment. The units depend on what the colors
represent. (For example, survey units for sounding depths
or gamma for magnetometer data.)
d. Use the Adjust Bands feature, to fine tune the range.
(Optional) Enter the increment then click the [+] and [-] to
shift the range up and down. (The number and size of the
bands remain constant.)
e. Click [OK] to generate your color palette.
3. Click [Apply]. This updates your displays with the new color
palette and stores your current palette in the corresponding
HCF file.
Tip: If you have an XYZ file representative of your data set, you
can quickly set the color palette to fit your depth range:

1- 36 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

1. Right-click on the XYZ file in the Project Items list, select

SET PALETTE and choose the palette with which you will
color the file Z-values.
2. Right-click on the XYZ file in the Project Items list and
select SET PALETTE RANGE FOR ASSOCIATED PALETTE.

MODIFYING COLOR BANDS IN THE COLOR EDITOR

Bands are the value increments in your color palette. Typically,
each band has a unique color so you can distinguish data values in
your graphical displays.

You can modify the bands in your project colors in several ways:
• Change the color of 1 or more zones
• Change the range of values your project colors represent.
• Change the color of one or more bands
• Add bands
• Remove bands

CHANGING When you have chosen the color style and defined the initial color
INDIVIDUAL BAND palette, the COLOR EDITOR displays a preview of the defined
COLORS project colors. There may be times when you want to change the
color of one or more bands, perhaps to highlight them in your map
display.
1. Select the band from the color display in the COLOR
EDITOR.
2. Select BANDS-EDIT SELECTED BAND. A color dialog
appears. (If this option is disabled, your color style does not
support this feature.)
3. Select the desired color and click [OK].

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 37

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

FIGURE 33. Individual Bands Highlighted by Contrasting Color

4. Click [Apply]. This updates your displays with the new color
palette and stores your current palette in the corresponding
HCF file.

SMOOTHING BAND The RGB color style supports manual smoothing which
COLORS interpolates the colors over several selected bands. You can
interpolate colors across the full range of the color bar or only a
selected portion.
1. Set the colors for the first and last band in the range where
you want to interpolate the colors.
2. Hold the Shift key and click the first and last band in the
range to interpolate. They are highlighted by a dark
background.
3. Select BANDS-SMOOTH SELECTED BANDS.

1- 38 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

FIGURE 34. Band Colors Smoothed Twice—Above and Below Grade Level

4. Click [Apply]. This updates your displays with the new color
palette and stores your current palette in the corresponding
HCF file.

ADDING COLOR When you have chosen the color style and defined the color range,
BANDS the COLOR EDITOR displays a preview of the defined project
colors. There may be times when you want to add one or more
bands at specified values in addition to those generated at the
original intervals. You can add bands one at a time or at even
intervals across a specified range.

NOTE: The COLOR EDITOR does not remove existing bands. It

calculates the levels defined by the dialog and adds bands
at those levels where none currently exist.

When you add bands to most existing color sets, the program
assigns the color interpolated from the band colors on either side.
When you add a band to RGB Spectrum and DXF Spectrum style
color sets, the added band defaults to black, but you can edit the
color of the band to be anything you want.
Adding One Band 1. Select BANDS-ADD SINGLE BAND. The Add Depth Band
dialog appears.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 39

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

FIGURE 35. Add Depth Band Dialog

2. Enter the depth for your new band and click [OK]. A new
band is added to your project colors at the specified value.
FIGURE 36. Added Band at 27.5—Before (left) and After (right)

3. Click [Apply]. This updates your displays with the new color
palette and stores your current palette in the corresponding
HCF file.
Adding Multiple 1. Select BANDS-SET BANDS. The Depth Ranges dialog
Bands appears.

1- 40 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface

FIGURE 37. Depth Ranges Dialog

2. Deselect the Clear Existing Ranges option. This tells the

COLOR EDITOR to modify the existing project colors rather
than creating a new color palette.
3. Enter the Minimum and Maximum of the range in which
you want to increase the number of bands.
4. Enter the increment you want between the added bands
and click [OK].
FIGURE 38. Adding Multiple Bands

5. Click [Apply]. This updates your displays with the new color
palette and stores your current palette in the corresponding
HCF file.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 41

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface • Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

REMOVING COLOR As you customize your color palette, you may want to remove one
BANDS or more color bands. When you delete a color band, the COLOR
EDITOR merges the values from the deleted band with the next
higher band.
1. Use your cursor to select one or more bands.
• To select one band, click on the band in the display.
• To select multiple individual bands, hold the Ctrl key
while you click.
• To select several contiguous bands, hold the Shift key
and click the first and last band.
2. Select BANDS-DELETE SELECTED BANDS.
FIGURE 39. Deleting a Band (14.00-15.99)—Before (left) and After (right)

3. Click [Apply]. This updates your displays with the new color
palette and stores your current palette in the corresponding
HCF file.

LOADING A HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM COLOR FILE

TO A PALETTE

To reload a HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Colors File (*.HCF) in the

COLOR EDITOR, do the following:
1. In the Colors menu, select the color palette you want to
configure with your HCF file settings.
2. Select OPTIONS-OPEN COLOR FILE.
3. Select your HCF file and click [Open].

1- 42 Introduction
Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

4. Click [Apply]. This updates your selected palette and the

corresponding HCF file with the color settings in the selected
HCF file.

LANGUAGE SELECTION
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM is available in multiple languages. If you
want to use HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM using a language other
than English, you must load the languages during installation.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM will then default to the language set in
Windows® if it is available. If the Windows® language is not
available, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM will default to English.
You may change the language designation by selecting your
preference from the SETTINGS-LANGUAGE menu. To set your
choice as the default, you must then exit and re-launch HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM.
The language of each program module will default to the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM language if it is available. Otherwise, it
will be displayed in English. You may change the language of any
module individually through the language menu. That change will
remain effective until you exit the module.

PROJECTS IN HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

Every time you begin a new survey in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM,
you create a new “project”. A project is a folder, with a user-
defined project name, and all of the information about your survey
it contains. Under the project folder, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
creates a series of subfolders:
• Raw, Edit, Sort data files will be saved, by default, to the
subfolder appropriate to their type.
• Satellite: Georeferenced PNG files, generated from satellite
images available on Web servers. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
shows them in the Web Maps folder of the Project Items list.
The project file group is a folder that stores one or more
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM projects. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
stores projects, by default, to the \HYPACK Sub-bottom\Projects
folder. Projects stored there are known as local projects.
As part of the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM network capabilities, you
may also store projects in project file group folders in alternate
locations on your computer or network. Projects that reside outside

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 43

Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • The Project Manager

the \HYPACK Sub-bottom\Projects folder are known as network

projects.
To verify the project path, check the path of the project group
folder in the Project Manager.
FIGURE 40. Project Manager

Tip: To access the current project folder, select the FILE-

WINDOWS EXPLORER menu option or right-click on a file in the
Project Items list and select ‘Open in Explorer’.

THE PROJECT MANAGER

The Project Manager lists available projects and project group
folders, and highlights the current project. Each project listing
includes the date it was last modified. Each project group folder
includes the hard drive location.
To view the Project Manager, select VIEW-PROJECT
MANAGER.

1- 44 Introduction
Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

FIGURE 41. Project Manager

Use the Project Manager to manage your individual projects and to

customize the project and project group folder lists.

MANAGING PROJECT GROUP FOLDERS

The Project Manager displays project group folders and the
projects they contain. It also controls the display of the folders in
the Project Manager.

NOTE: Changes made to project group folders through the Project

Manager do not affect the folders on your hard drive. These
options are for display purposes only.

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM begins with two group folders:

• The Local \HYPACK Sub-bottomProjects group includes the
projects from the \HYPACK Sub-bottom\Projects folder.
• The Network group also points, initially, to the \HYPACK Sub-
bottom\Projects folder.
The \HYPACK Sub-bottomProjects and Network groups can
neither be renamed nor deleted, but they can be assigned to an
alternate location.
When you have additional project locations, you can add, remove
and rename additional project group folders in the Project
Manager. In addition, you can select a project group folder to
display in the Project Manager, or display all project group folders.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 45

Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Managing Project Group Folders

ASSIGNING THE GROUP LOCATION

You can make a project group display the contents of a different
folder in your system. This can be useful if you move projects on
your system, then need to tell HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM where to
find them.
1. Open the Project Manager. Click the Project Manager tab or
select VIEW-PROJECT MANAGER.
2. Right-click on the project group that you want to move and
select Set Group Location. A File Select dialog appears.
3. Direct HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to the folder to which you
want the project group assigned.
Tip: If the folder doesn’t yet exist, navigate to the folder in
which it should reside and use [Make New Folder] to create the
new project group destination folder.
4. Click [OK]. The Project Group path updates in the Project
Manager.

ADDING AND REMOVING PROJECT GROUP FOLDERS

Initially, the Project Manager displays only the \HYPACK Sub-
bottomProjects and Network project folders. However, you may
add alternate project group folders and display them in addition to
the initial project folders.
Adding a Project 1. Select GROUPS-ADD GROUP. A browse dialog appears.
Group Folder 2. Select the alternate folder and click [OK]. The Modify
Display Name dialog appears.
3. Enter a display new display name. (Optional) This option is
useful if you have more than one project group folder with the
same name on your system memory.
4. Click [OK]. The Project Manager displays the new project
group folder and any projects that may be stored there.
The name of each added project group folder appears in the
Projects menu where you may select it for display.
Removing a Proj- To remove a project group folder from the Project Manager
ect Group Folder display, right-click on the project group file that you want to remove
and select the Remove Folder option.

NOTE: This option is not available for the \HYPACK Sub-

bottomProjects or Network project groups.

1- 46 Introduction
Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

RENAMING PROJECT GROUP FOLDERS

The Project Manager enables you to rename your project group
folders in the Project Manager display. This option is useful if you
have more than one project group folder with the same name on
your system memory. You cannot rename the \HYPACK Sub-
bottomProjects or Network project group.
1. Right-click on the project group folder and select Rename
Group. A Set Display Name dialog appears with the current
folder name.
FIGURE 42. Set Display Name Dialog

2. Name your folder.

• To customize the name, enter your new name in the field
provided.
• To display the same name as Windows® Explorer, clear
the field.
3. Click [OK].

NAVIGATING PROJECT GROUPS

When you store projects in multiple locations, you can display one
or all of the defined project group folders in the Project Manager
using the Projects menu options.
To display one project group folder, select the desired folder
from the Projects menu.
To display all project group folders, select PROJECTS-SHOW
ALL.
To display the projects in a project group folder, click the [+]
that precedes the project group folder name in the Project
Manager.
Tip: If a project group list appears to be unsynchronized with
the projects you see in Windows® Explorer, try the following:
• Rescan the group folder. Right-click on the project group and
select Rescan Folder. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM rechecks the
projects at the selected location and regenerates the project
group list.
• Select OPTIONS-SHOW HIDDEN PROJECTS to see if it is
hidden.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 47

Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Managing Project Group Folders

When HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM starts for the very first time, it

automatically opens the sample Halifax project that you can use as
a test project, or you can create a new project of your own.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically opens subsequent
sessions in the last project of the previous session.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes multiple methods for creating
projects. Choose the method that best serves your needs.
• New Project: The first time that you work at a particular site,
you create a new project. Each time you create a new project,
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM creates a folder using the project
name in the user-defined project group folder location. The new
project defaults to the geodesy, hardware and SURVEY
settings of the current project, but you must modify them for
your current project location, sensors and requirements, if
necessary.
• Copy Project: If you are going to work in an area you have
worked before (for example, running a postdredge survey
where you have already performed the predredge), you should
create a new project by copying the existing project. The
program generates a new project folder with a user-defined
name and project group folder location.
All files in the selected project folder except project data, data
from the project \automatrix folder, and tide and sound velocity
correction files are copied to the new project maintaining their
enabled or disabled state. Files referenced in the project that
are outside of the project folder are not copied.
• Transfer Project: This gives you the same result as using
Windows® Explorer to copy the project folder to another folder
location. The result is two identical, but independently
functioning projects, with the same name but different
locations.
FIGURE 43. Comparison of Project Creation Techniques

New Project Copy Project Transfer Project

Geodesy Copied from current Copied from original Copied from original
projecta project project
Boat Hardware Copied from current Copied from original Copied from original
projecta project project
Survey Settings Copied from current Copied from original Copied from original
project a project project
(window layout,
navigation parameters,
alarm settings, etc.)

1- 48 Introduction
Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

New Project Copy Project Transfer Project

Planned Lines None Copied from original Copied from original
project project
Background Files None Copied from original Copied from original
project project
Data Files None None Copied from original
project
Other Files None Copied from original Copied from original
project except tide project
(targets, plotting sheets,
correction files
matrix files, etc.)
Display Settings Uses default display Copied from original Copied from original
settings set in the project project
Control Panel
a. If this is your very first project, you must set your Geodesy, Hardware and Survey settings as well.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes a sample project with the installation and will default to those settings if
no other projects have been created.

Over time, as you survey different areas at different times, you will
create and work on several projects, and change from one project
to another according to the set of data on which you are working.
Of course, over time, if you kept every project you ever recorded,
the long project lists would become unnecessarily awkward, so you
can hide them in the project list or delete them from your hard
drive.
All of these tasks are done through the Project Manager.

OPENING AN EXISTING PROJECT

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically opens to the last project
of the previous session. If you want to work in another project, the
Project Manager provides multiple methods with which you can
open an existing project:
• Recent Projects
• Filter Your Projects
• Manually Navigate through the Project Manager
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM restores the screen, geodesy, colors
and other settings as when you last saved the selected project.
As long as you comply with the network system requirements, files
can be read and written across the network. Anyone (with proper
network permission) can access projects simultaneously across
the network. This means that one user can be creating reports from
data one day while another can be editing data from the next. It

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 49

Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Opening an Existing Project

also means that there is potential for the two users to compromise
each other’s work.
BEWARE! Take care that files within a project that are likely to be
changed are accessed by only one user at a time. There is poten-
tial for one user over-writing the other's work. ("He who saves last
wins!")

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM monitors projects for multiple,

simultaneous users and, by default, warns you that there are other
users working in the project and who they are in the Project Usage
dialog:
FIGURE 44. Project Usage Dialog

The Automatically Show option provides the automated warning.

To view the same dialog manually, select FILE-PROJECT
USAGE. The dialog displays the users working in the project at that
time. Use [Refresh] to update the display after a time.

OPENING RECENT PROJECTS

The Projects menu lists the last ten projects where you have
worked. Quickly return to any of those projects by selecting it in the
menu.
FIGURE 45. Selecting a Recent Project

1- 50 Introduction
Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

Tip: To remove all of the projects from the Recent menu, select
PROJECTS-CLEAR RECENT PROJECTS. The menu begins to
rebuild itself from that point forward.

FILTERING YOUR PROJECTS

If you know the name of the desired project or if you have tagged
your projects with key words, use the project filter to quickly find it.
The project filter updates the projects listed in the Project
Manager to include only those projects with names or tags fulfilling
the filter criteria.
To fulfill the filter criteria, any part of the project name contains
the filter sequence, or one of the project tags exactly matches a the
filter sequence.
For example, the CD from the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM training
conference has about 40 projects with sample data of all types. If
you are interested in only side scan projects, enter ‘side scan’ and
the filter will show only those projects with side scan in their name.
1. Open the Project Manager. Click the Project Manager tab or
select VIEW-PROJECT MANAGER.
2. Display the correct project group folder.
Tip: If you are unsure of the project group in which your project
resides, display all project group folders. The filter shows any
project in any group folder that meets the filter criteria.
3. Begin typing the project name in the Project Filter area.
The Project Manager updates to include only those projects
with names containing the filter sequence.
Tip: To clear the Project Filter, click the ‘X’ in the Project Filter
field.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 51

Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Opening an Existing Project

FIGURE 46. Filtering your Projects—Display All Projects With Filter Criteria of
“si” (left), Display Network Group with Filter Criteria of CHN
(right).

MANUALLY NAVIGATING THROUGH THE PROJECT

MANAGER DISPLAY
1. Open the Project Manager. Click the Project Manager tab or
select VIEW-PROJECT MANAGER.
2. Display the correct project group folder in the Project
Manager and expand it to show its projects.
3. Double-click on the desired project or right-click on the
project and select Open Project.

1- 52 Introduction
Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

FIGURE 47. Opening the Project Through the Right-click Menu

CREATING A NEW PROJECT

Each time you begin a new survey, you should create a new
project. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM enables you to name your
project and then stores all of the information about that survey in
the project folder.
1. Select FILE-NEW PROJECT and the New Project dialog
appears.
FIGURE 48. Setting the New Project Name and Location

2. Name the project and select a folder where the project will
be stored.
• Project Name: Enter a name that will remind you of the
location and the date of the survey. Project names may not
contain periods, back or forward slashes, question marks,
less than or greater than signs, or bars.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 53

Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Copying an Existing Project

TABLE 4. Invalid Characters

. / \ ? < > |
• Project Folder: Enter the project group folder where your
project should reside. We recommend you use the default
project folder (\HYPACK Sub-bottomProjects).
The software creates a folder in the specified location using the
project name.
3. Click [OK].

COPYING AN EXISTING PROJECT

1. Open the Project Manager. Click the Project Manager tab or
select VIEW-PROJECT MANAGER.
2. Direct HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to the correct group
folder, if necessary.
3. Right-click on the project and select Copy Project. The
Copy Project dialog appears.
FIGURE 49. Copy Project Dialog

4. Name your new project, choose a project group folder and

click [OK].

TRANSFERRING PROJECTS BETWEEN PROJECT GROUP

FOLDERS
To create a duplicate copy of a project in another project group
folder, transfer the project. The result is two identical, but
independently functioning projects, with the same name but
different locations.

1- 54 Introduction
Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

1. Open the Project Manager. Click the Project Manager tab or

select VIEW-PROJECT MANAGER.
2. Add the destination folder as a project group folder, if
necessary.
3. Direct HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to the project group folder
where your project currently resides, if necessary.
4. Right-click on the project and select Transfer Project then
the project group folder to which you want the project
copied. The Project Manager copies the project, using the
same project name, to the destination folder and asks if you
want to open the copied project. To stay in the current project,
click [No].
BEWARE! Be careful how you use this feature! The potential for
overwriting work is real. We recommend designating one location
for project storage, then working on projects over the network, if
possible.

TAGGING YOUR PROJECTS

Project tags are one or more user-defined key words (tags) that
provide added project filtering capability.
The project filter updates the projects listed in the Project
Manager to include only those projects with names or tags fulfilling
the filter criteria.
To fulfill the filter criteria, any part of the project name contains
the filter sequence, or one of the project tags exactly matches a the
filter sequence.
To apply project tags, do the following:
1. In the Project Manager, select PROJECTS-TAG EDITOR. A
tagging area appears below the projects list.
2. Select the project you want to tag.
3. Enter one or more tags in the tagging area and click
[Update Tags]. Enter tags in a space-delimited list. They are
not case-sensitive.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 55

Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Renaming your Project

FIGURE 50. Filtering Tagged Projects

RENAMING YOUR PROJECT

From the Project Manager, you can rename any project other than
the one that is currently open. When you rename a project, the
Windows® folder and the ProjectName.ini file are renamed at their
current location and the name in the Project Manager list is
updated accordingly.
To rename a project:
1. Open the Project Manager. Click the Project Manager tab or
select VIEW-PROJECT MANAGER.
2. Navigate to the project group folder where the project to
be renamed is stored.
3. Right-click on the project to be renamed and select
Rename Project. The Rename Project dialog appears with the
name of the selected project in the title bar.
FIGURE 51. Rename Project Dialog

4. Enter the new project name and click [OK].

1- 56 Introduction
Projects in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

HIDING AND RESTORING YOUR PROJECT

If you kept every project you ever recorded, the long project lists
would become unnecessarily awkward. You can temporarily
manage the project list by hiding and restoring projects.

NOTE: You can not hide your the currently active project.

Hiding Projects Hiding a project appends "(deleted)" to the file name and removes
the project from the list in the Project Manager. It does not delete
the project or any files within the project from the hard drive.
1. Open the Project Manager. Click the Project Manager tab or
select VIEW-PROJECT MANAGER.
2. Select the location (Project Group Folder) where your new
project resides.
3. Right-click on the project and select HIDE PROJECT and
click [Yes] to confirm the operation.
Restoring Hidden When you restore a project, the program returns the project name
Projects to the to its original name and the project, again, appears in the Project
Project Manager Manager list.
List 1. View a complete project list. Select PROJECTS-SHOW
HIDDEN PROJECTS. The Project Manager lists hidden
projects in red while the unhidden projects remain in black.
FIGURE 52. Showing Hidden Projects

2. Right-click on the project to be restored and select SHOW

PROJECT. The project, again, displays in black and remains in
the list.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 57

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Files • Deleting your Project

3. Rehide hidden projects. Select PROJECTS and deselect

SHOW HIDDEN PROJECTS.

DELETING YOUR PROJECT

If you are very sure you are finished with a project, you can send
the project folder and all of its contents to the Windows® Recycle
Bin.
You can not delete the current project.

IMPORTANT! To avoid data loss, store a copy of your project in an

alternate location.

1. Open the Project Manager. Click the Project Manager tab or

select VIEW-PROJECT MANAGER.
2. Select the location (Project Group Folder) where your new
project resides.
3. Right-click on the project you want to delete in the project
list and select DELETE PROJECT. The program will confirm
with you that you want to delete the project.
4. Click [OK] to complete the process. The project folder moves
from the project group folder to the recycle bin.

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM PROJECT FILES

Project Files are the support files (not data files) used in the
project.

Background charts provide context and navigational reference for

your work. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM displays several types of
electronic charts in the area map and in the data collection and
editing programs.

NOTE: Charts drawn in XY (DGN, DXF, DIG, TIF and SHP) must be
in the same geodesy as your project to be positioned
correctly. Charts drawn in WGS-84 (S57, VPF), the
SURVEY program will transform the data files to the local
datum, using the datum transformation parameters in the
GEODETIC PARAMETERS program, before converting
them to your projection. This allows you to use these file
formats on any projection.

1- 58 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Files

Border Files (*.BRD): A user-defined listing of XY positions that

defines an area in your project area. Typically, Border files are
created in the BORDER EDITOR and stored in your project folder.
They have several uses, most often to clip data or limit program
calculations to a user-defined area.
Use a border file to trim data and limit the extents of your display in
the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR.

Matrix files (*MTX) are gridded rectangular areas. You can fill the
cells with depth information from your sub-bottom profiler in real
time during data collection, or in post-processing.
Empty matrix files are typically created in the MATRIX EDITOR
and saved to the project folder.

FIGURE 53. Matrix File in the SURVEY Programs

Planned survey lines (*.LNW) define where you want your vessel
to go. The line file contains the grid coordinates and names for
each planned line in your project area and can also contain cross
section template information. Line files are typically created in the
LINE EDITOR program.

Plotting Sheet files (*.PLT) contain origin coordinates, scale,

rotation, and sheet dimensions for plotting on smooth sheets.
These files are typically created in the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR
and saved with the PLT extension to your project file. They are
primarily used by HYPLOT to define the plot area.

Targets mark points of interest in your project area. To that end,

each target must at least include a name and the XY position, but it
can also include a lot of other metadata according to the project
and the technology used and the program in which you mark your
target. Targets marked in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR
includes depth and depth of burial.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 59

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Files • Deleting your Project

You can create targets in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM interface

or in the TARGET EDITOR then display them in the SURVEY
program. This enables you to navigate to predetermined locations
or away from areas dangerous for navigation. You can also mark
targets at points of interest in SURVEY and in post-processing and
save them to the project target list. The TARGET EDITOR displays
all information about each target in one window and enables you to
modify target properties and attributes where appropriate.

FIGURE 54. Targets in SURVEY.

Each project maintains a target database (targets.db) in the

project folder. The HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM shell, SURVEY and
SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR all read and write target information
to this database. The database model currently supports a lengthy
list of target properties and attributes. Each program reads and
writes only the properties and attributes they need.

Tide Correction Files (*.TID) are created in the HARMONIC

TIDES and MANUAL TIDES programs. They contain
corresponding tide levels (in survey units) and time information that
can be used in post-processing programs to apply water level
corrections to your sounding data. For each day included in the file,
there is one correction value for every minute in the 24 hr. period
for a total of 1,440 records per day. A multiday file marks the
beginning of each day with its date.

You can display a graph of any TID file in your project by right-
clicking on the file in the Project Items list and selecting ‘Graph’.
The Tide View window appears with the graph of the selected tide
file.

1- 60 Introduction
Managing Files in your Project

FIGURE 55. Tide View Window

While in the Tide View window, you can do the following:

• View a different tide corrections file by selecting FILE-
OPEN.
• Save an image of the graph to a BMP file by selecting FILE-
SAVE AS and naming your file.
• Print the graph by selecting FILE-PRINT SCREEN.

MANAGING FILES IN YOUR PROJECT

Several types of files may comprise your project data. These files
are listed in the Project Items lists. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
provides a number of tools with which you control the files used in
your project at any one time.
Loading: You must load files that you want to use in your project,
but do not yet appear in your project items. The process tells
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM the name of the file and where it is
stored on your system.
Enabling and Disabling: Generally, enabled files are drawn to
your map window. By enabling and disabling select files, you
control the combination of files displayed in the map window at any
one time.
Renaming files in the Project Items list and on your hard drive
simultaneously from the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM interface.
Removing files unloads them from your project, but does not
remove them from your hard drive. If you change your mind, you
can reload them to you project.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 61

Managing Files in your Project • Loading Files to your Project

Deleting files unloads them from your project and moves them to
the Windows® Recycle Bin.
a

More Information
• “HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Items List” on page 1-3

LOADING FILES TO YOUR PROJECT

Files that you create while working in a project are saved, by
default, to the project folder, enabled (drawn) on the screen, and
added to the Project Items list. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM attempts
to draw your data in an order which will optimize the display of all
enabled files. Occasionally, modifications to the draw order or
transparency are required.
Most files are loaded to the project through either of two simple
methods: Using one of the Add File options from the right-click
menu or the Windows® drag and drop method.

NOTE: Certain chart types require special procedures before you

can load them.

Add File Options 1. Right-click the folder in the Project Items list that
corresponds to the file type you want to load in the Project
Items list.
2. Select Add File or Add File & Copy and choose the file. The
loaded program becomes enabled in the Project Items list.
• Add File reads the file from its current location but does not
copy it to the project folder. This can be useful if you are
using very large files (eg. charts) that take excessive space
on your hard drive in multiple projects.
• Add File & Copy allows you to select a file from outside the
project folder. It then imports the file from its current location
to the project folder and enables it in the project.
This manual assumes that you store all project files in the project
folder.
Drag and Drop The drag and drop method adds and enables the selected files to
your project. They are not copied to the project folder on your hard
drive.
1. Use Windows® Explorer to find and select your files.
2. Drag the selected files to the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Map window.

1- 62 Introduction
Managing Files in your Project

BEWARE! Saving the project file does not save a file that has not
been copied into the project file. When you only add a file to the
project, it must remain where it is on your system so HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM can find it when you open the project.

ENABLING AND DISABLING FILES

Your Project Items list shows all files associated with your current
project.
Enabled files have checks in their corresponding check box and
appear in the area map.

NOTE: HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM can not display binary files. In

multibeam and side scan projects, HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM shows the data from the corresponding RAW files
which contain the positioning information.
Multibeam projects display the track lines and the nadir
depth for each position record, while side scan projects can
display only track lines.

• To enable all files of one type check the check box for the file
type in the Project Items list.
• To enable an individual file, check its check box in the Project
Items list.
Disabled files remain in your Project Items list, but HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM omits it from the area map.
• To disable all except the sounding files in the current
project select FOLDERS-DISABLE PROJECT FILES. This
includes all of your planned lines, background files, etc.
• To disable only the data files in the current project, select
FOLDERS-DISABLE DATA FILES.
• To disable one type of Project Item (ex. sorted data files,
matrix files, targets, etc), clear the check box associated with
the file type folder in the Project Items list.
• To disable an individual file, clear its check box in the Project
Items list.

RENAMING PROJECT FILES

From the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM interface, you can rename
almost any file in the Project Items list and on your hard drive

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 63

Managing Files in your Project • Unloading Files from your Project

simultaneously. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM does not allow you to

rename S57, S63, ARCS or VPF charts.
1. In the Project Items list, right-click on the file you want to
rename and select the Rename option. A Rename File
dialog appears.
2. Enter the new file name and click [Save]. The file name
changes in both locations.
• If you rename a data file, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM also
updates catalog files in which the file resides.
• If you rename georeferenced images (TIF, JPG, PNG or
SHP), HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM also renames the
associated files.

UNLOADING FILES FROM YOUR PROJECT

To unload files from your project, you can either remove them from
your Project Items list, while they remain in place on your hard
drive, or remove them from your Project Items list and move them
to the Windows® Recycle Bin.
Removing Files • To remove individual files, do the following:
a. Select one or more files in the Project Items list.
• To select several individual files, hold the Ctrl key
while you use your mouse to choose your lines.
• To select a range of files, hold the Shift key and select
the first and last file of a range.
b. Right-click on a selected file and select REMOVE FILE.
• To remove all of one file type, right-click on the file type folder
and select REMOVE FOLDER FILES.

NOTE: Neither disabling nor removing will delete the file from your
hard drive. You can re-enable your file or reload the file to
your project.

Deleting Files To delete any file, right-click on the file in the Project Items list and
select DELETE FILE. You are asked to confirm your deletion.

NOTE: When you delete a *.LOG file, the member files remain in
the same folder in the project while the LOG file itself goes
to the recycle bin. When you delete a *.MLOG file, the
member matrix files go with the MLOG file to the Recycle
Bin.

1- 64 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Data Files

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM DATA FILES

The Project Items list begins with the data files: Raw, Edited and
Sorted. When non-binary data files are enabled in a project, you
can choose to display them in the area map:
• Draw the soundings
• Draw the track lines
• Draw both soundings and track lines
To make your choice, right-click on the data folder and select
ENABLE SOUNDINGS, ENABLE TRACK LINES or both.

NOTE: Track lines can not be displayed for XYZ files as there is no
track line information available in this format.

Other display settings are made in the Control Panel, the COLOR
EDITOR.

RAW DATA FILES

Raw files are the data files that result from the SURVEY or
DREDGEPACK® program. Every time you log data, a new “Raw”
data file is created. They are ASCII format files that contain the
header information and time-series information for each survey
device.
By default, they have the RAW extension and, in a standard
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM project, are stored in the \HYPACK
Sub-bottom\Projects\ProjectName\Raw folder.
A list of individual data files is provided in a catalog (*.LOG) file.
You can quickly draw or process a group of files by specifying the
*.LOG name, instead of entering the name of each data file.

IRAW sub-bottom data is logged to a separate SEG-Y file. In the

SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR, you can then define the bottom
track and sub-bottom layers and export them to HYPACK All
Format or XYZ data files.

EDITED DATA FILES

In the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR, when you have defined the
bottom track and digitized the sub-bottom layers, you save the

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 65

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Data Files • Sorted Data Files

result to the project Edit folder. You can store them in HYPACK All
format or the XYZ format—both ASCII text files.

SORTED DATA FILES

After running the edited data files through the SORT program, you
save the resulting data files to a sorted XYZ data file in the Sort
folder of the current project.

CATALOG FILES (*.LOG)

A Catalog File is an ASCII document that lists a series of other
files. You can quickly draw or process a group of files by specifying
the *.LOG name, instead of entering the name of each data file.
The LOG file is written to the same folder where your data files are
stored. (All data files must be in the same folder.)
HYPACK® SURVEY does not generate LOG files for Sub-bottom
SEG files. You can create one in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
interface, if you wish, but it is not required.
When you process the raw data in the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR, the program stores the resulting All format files in
the Edit folder. and generates a new catalog file for the bottom
track and each reflector layer.

CREATING A NEW CATALOG FILE

On occasion, you may want to create a catalog file that is different
from one automatically created by HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM. The
procedure is simple.
1. Right-click on the project data folder in the Project Items
list and select CREATE NEW LOG FILE from the menu. A
dialog appears with a listing of all data files in the data folder.

1- 66 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Data Files

FIGURE 56. Creating a New Catalog File (Before)

2. If there are multiple file extensions represented in the

folder, choose to list only files with the extension of your
choice. (Optional) Select the desired extension in the drop-
down list at the bottom left.
3. Select the file names you wish to include and click [Add].
FIGURE 57. Creating a New Catalog File (After)

4. Save your catalog file. Click [Save] and name your file.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM saves your file with the LOG
extension in the same folder (Raw, Edit or Sort) that you
originally chose.

EDITING CATALOG FILES

You can also edit existing catalog files.
1. Right-click on a LOG File in the Project Items list and
select EDIT LOG FILE from the drop-down menu. A dialog
will appear listing the files in the catalog and other files
available in the project.

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 67

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Data Files • Catalog Files (*.LOG)

FIGURE 58. Edit Log File Dialog

2. Modify the files included in the catalog:

• To delete line files from the catalog, select them on the
right, then click the left arrow button.
• To add available line files, select them on the left, then
click the right arrow button.
• To reorder the lines in the catalog, select a line then use
the up and down arrow buttons to reposition it in the list.
3. Save your changes.
a. Click [Save]. A File Save dialog appears.
b. Name your LOG file and click [Save]. You can use the
same file name and overwrite the existing catalog or use a
different file name and create a new catalog.

MERGING CATALOG FILES

You can also merge the files contained in multiple catalog files
together.
1. Right-click on the a LOG file in the Project Items list and
select MERGE LOG FILES from the drop-down menu. A
dialog appears with a listing of all catalog files in the same data
folder.
FIGURE 59. Merging Catalog Files

2. Select the file names you wish to include by holding the

control key while making your selections.

1- 68 Introduction
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Data Files

3. Click [Merge] and name your new catalog. HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM saves your file with the LOG extension in the same
folder (Raw, Edit or Sort) as the file you right-clicked originally.

SHOW LINES REPORT FOR CATALOG FILES

A Lines Report, is an ASCII text file listing each of the lines in the
catalog (or the selected line) and distance traveled while logging—
the distance surveyed.
Right-click on a catalog file (or on an individual survey data file)
and select SHOW LINES REPORT.
FIGURE 60. Sample Show Lines Report

Last Updated May / 2017 1- 69

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Data Files • Catalog Files (*.LOG)

1- 70 Introduction
CHAPTER 2 Preparation

Typically, you want to be as ready to collect data as possible,

before you head out to your project area. The following sections
discuss creating your HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM project, settings
to configure and project files you are likely to need ready.
Before you begin your work in your project area, there are several
tasks to consider:
1. Create a new project. You can create a new project and all of
the files in it by using the FILE-NEW command or copy an
existing project using the FILE-COPY menu command.
• When you create a new project, it inherits the last settings
for geodesy and hardware.
• When you copy a project, it copies everything from the
previous project, with the exception of the data files.
2. Check your Geodesy. If you have not previously specified
your geodesy, enter the GEODETIC PARAMETERS program
and configure your geodesy.
3. Configure and calibrate your hardware. If you have not
previously specified your sensors, configure your equipment in
the HARDWARE program.
4. Create your planned survey lines. (Optional)
If you are working on a new survey project, you typically
create planned survey lines to assure even coverage. Create
planned lines in the LINE EDITOR.
5. Prepare and load other support files as needed. These may
include:
• Background charts
• Matrix files
• Corrections files
• Targets
• Vessel shapes

6. Launch SURVEY and configure your survey settings.

Last Updated May / 2017 2-1

 •

• Configure the size, position and features of the display

windows.
• Load and configure planned survey lines. (Optional) )
• Set your Layback.
• Set the Navigation Parameters.
• Input the Project Information. (Optional)
• Configure your Boat Features.
• Load and configure any Targets. (Optional)
• Load and configure any Matrix Files. (Optional. )
The following figure illustrates a typical sequence of steps. The
blue blocks represent tasks done from the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM shell, while the green blocks are done in SURVEY.
For more information, click any program block and jump to the
corresponding segment of this manual.
FIGURE 1. Sub-bottom SURVEY Work Flow

2- 2 Preparation
Background Charts

More Information
• “Creating a New Project” on page 1-53
• “Entering your Geodetic Parameters” on page 2-38
• “Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE”
on page 2-79
• “Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor” on page 2-48
• “Loading Background Charts to the Project” on page 2-4
• “Loading Files to your Project” on page 1-62
• “HYPACK® SURVEY” on page 3-1
• “Layback for Towed Sub-Bottom Systems” on page 3-42
• “Navigating Planned Lines in SURVEY” on page 3-63
• “Logging Data in SURVEY” on page 3-67

BACKGROUND CHARTS
Background charts provide context and navigational reference for
your work. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM displays several types of
electronic charts in the area map and in the data collection and
editing programs.

NOTE: Charts drawn in XY (DGN, DXF, DIG, TIF and SHP) must be
in the same geodesy as your project to be positioned
correctly. Charts drawn in WGS-84 (S57, VPF), the
SURVEY program will transform the data files to the local
datum, using the datum transformation parameters in the
GEODETIC PARAMETERS program, before converting
them to your projection. This allows you to use these file
formats on any projection.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 3

Background Charts • Loading Background Charts to the Project

Most background files will be imported from external sources.

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM supports the following electronic chart
formats:
• ARCS • GML
• BSB ver. 3 • JPEG2000
• C-Map Ed. 2 • MIF
• DIG • MrSid
• DG2 • PDF (Georeferenced)
• DGNa • PNG (Georeferenced)
• DGWb • S57
• DWGb • S63
• DXF • SHP
• ECW • TIF
• VPF

a. DGN: v7 and v8. Version 8 for display only.

b. DXF and DWG: Versions 13-15, 18, 2004, 2007, 2010 and 2013. Used as
chart display in any chart-supporting module, and as source or destination
file in EXPORT TO CAD.

You may create background files in select HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM programs and save them to the project.

Module Chart Type Project Items Listing

HYPACK® SUB- Georeferenced TIF Background Charts
BOTTOM
EXPORT DXF Background Charts
DGN
DWG
HYPLOT Georeferenced PDF Background Charts
Georeferenced TIF
DGN
DWG
DXF
If you have Internet access, you can download georeferenced PNG
files from Web servers through the Web Maps tab in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM interface. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
stores these charts in the project \Satellites folder.

LOADING BACKGROUND CHARTS TO THE PROJECT

Most charts are loaded to the project in the same manner:

2- 4 Preparation
Background Charts

1. Right-click Background Files in the Project Files list.

2. Select Add File & Copy, and the chart file type from the list
displayed. A File Open dialog appears.
• Add File enables the project to read a chart that is not
stored in your project folder. This can be useful if you are
using very large chart files in more than one project.
• Add File & Copy copies the chart to your project folder and
enables it in your project.
3. Choose the file and click [OK]. The file will be drawn to the
screen and enabled in the Background files list.
ARCS and S63 charts have special procedures that must be
followed before you can add them to your project.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM attempts to draw your data in an order
which will optimize the display of all enabled files. Occasionally,
modifications to the draw order are required and may be made by
creating a custom draw order.

LOADING ARCS CHARTS TO HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
British Admiralty ARCS charts are electronic raster charts. World-
wide coverage is provided by these charts and updates are
available throughout the year according to your permit agreement.
Arcs charts and their permits can be purchased from an authorized
distributor or reseller.
To display ARCS charts in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM:
1. Acquire the ARCS Charts for your survey area. If you have
multiple HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM licenses (dongles) and you
want more than one to have ARCS capability, you will need to
purchase multiple ARCS permits.
2. Load your charts to your hard drive.
3. Load the charts to HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM. You may only
need a portion of the charts that you have purchased in a
project. Load only those charts that correspond to your project
area.
BEWARE! Any time that you load ARCS charts to your HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM project, you must use the same dongle that was
used to load the chart permits to that computer. You must load your
chart permits through the ARCS Manager each time you change
dongles.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 5

Background Charts • Loading Background Charts to the Project

INSTALLING 1. In HYPACK, select PREPARATION – ARCS CHART

ARCS LICENSE MANAGER. The ARCS Chart Manager appears.
AND CHART 2. Install the license.
PERMITS a. Select FILE - INSTALL LICENSE.
b. Navigate to the location of the license files provided to
you.
c. Select the *.lcn file and click [Open].
3. Load your permits.
a. Select FILE – ADD PERMITS.
b. Select the *.NCP file provided to you.
c. Click [Open].
The ARCS Chart Manager displays a list of charts for which
you are licensed.
FIGURE 2. Charts for Which You are Licensed

INSTALLING When you have installed your ARCS license and permits, and
ARCS CHARTS downloaded your ARCS chart files, you are ready to install the
ON YOUR charts you have purchased:
COMPUTER 1. Click [INSTALL FILES].
2. Navigate to the location of your charts.
3. Click [OK]. All permitted charts that are loaded have an “OK”
status in the ARCS CHART MANAGER.

2- 6 Preparation
Background Charts

FIGURE 3. The ARCS Chart Manager Displays the Status of Each Chart

4. Select FILE-CLOSE.

LOADING ARCS 1. Right-click Background Files in the Project Files list and
CHARTS TO YOUR select ARCS. A Select Chart dialog appears.
PROJECT FIGURE 4. Opening your Charts

2. Select one or more charts and click [Open]. The ARCS

Geodesy dialog appears next.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 7

Background Charts • Loading Background Charts to the Project

FIGURE 5. Choosing the Background Chart Panel

3. Select the panel you will use. Some charts include multiple
panels. If this is the case, they are listed in the Panel drop-
down box.
Tip: “Panel 0” is typically the main map. You can change
panels through the ARCS Geodesy dialog accessed from the
Project Items List: right-click on the chart name and select
Change Active Panel.
4. Compare your Chart and World geodesy settings. The
Chart geodesy is part of the chart file. Most charts come with
geodesy information relative to the geodesy the chart is drawn
in (chart geodesy) and WGS-84. (If there is no WGS-84
information for your selected chart, [WGS84] is disabled.) Your
goal is to get your chart geodesy coordinated with your project
geodesy.
5. Choose your geodesy conversion method and the program
returns you to the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen.
• If your chart has WGS84 information ([WGS84] is
enabled), we recommend that you use this option.
• If the Chart and World Geodesy settings are different,
you must use the WGS-84 selection to achieve proper
overlay of your chart with your other project data.
• If the Chart Geodesy (left) matches the World Geodesy
(right, read from your geodetic parameters) you can choose
either option.
• If the Chart and World Geodesy settings are different
AND your chart has only Chart geodesy settings, the
chart will not work in this HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM project.

2- 8 Preparation
Background Charts

LOADING VPF CHARTS TO THE PROJECT

Vector Product Format (VPF) is an electronic chart format from the
U.S. National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA, formerly
DMA).
FIGURE 6. Sample VPF Chart in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

VPF files are loaded in similar manner to other charts, but they
have a little quirk that might be confusing.
Method 1:
1. Right-click Background Charts in the Project Items list and
select ADD FILE-VPF. A File Open dialog appears.
2. Scan the VPF database for the CAT file (no extension) for the
chart you want to load.

NOTE: It is helpful to have the 'Full Paths in Tree' option checked in

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to see which VPF files are
loaded. Otherwise you will only see a list of files all named
CAT.

FIGURE 7. Loading VPF Charts

Method2:

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 9

Background Charts • Loading Background Charts to the Project

Adding several VPF files using the Add File option can be
cumbersome, as you will likely have to browse through several
levels to the CAT file each time. Windows® Explorer provides an
easy alternative.
1. Open a search window in Explorer and search for ‘CAT’.
FIGURE 8. Results of a Search on ‘CAT’

2. Select the VPF files you want then drag and drop them
onto the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM map window.

LOADING S63 CHARTS TO THE PROJECT

S63 Charts are encrypted S57 charts. They are encrypted using
the IHO Data Protection Scheme. In HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM,
this requires the following:
• License data on your key
• IHO certificate file
• Permit file
• Encrypted charts
Use the S63 Manager to load the certificate, permits, and charts or
chart updates:
1. Launch the S63 Manager. Select PREPARATION – S63
MANAGER.
2. Load the permits. Select FILE-ADD PERMITS and navigate to
the permit listing file from your vendor. The charts for which you
have permits are listed with a Not Installed status.
3. Load your Charts. Click [Install S63 Charts] and navigate to
the root directory of the data files from your vendor. The
manager searches this directory and its sub-directories for files
matching your permits. These charts are installed, with any
associated TIF and text files, in the HYPACK® S63 folder and
the status for each chart changes to OK.

2- 10 Preparation
Background Charts

FIGURE 9. S63 Chart Manager

NOTE: A Permit Error status most likely indicates you are either
using the S63 MANAGER without your dongle or your
dongle is not valid for your vendor-supplied charts.

4. Exit from the S63 MANAGER and load your charts as usual.
To remove S63 chart data, select one or more permit files in the
S63 MANAGER then select FILE-REMOVE SELECTIONS. This
removes both the installed files from your S63 directory and the
permit.

NOAA AND ACOE ELECTRONIC CHARTS

NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration) and the
US ACOE (Army Corps of Engineers) provide their latest S57
charts, free of charge, for download.
You can manually download the relevant chart files and load them
to your project one at a time; however, the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM interface includes an easy, process that automatically
downloads and displays the latest NOAA and ACOE charts in the
area currently shown in the Map window.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM stores these charts in the \HYPACK
Sub-bottom\Background\NOAA and \HYPACK Sub-
bottom\Background\ACOE folders.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 11

Background Charts • Loading Background Charts to the Project

NOTE: In addition to these S57 charts, you can also add the NOAA
Web Map Server in the Web Maps Panel to access geo-
referenced PNG charts.

CHECKING FOR NOAA and the US Army Corps update their site frequently so,
UPDATED CHART before you head out onto the water, it’s a good idea to confirm that
you have the latest charts. The Web ENC dialog shows a complete
list of charts in the catalogs with each chart name, originating
agency, chart type, last modified date (dd/mm/yyyy) and the status
relative to your project:
• Downloaded: You have the most recent version of this chart.
• Update Available: The most recent version of this chart has
not been downloaded.
1. Click ADVANCED in the ENC Web Maps toolbar. The Web
ENC window appears.
FIGURE 10. Web ENC Window

2. Refresh your catalogs. Click [Refresh Catalogs] to get the

most current information about available charts.

2- 12 Preparation
Background Charts

3. Check the list for charts in your project for which updates
are available. (The status is Available or Updates Available.)
Tips:
•Show Chart Borders displays an outline for each chart in
the catalog. NOAA charts are outlined in green, while the
ACOA charts are multicolored.
• To see the area covered by selected charts, select one
or more charts in the dialog, then zoom extents.
• To select several individual files, hold the Ctrl key
while you use your mouse to choose your files.
• To select a range of files, hold the Shift key and select
the first and last file of a range.
4. Select any charts you want to update and click [Add ENC
Charts]. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM downloads the latest
versions of the selected files, loads them in your project, and
updates the catalog listing to “Downloaded”.

LOADING NOAA 1. If the ENC Web Maps toolbar is not visible, select VIEW-
AND ACOE S57 ENC WEB MAPS.
CHARTS 2. Update the Chart catalogs, if necessary. Click UPDATE ENC
CATALOGS in the ENC Web Maps toolbar. The status bar
shows the updating progress.
Tip: Hold your cursor over [Update ENC Catalogs]. HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM displays the date of the last update.
3. Set your Map display to show the area for which you need
charts.
4. Click ADD ENC CHARTS in the ENC Web Maps toolbar.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM searches the catalogs for any charts
that fall in your Map area, and installs them in your project,
automatically displaying them with the most detailed charts on
top.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 13

Background Charts • Loading Background Charts to the Project

FIGURE 11. NOAA Charts Installed in the Project

Tip: For projects in the United States, select PREPARATION-

SEARCH FOR LOCATION and enter the name or zip code of your
project area. [Center Map] centers the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Map display on that location at a zoom scale of 1000 fpi (foot grid)
or 1:10000 (metric grid). [Get Maps] downloads any NOAA or
ACOE chart that intersects that map area.
FIGURE 12. Search for Location Dialog

GEO-REFERENCED PNG CHARTS FROM THE INTERNET

If you have an Internet connection, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM can
generate georeferenced PNG files from satellite images available
on Web servers. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM stores the files to the
project \Satellite folder. In addition, Web maps appear in the Web
Maps folder of the Project Items list.
These georeferenced PNG charts may be used as any other chart
file in all HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM modules.

2- 14 Preparation
Background Charts

FIGURE 13. Georeferenced PNG

ADDING A WEB 1. Open the Web Maps panel. Select VIEW-WMS WEB MAPS.
SERVER TO THE FIGURE 14. Web Maps Panel
WEB MAPS
PANEL

2. Right-click in the Web Server area and select Add Server.

The Web Map Server Properties dialog appears.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 15

Background Charts • Loading Background Charts to the Project

FIGURE 15. Web Map Server Properties Dialog

3. Enter the Server properties:

• URL: The server Internet address.
• Display Name: What appears in the Web Maps panel.
• Password if you are using the OnTerra server or add
another server that requires a password.
• Swap Latitude, Longitude: Check this option if the chart
positioning information is reversed.
• This is a Tiled Map Server: Indicates the server is a Web
Map Tile Server (WMTS) rather than a Web Map Server
(WMS).
4. Click [OK].
Tips: If you survey in the United States where NOAA has charts
available, the previous figure shows the settings to add the NOAA
Tile Server. When the server is loaded, enable only layer 50000_1.
To eliminate unnecessary layers from a server list, select them
in the server list then right-click on your selection and select HIDE
SELECTED LAYERS.
To restore hidden layers to the display, right-click on a displayed
layer and select UNHIDE SERVER’S LAYERS.

REMOVING A WEB If there are Web servers in your list that you do not need, you can
SERVER FROM remove them from the list:
THE WEB MAPS 1. Open the Web Maps panel. Select VIEW-WMS WEB MAPS.
PANEL 2. In the Web Server list, right-click on the server you want to
remove and select Remove Server.

GENERATING 1. Open the Web Maps panel (VIEW-WMS WEB MAPS).

GEO-REFERENCED 2. Select one or more Web servers that are applicable to your
PNG CHARTS needs and survey area. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes
FROM INTERNET several Web servers by default.
IMAGES

2- 16 Preparation
Background Charts

NOTE: You may add and remove servers or modify server

properties using a right-click menu in the server list.

3. For each Web server, select a layer. Different servers and

layers offer different types of imagery of varying quality.
4. Set your project area. Set your area map to show the largest
area you expect to view in this project.
5. Click [Get Maps]. The program searches the selected servers
for images to best match the defined extents and generates the
following:
• PNG image that displays in your area map.
• PGW file that contains coordinates that describe the
location, scale and rotation of the PNG image.
• TXT file that lists the coordinates of the lower left and upper
right corners of your defined area, and one or more satellite
image sources for the generated images.
The Status field updates as each step is completed and as
each image file downloads. In addition, the overall progress
appears in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM status bar.
If a problem occurs during the download, “Download Error”
appears in the Layer column of the Web Maps panel. Hover
your cursor over the message for a more complete description.
[Cancel] aborts the download process.
FIGURE 16. Filled Matrix Overlaid on the Georeferenced PNG

Tip: If you decide, for some reason, you want a fresh start with
your project Web maps, [Clear Downloads] deletes the Web
Charts from the project.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 17

Background Charts • Loading Background Charts to the Project

AUTOKMZ
The AutoKMZ feature enables HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to
update the KMZ charts drawn in the project as they are added to or
removed from a user-defined location.
1. Activate AutoKMZ in your project. Right-click on the
Background Files folder and select the Add Auto KMZ to
Project option. A KMZ_Auto item appears in the Background
Files list.
2. Open the Auto KMZ configuration dialog. Right-click on the
KMZ_Auto item and select Auto KMZ Properties.
FIGURE 17. Auto KMZ Configuration Dialog

3. Configure the AutoKMZ options:

• Active enables Automatic KMZ updates. When disabled,
chart change activity is ignored.
• Chart Directory specifies where AutoKMZ watches for
changing KMZ files.
• Display most recent charts limits the number of KMZ
charts displayed.
• Transparency settings apply to all managed charts in the
Chart Directory. Adjust the level of transparency with the
slider.
You can also choose one color in your chart to become
transparent in the display which allows other items drawn
below it to show through while the remaining areas of the
chart are fully opaque.
To set a transparent chart color:
i. Open the transparency dialog for your chart.
ii. Click the Colors Icon and a Color Select dialog
will appear.ColorsIcon2.png

2- 18 Preparation
Background Charts

iii. Select the color you want to become transparent

and click [OK].

CHART DISPLAY OPTIONS

Some chart types have display options unique to their file type.
Some of these display options are set in the Charts tab of the
Control Panel. Other options are accessed by right-clicking on the
chart name in the Project Files list.

DISPLAYING CAD CHARTS

You can draw any CAD file "as is", or in black or white regardless
of whether the original chart is in color. Select your choice in the
Charts tab of the Control Panel.
FIGURE 18. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel—Charts Tab

To override the setting in the Control Panel, right-click on the

file name in the Project Files list, and select DISPLAY OVERRIDE
and your desired setting.
To return to the setting in the Control Panel by selecting
DISPLAY OVERRIDE-PROJECT SETTING in the right-click
menu.

DISPLAYING CHART LAYERS

When you enable a PDF or CAD chart, if it has layers, a plus sign
appears left of the file name in the Project Items list indicating that
it can expand to show the layers.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 19

Background Charts • Chart Display Options

To select the layers of the chart to display, just enable and disable
them in the Project Items list.
Alternatively, you can use the Layers dialog:
1. Right-click on the enabled chart in the Project Files list and
select the Layers option. A dialog will appear with the chart
layers listed.
FIGURE 19. Selecting Chart Layers

2. Check the layers you want to display.

3. Preview your results by clicking [Apply].
4. When your display is satisfactory, click [OK].

DISPLAYING S57 CHARTS

S57 chart settings are accessed from the Charts tab of the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM control panel.
S57 Options: [S57 Options] in the displays the S57 Display Options dialog.

2- 20 Preparation
Background Charts

FIGURE 20. S57 Options Dialog

Symbols: Choose between Traditional and Simplified.

Boundaries: Choose to have them marked with symbols
(Symbolized) or as plain lines (Plain).
Units: Displays depths in your choice of U.S. feet or meters.
Scheme:
• S52: The industry standard where the colors progress from
darkest to lighter shades of blue as depths increase.
• Bathy Blue: The reverse of S52 where the deepest water is
the darkest color.
• Red Yellow Green: Displays three categories of depth areas:
• unsafe (red),
• safe with caution (yellow)
• safe (green)

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 21

Background Charts • Chart Display Options

FIGURE 21. S57 Color Schemes: S52 (left), Bathy Blue (center), Red Yellow
Green (right)

Safety Depth displays depth labels in different colors above and

below this depth.
Safety Contour, Shallow Contour and Deep Contour define
different depth ranges which will be displayed with backgrounds of
different shades of blue.

NOTE: This option is overridden by the Two Depth Shades option.

Scale Minimum displays different map features and symbols at

varying zoom scales according to S57 standards. This option
prevents your Map window from becoming overly cluttered. If this
option is clear, everything will be displayed regardless of the zoom
scale.
Two Depth Shades uses only two shades to display depths
greater than and less than the Safety Contour.
Shallow Pattern draws a pattern in the areas of the map where
the depth is shoaler than the safety contour.
Full Sector Lights includes data regarding direction and color of
lights. If this is off, you will see only the position of the light source.
Show Soundings toggles the display of chart soundings.
Visual Quality of Data: S57 charts include markings that indicate
whether the chart has been tested for accuracy and, if so, how
accurate it is. Check this option to clear this ‘clutter’ from your
display.
Draw Information Boxes: Draws S57 markers at all points of
interest. Clearing this option will provide a less cluttered display.
Load Chart Updates: When you load a base chart (typically *.000)
and there are update charts (typically *.001, *.002…) in the same
folder, checking this option loads all related chart information to
provide the most updated display.
Seasonal/Time Period Filter: Object attributes may specify time
ranges when they would be most applicable to display. Check this

2- 22 Preparation
Background Charts

option to display only objects whose attributes match the current

time.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Soundings Display: When 'Show
Soundings' is checked, this option toggles between ECDIS display
and HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM display options.
Isolated Danger in Shallow Water assures that those features
coded as isolated dangers are always displayed.
Hide Extra Contours: Omits any contour that is above the deep
contour or below the shallow contour. They are valid contours, but
do not contribute to the safe navigation of your vessel.
Text Display Groups: Charts can get cluttered with excessive
text. Select only those text features you want to see in your chart
display.

DISPLAYING SHP CHARTS

These line and polyline shape files (*.SHP) available from ArcView
and ArcInfo. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM currently only supports
drawing the main chart file, which defines points, lines and areas.
(There are no attributes drawn.) In HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, you
can enhance the chart display by assigning colors and textures
and line weights.
1. Load the chart to your project as you would most
background files.
2. Right-click the file name in the Project Files list and select
"Edit Colors". The Shape File Display dialog appears.
3. Configure your display options and click [OK].
The Line Color and Line Width affect point objects and the
lines that define line and area objects in the chart.
Fill Color and Fill Type affect the interior of area objects.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 23

Background Charts • Chart Display Options

FIGURE 22. Shape File Editor—Colors Tab

To modify colors, click the current color block and select a

color from the selection dialog that appears.
FIGURE 23. Shape File Editor—Labels Tab

To label the SHP object, check the Show Label option and
select the attribute value that will serve as the label.

2- 24 Preparation
Background Charts

NOTE: This only works if the corresponding *.DBF file is present

in the folder with the *SHP file. Otherwise, there will be
no attribute list.

4. Click [OK].

More Information
• “Querying Area Map Features” on page 1-13

CREATING GEOREFERENCED TIF CHARTS IN HYPACK®

SUB-BOTTOM
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes utilities that enable you to
generate georeferenced TIF images that you can then load to your
project as background charts.
Generate TIF charts from your current HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM map display using the TIF CAPTURE tool. You can use
the resulting chart in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM or export it to
display in other software packages.
Generate TIF charts from any TIF, BMP or JPG image using the
IMAGE GEOREFERENCE routine. This option enables you to
georeference images, such as satellite images or snapshots taken
from a plane, and display it as a chart in your project.

EXPORTING GEOREFERENCED TIF CHARTS OF YOUR

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM DISPLAY
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM enables you to create a geo-referenced
TIF file from your HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM display or a portion of
it. It will include everything that appears within user-defined
boundaries, ready to display as a background chart in your project.
We define the boundaries of the area to be captured by entering
the coordinates of the bottom-left corner and the dimensions of the
area in survey units. You can do this with any of the following
methods:
• Manually enter the information to the TIF Output dialog.
• Use the cursor to define the capture area.
• Load a matrix file that borders the capture area.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 25

Background Charts • Creating Georeferenced TIF Charts in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

1. Enable all HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM features to be

included in your TIF.
Tip: Consider disabling the grid display while you capture your
image to avoid cluttering your chart with information that will be
provided when you display the chart in HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM.
2. If you are using a matrix to position and size the TIF, create
it in the MATRIX EDITOR. To assure that your data will be fully
included in the TIF:
• Size and position the matrix over your data and
• Set the rotation to zero.
FIGURE 24. Creating the Matrix (Background File disabled to display the
matrix more clearly.)

FIGURE 25. Add the BSB Chart Behind the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Features.

3. Select FILE-CAPTURE TIF IMAGE.

2- 26 Preparation
Background Charts

FIGURE 26. TIF Output Dialog

4. Define the capture area.

• Manually enter the information: Enter the coordinates for
the southwest corner of the matrix, and the matrix height
and width (survey units).
• Use the cursor: Click the Select Area icon and
drag the cursor between diagonally opposite
corners of the capture area in the area map. The
TIF Output dialog updates with the size and
location of your defined area.
• Load a matrix file: Click [...] and select a matrix file that
defines your capture area. The CornerX, CornerY, View
Height and Width will update according to the matrix
properties.
5. Define the resolution. The default value is 5. The Screen
Scale option sets a resolution to match your current screen
resolution. The program calculates the output TIF size and
displays it at the bottom of the dialog. Smaller resolutions result
in larger output size. It is up to you to decide what resolution
best balances file size and resolution to suit your needs. Adjust
the resolution and click [Refresh] to determine the image size
until your are satisfied.
Tip: Start with the Screen Scale. Check the Screen Scale option
and note the resolution. You can then deselect the Screen
Scale option and manually adjust the resolution if you choose.
6. Save the results as a georeferenced TIF image.
a. Click [Save...]. The TIF Save Options dialog appears.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 27

Background Charts • Creating Georeferenced TIF Charts in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

FIGURE 27. TIF Save Options

b. Select your options and click [OK].

• Write GeoTif (embedded TFW).
• Write TFW file enables you to generate a separate file
that contains coordinates that describe the location,
scale, and rotation of the TIF. It is used by geographic
information systems (GIS) software for locating areas in
raster map images.
• Use LZW Compression: This is a lossless
compression algorithm that significantly reduces the
resulting file size without losing resolution of the image.
c. Name your file and click [Save]. The TIF and TFW files
will be created and saved, by default to the project
directory. The program will notify you when the TIF is
complete.
d. Click [OK] to close the message.
7. Click [Close] to return to the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
screen.
8. Load the TIF to your project as you would most other
background charts.

2- 28 Preparation
Background Charts

FIGURE 28. The Resulting TIF

CONVERTING IMAGE FILES TO GEOREFERENCED TIFS

The IMAGE GEOREFERENCE routine is used to convert image
files to georeferenced TIF images that can be used as background
charts in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM and SURVEY. You can also
load them to the ENC EDITOR to be used as a guide for building
an S57 chart of your project area.
You will need the following:
• The image files can be from anywhere: screen captures of
other chart types, satellite photos or aerial fly-over shots. The
tool accepts TIF, BMP or JPG. (If your image is of a different file
type, it can easily be converted in most graphic programs.)
• The positions of two distinct features in your image. These
positions, called ‘ground control points’, are used to calculate
the correct position, rotation and scale of your image file. A
third (optional) ground control point may increase your chart
accuracy.
When you have your image and ground control points, you are
ready to georeference your image.
1. Select PREPARATION-EDITORS-IMAGE GEOREFERENCE.
2. Load your image file.
a. Select IMAGE-LOAD.
b. Set the file type to match your image file type.
c. Select your image file and click [Open].
The image draws to the IMAGE GEOREFERENCE window.
Tip: To shift the image in the display, click and drag
3. Adjust the image display as necessary.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 29

Background Charts • Creating Georeferenced TIF Charts in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

• To zoom in and out, use the zoom tools or mouse wheel.

• To pan, click and drag the image.
4. Define your ground control points (GCP). The program
requires at least two (optionally more) ground control points.
a. With the default cursor, right-click on the image at the
first known position and select ADD GCP. A red symbol
appears on the image and a dialog appears.
FIGURE 29. Defining Ground Control Points

b. Select the format in which you want to enter your GCP

positions.
c. Enter the position information under ‘World X’ and
‘World Y’ and click [OK].
d. Repeat for your second and third reference points.
Tip: To adjust the reference point position, click and drag the
red marker in the image window or right-click on it and select
Edit GCP to reopen the Ground Control Point dialog.
To delete a ground control point, right-click on it and select
Delete.

2- 30 Preparation
Background Charts

FIGURE 30. Image with Ground Control Points

5. Calculate the rotation and scale of your image to fit the

world coordinates of your ground control points.
• With two ground control points, click [2PT
Transformation].
• With three or more ground control points, select
GEOREFERENCE-3+ PT TRANSFORMATION.
FIGURE 31. Image Information Shows the Calculated Scale and Position
Values..

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 31

Background Charts • Creating Georeferenced TIF Charts in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

6. Apply the calculated scale and rotation to the image. Click

[Apply].
Tip: Check the Map Display option and click the Zoom Extents icon
to preview the georeferenced image in the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM map display. Red markers show the positions of the
control points so you can verify their accuracy.
7. If there are features behind the TIF, you can adjust the
transparency of the image preview. (Optional)
a. Click [Transparency] to access the Transparency dialog.
b. Choose the level of transparency using the slider.
c. If you have checked the Map Display option, click
[Apply] to see the results in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
map.

NOTE: This is for preview purposes only. The TIF will be saved
with 100% opacity. You can set its transparency in your
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM display through the
Transparency option when you right-click on the chart
name in the Project Files list.

d. Click [OK] to return to the Image Georeference dialog.

8. Save the results as a georeferenced TIF image.
a. Select IMAGE-SAVE. The TIF Save Options dialog will
appear.
FIGURE 32. TIF Save Options

Select your options and click [OK].

b.
9. Load the new chart to HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM.
Tip: You can verify the accuracy of the chart positioning by
checking the ‘Draw Image’ option in the Image Geo-referencing
Tool. This displays the calibration points in the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM Map window where you can compare their position on
your grid.
10. Modify the transparencies, if necessary, to optimize the view
of all objects in your map window.

2- 32 Preparation
Background Charts

The following figure shows a georeferenced satellite

photograph of a segment of the Chesapeake Bay Bridge-
Tunnel displayed with S57 and DWG files.
FIGURE 33. Sample TIF Displays in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

EXPORTING MAP FEATURES TO GOOGLE EARTH

You can export select HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM file types to a
Google Earth KMZ file, which you can then open in the Google
Earth program and view them overlaid in the display.
The following file types are supported by this feature:
• XYZ
• track lines
• targets
• DXF contours and hatch
• matrix
• planned lines

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 33

Background Charts • Exporting Map Features to Google Earth

FIGURE 34. Filled Matrix and Targets from HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to

Google Earth HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM input (left) and Google
Earth Output (right)

KMZ files can be generated from the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

Files list or from the EXPORT program.

Exporting KMZ To export a KMZ file from HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM:

from HYPACK® 1. Right-click in the Project Files or Data Files area and select
SUB-BOTTOM ‘Export Google Earth’. A dialog will appear listing all project
files that are available for export
2. Select the files to export to Google Earth and click
[Export]. The Export to Google Earth dialog will appear listing
all enabled files in their current draw order.
FIGURE 35. Export to Google Earth Dialog

3. Omit any of the listed files, if necessary, by clearing their

check boxes.
4. Reorder the draw order, if necessary. Select a file in the list
and move it up to draw sooner or down to draw later (on top)
using the corresponding buttons.
5. Click [Export] and name your file in the File Save dialog. It
will be saved, by default, to the project directory with the KMZ
extension.

2- 34 Preparation
Background Charts

6. When you are finished exporting, return to the HYPACK®

SUB-BOTTOM window, click [Close].

Exporting KMZ EXPORT includes the KMZ Output File Format. No output options
from EXPORT are required.
1. Start the EXPORT program by selecting FINAL PRODUCTS-
EXPORT. All files associated with the project are loaded in their
current enabled or disabled state to the EXPORT interface.
Tip: To quickly enable or disable all files, the File menu
includes Check All and Uncheck All options.
FIGURE 36. The Main Window of the EXPORT Program

2. Select the Output file type to which you want to export from
the Output File Format drop-down menu.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 35

Background Charts • Exporting Map Features to Google Earth

FIGURE 37. Selecting the Target Format

3. Click the File Open icon and name your output file. The
path will default, in most cases, to your project directory. XYZ
output formats default to the Sort directory.
4. Select the file or files you want to convert by enabling and
disabling them in the file tree on the left side of the window as
you would in the main HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen. Files
of types that can not be converted to the designated output
format are marked with X's.
5. Add External files (optional). These are files that were not
part of your project when you started EXPORT TO CAD, but
you want to add them to your exported project data. Select
FILES-ADD FILES or right click on the Files folder in the
External Files list and select "Add File(s)". A File Selection
Dialog will appear for you to browse for additional files.
6. Set your Input and Output Options.
FIGURE 38. Export Options Dialog

a. Click [Options] or F9 to access the Options dialog.

b. For each option applicable to your output file type on
the left, select the option and set the related options
displayed on the right.
c. Click [OK].

2- 36 Preparation
Project Geodesy

7. When your list is complete and all parameters have been

set, click on [Convert] (or select FILE-CONVERT). The
conversion will be made and you can see its progress in the
conversion log which is displayed on the screen.
FIGURE 39. Conversion Log

NOTE: This shows which files have been successfully converted

and if, for some reason, any have not.

PROJECT GEODESY
Geodesy is the science of positioning objects on the earth's
surface. Even though you don't need to be a master of geodesy to
run HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, some basic geodetic knowledge
can make the difference between obtaining a correct position and
having your boat plot downtown.
Most GPS equipment outputs your position in WGS-84.
ΦΛHwgs-84 → ΦΛHLocal Datum → XYProjection
In other words, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM receives the Latitude,
Longitude and Height information based on the WGS-84 ellipsoid,
and transforms it into a Latitude, Longitude and Height on the Local
Datum. It then performs a grid conversion to calculate an X
(Easting) and Y (Northing) on the specified projection.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 37

Project Geodesy • Entering your Geodetic Parameters

ENTERING YOUR GEODETIC PARAMETERS

The GEODETIC PARAMETERS define your local grid. This
enables HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to correctly calculate your XY
position on your local grid from your GPS data (typically WGS84).
You must define the following geodetic parameters for your local
grid.
• The reference ellipsoid.
• Any necessary datum transformation parameters: If your local
grid is not based on the WGS-84 ellipsoid, datum transform
parameters are required.
• The projection parameters: Automatic when you choose one of
the pre-defined grids.
The grid, zone, ellipsoid and survey units are displayed in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM status bar above the area map.

1. Start the GEODETIC PARAMETERS program by selecting

PREPARATION-GEODETIC PARAMETERS.
FIGURE 40. Geodetic Parameters Dialog

2. Select your Ellipsoids and Projection Parameters. Many

grids have been built into HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM. Just
select the correct grid and zone, and your projection
parameters are automatically loaded.

2- 38 Preparation
Project Geodesy

NOTE: If your ellipsoid is other than WGS-84, you must also

enter datum transformation parameters. Consult your
project specifications.

3. Select your Distance Units. Notice that you can set your
vertical and horizontal distances to be measured in different
units if you wish.
4. Set your Datum Transformation values.
5. Choose your degrees format. Select OPTIONS-DEGREES
FORMAT and the format you want to use.
6. If you are working in Elevation mode, do the following:
• Select the Elevation Mode option.
• Enter a user-defined Chart Datum Level above Geoid.
7. Click [OK]. Your geodesy settings will automatically be saved
to your project.

SELECTING ELLIPSOIDS AND PROJECTION PARAMETERS

The lat/long/height that describes your position depends upon your
mathematical model of the earth (your "Ellipsoid" ).
Many grids have been built into HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM. Just
select the correct grid and zone, and your projection parameters
are automatically loaded.

USING PREDEFINED GRIDS

Whether you're surveying in UTM, State Plane or some other grid,
the procedure is the same.
To select a grid:
1. Select your Grid from the Grids drop-down list. The Zone
choices will now relate to your grid choice.
2. Select your survey zone. The geodetic information for each
zone is "hard-wired" in the code and will appear down the right-
hand side.
3. Select your survey distance unit HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
provides a choice several measurement methods.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 39

Project Geodesy • Selecting Ellipsoids and Projection Parameters

FIGURE 41. State Plane Metric Survey (left), US Survey Foot Survey (right)

MANUAL GRID SELECTION

If your survey requires a grid other than those in our predefined
grids list, you can enter your own projection parameters.
Tip: If you anticipate needing these same grid settings again, save
them for easy recall from the Grids list.
1. Set the Grid List to User-defined. This provides access to all
of the other features on the GEODETIC PARAMETERS
window.
2. Select your Ellipsoid from the choices in the ellipsoid
drop-down box. As soon as you make your selection, the
Semi-Major Axis (a) and Flattening (1/f) values will change. If
your ellipsoid is not in the list, click on the Other ellipsoid choice
and manually enter the (a) and (1/f) values.
3. Select your projection from the Projections list. Different
projections require different types of information. The labels
and number of box entries down the right-hand side change
according to the selected projection type.
4. Select your survey distance units.
5. Save your settings. (Optional)
a. Select TOOLS-SAVE CUSTOM GRID. A dialog appears.
FIGURE 42. User-Defined Grid Tool Dialog

b. Enter a name for your grid and click [OK].

6. Click [OK].

2- 40 Preparation
Project Geodesy

The Semi-Major Axis and Flattening, Scale Factor and other

geodetic information pertinent to your chosen projection should
now be set.

LOCAL GRIDS
The “Local Grid” option in the GEODETIC PARAMETERS program
enables you to position yourself on a local construction grid using
your GPS equipment. To accomplish this, HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM first takes the latitude/longitude from the GPS and
converts it to an XY on one of the existing projections (e.g. State
Plane 1983 or UTM). It then translates the projection coordinate to
a local coordinate, using the information you supply in the “Local
Grid” option box of the GEODETIC PARAMETERS program.
FIGURE 43. Example of Local Grid Calculations

An example would probably best illustrate how to go about this.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 41

Project Geodesy • Selecting Ellipsoids and Projection Parameters

In this figure, you have two points P1 and P2. The coordinates on
the local grid are as follows:
P1: X = 10000.0 P2: X = 10000.0
Y = 10000.0 Y = 11260.0

We have also performed a GPS survey on these points and found

their WGS-84 (world) positions to be:
P1: N41 – 30 – 00.0000 P2: N41 – 30 – 10.0000
W72 – 30 – 00.0000 W72 – 30 – 10.0000

Since we are in the State of Connecticut, we have decided to use

the NAD-1983 CT State Plane Zone as our projection.
1. Calculate State Plane coordinates for our P1 and P2, using
the WGS-84 Latitude and Longitude Information.
2. Start the GEODETIC PARAMETERS program and set it for
NAD-83 CT State Plane Zone.
FIGURE 44. Setting the Geodetic Parameters for your Local Grid

3. Convert both the P1 and P2 values to State Plane

coordinates in the GRID CONVERSION utility program. The
resulting conversions provide us with the following information:
P1: X = 1068483.01 P2: X = 1067719.20
Y = 743007.91 Y = 744017.87

2- 42 Preparation
Project Geodesy

FIGURE 45. Converting the P1 and P2 values to State Plane Coordinates

4. Translate the projection coordinate to a local coordinate.

a. Go back to the GEODETIC PARAMETERS program. It is
still set up for NAD-1983 CT.
b. Change the “Grids” frame from “State Plane NAD-83”
to “None”.
c. Check the Local Grid Adjustment check box.
d. Click [Local Grid]. The Local Grid Definition window will
appear.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 43

Project Geodesy • Selecting Ellipsoids and Projection Parameters

FIGURE 46. Calculating the X and Y values

e. Enter the world and local coordinates of each point and

click [Calculate]. The program automatically calculates
the local grid parameters and displays them in the dialog.
FIGURE 47. Calculating the Distances and Angles in the Local Grid

2- 44 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

f. Click [OK] again to save your parameters and exit the

GEODETIC PARAMETERS program. The local grid
parameters are now applied in your project as long as the
Local Grid option is checked.
5. Test your results.
a. Enter the HARDWARE program. Place your GPS over P1
and run the Test function. The resulting X-Y coordinate
should be 10000X and 10000Y.
b. Now the true test. Place your GPS antenna over P2 and
run the same test. If you did your math correctly, you
should be able to get X=10000, Y=12260.

PLANNED SURVEY LINES

Planned survey lines (*.LNW) define where you want your vessel
to go. The line file contains the grid coordinates and names for
each planned line in your project area and can also contain cross
section template information. Line files are typically created in the
LINE EDITOR program.

Planned lines are saved with an LNW extension and are saved in
the project folder. You should give each set of planned lines a
unique name which will allow you to determine for what area the
survey lines were created.
Although it is possible to collect survey data without planned lines,
it will make the editing process more logical and assure your
required coverage if you have referenced some kind of survey lines
in your area.

OFFSET PATTERNS FOR PLANNED LINES

Planned lines can be created in any one of several patterns using
the Offsets function. All of the following patterns are available when
you generate lines in the LINE EDITOR.
In sub-bottom surveys, line spacing requirements depend on the
purpose of your survey. For general surveys, you can use wider
150-300 foot (50-100 meter) spacing. For high resolution surveys,
use 5-10 foot (2-3 meter) spacing. In addition, it is good practice to
run a few cross check lines to check for good alignment of the
layers in post-processing.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 45

Planned Survey Lines • Offset Patterns for Planned Lines

TABLE 1. Planned Survey Line Offset Patterns

Parallel
Offsets
Parallel lines
on either side
of the initial
line.

Center Line
Offsets
Perpendicular
lines at user-
defined
spacing along
the initial line.

Radial Offsets
Pivot your
planned line
about the first
point entered.

2- 46 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

Search
Offsets
Pivot your
planned line
about the
midpoint of the
first segment.

Stair Step
Offsets
Add user-
entered X, Y
values to each
waypoint
creating a stair
step effect.

Parallel Line • Line Spacing: The parallel line pattern can space all of the
Options lines uniformly, when only one distance is entered, or space
them in a patterned sequence set by entering a comma
delimited list of distances.
FIGURE 48. Entering a Pattern of Distances (left), and the Results (right)

• As an alternative to simple, sequential line numbers, GeoNav

Naming names your original line ‘1’, and each offset line
according to the distance and direction it is offset from the
original—lines starboard of line 1 have positive line numbers,
lines port have negative line numbers.

Center Line The center line pattern includes the Smart Corners option which
Options rotates lines about the intersection of the planned line and the
channel center line so that the line does not intersect with any
other planned line.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 47

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

Naming Scheme: Cross line names in the center line pattern

default to ###.##, but you may choose ##.###
FIGURE 49. Center Line Pattern - No Smart Corners (left), Smart Corners
(right)

The Offsets dialog also includes an Extend Lines tab where you
can adjust the length of existing survey lines. This enables you to
expand your survey area and maintain the ability to do accurate
historical comparisons with previous surveys.

CREATING PLANNED LINES IN THE LINE EDITOR

LINE EDITOR creates planned line files. Create each line
individually, or create one line then additional lines offset in a
choice of patterns. There is no limit to the number of waypoints per
line or lines per file.
Additionally, planned lines may be exported to a selection of third-
party plan files.

Alternatively, the LINE EDITOR Import dialog enables you to

extract data from ASCII text files and use it to populate the fields of
the LINE EDITOR to generate single-segmented planned lines.
To create planned lines in the LINE EDITOR:
1. Open the LINE EDITOR. Select PREPARATION-EDITORS-
LINE EDITOR.

2- 48 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

FIGURE 50. Line Editor Dialog

2. Choose to enter your position information in XY or Lat/Lon

format. Select EDIT-INPUT MODE and your choice. Lat./Lon.
coordinates from the local datum will be entered according to
the default format specified in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Control Panel.
3. Set your line naming options. (Optional)
4. Define your planned lines by entering the waypoints that
describe each line. Each page on the spreadsheet represents a
separate planned survey line and may be viewed by selecting
the line name in the left-hand pane.
5. Save your planned lines. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM planned
lines: select FILE-SAVE or FILE-SAVE AS and name your file.
Your data will be saved, by default, with an LNW extension to
your project folder and enabled in the project files listing.

More Information
• “Loading Background Charts to the Project” on page 2-4
• “Offset Patterns for Planned Lines” on page 2-45
• “Editing your Planned Line File in the Line Editor” on
page 2-59
• “Creating 2-Dimensional Planned Lines - Spreadsheet
Method” on page 2-50

LINE NAMING OPTIONS

If you prefer something more than a simple line number to identify
each planned line in the file, you can pre-define a text string that
will be appended to the line number as specified. This feature is
optional and must be set each time you enter the LINE EDITOR.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 49

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

NOTE: This option is not available for lines created using center line
offsets.

Defining a Prefix 1. Select LINE-LINE NAME PREFIX or LINE-LINE NAME

or Suffix SUFFIX. A dialog will appear.
FIGURE 51. Line Name Prefix and Postfix Dialog

2. Enter the required text string and click OK.

Once a string has been entered, it will appear next to the menu
selection and will be appended to all lines created after that until
you change the string definition or close the LINE EDITOR.
FIGURE 52. Line Names with Prefix and Postfix

CREATING 2-DIMENSIONAL PLANNED LINES -

SPREADSHEET METHOD
1. Open the LINE EDITOR. Select PREPARATION-EDITORS-
LINE EDITOR.

2- 50 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

2. Create the spreadsheet by clicking the Add Point

icon once for each waypoint you wish to enter in the
initial survey line. Each point will be automatically filled
with the coordinates of the upper left corner of the
area map.
3. Enter the coordinates with the waypoint position
information for the first line into the spreadsheet.
FIGURE 53. Entering the Initial Line in Line Editor

4. Create your offsets.

a. Click on the Offsets icon. The offsets dialog will
appear.
b. Select the pattern of lines you wish to use by
selecting the corresponding tab.
c. Enter the parameters for line construction—typically,
the number of offsets to be created as well as the
distance or angle between them, but the parallel and
centerline patterns include additional options:
• To determine which way is left or right (port or
starboard) for parallel and center line offsets, imagine
you are standing at the start of the initial line looking
toward the end.
• Line Naming: Parallel lines default to sequential
numbers, but you may choose GeoNav naming. Cross
line names in the center line pattern default to ###.##,
but you may choose ##.###.
• The center line pattern also requires a chainage on
which the line numbering will be based and the angle at
which the offsets will be generated relative to the center
line.
d. If you are generating parallel offsets, choose whether
to allow line renumbering.
When the LINE EDITOR generates your offset lines,
usually, it creates (and numbers) the offsets, in sequence,

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 51

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

after the initial line (eg. 1,2,3,4,5). However, since you can
generate parallel offsets on either side of the initial line (line
‘1’), they would be out of sequence (eg. 2,3,1,4,5).
To generate lines sequentially numbered, we have to
renumber (rename) the lines by checking Allow Line
Renumbering.
Tip: There are times, such as when you have generated
offsets more than once, when this method of renumbering
will not yield a sequential line set. If this is the case, select
LINE-RENUMBER. The LINE EDITOR will renumber all of
the lines in the file.
FIGURE 54. Offsets—Parallel Tab

e. Click [OK]. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM will display your

filled spreadsheet and the lines will be drawn to the screen.
Alternatively, you can manually enter all of the waypoint data
into the spreadsheet. (If you have a file with a lot of waypoints,
you’ll need a lot of time and patience for this option.)
5. Preview your lines by clicking the Extents icon. The LINE
EDITOR spreadsheet will minimize and the area map will zoom
in to the line file. Arrows show the direction of the line currently
selected in the editor.
FIGURE 55. Previewing Your Lines

6. Return to the LINE EDITOR by clicking [Line Editor] at the

lower left.
7. Name individual lines (optional):

2- 52 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

• Select LINE-LINE NAME and provide the name in the

dialog that appears.
OR
• Right-click on the current line name, select ‘Rename’ and
enter the new line name.
8. You may edit your lines, in the spreadsheet or with the
cursor, if you wish. Continue to preview and edit until your
lines are satisfactory.
9. Save your file. Select FILE-SAVE or FILE-SAVE AS and name
your file. Your data will be saved, by default, with an LNW
extension to your project Folder and enabled in the project files
listing.

NOTE: You may start again by selecting FILE-CLOSE. Confirm that

you do not wish to save the file and the LINE EDITOR will
return to the point when you first launched it.

CREATING 2-DIMENSIONAL PLANNED LINES USING THE

CURSOR AND OFFSETS METHOD
You can interactively create planned survey lines in the LINE
EDITOR:
1. Open a Background File of your survey area.
FIGURE 56. Sample Background File

2. Open the LINE EDITOR. Select PREPARATION-EDITORS-

LINE EDITOR

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 53

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

3. Create your initial planned line. Click the Cursor

icon and the LINE EDITOR will minimize.
4. Click in the area map to mark each waypoint in
the initial line.
5. Restore the LINE EDITOR by clicking [Line Editor] at the
bottom left. You can review the points of your first line, and then
continue.
6. Create your Offset Lines.
7. Preview your lines by clicking the Extents icon. The
LINE EDITOR spreadsheet will minimize and the
area map will zoom in to the line file.
FIGURE 57. Planned Lines Preview on HAL.DIG

8. Return to the LINE EDITOR by clicking [Line Editor] at the

lower left.
9. Save your Line File. Select FILE-SAVE or FILE-SAVE AS and
name your file. Your data will be saved, by default, with an LNW
extension to your project Folder and enabled in the project files
listing.

IMPORTING WAYPOINTS FROM A TEXT FILE TO THE

LINE EDITOR
The LINE EDITOR Import dialog enables you to extract data from
ASCII text files and use it to populate the fields of the LINE
EDITOR to generate single-segmented planned lines.

2- 54 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

• Each line (or record) in the text file must contain the data for
one line in the planned line file and present the data in the
same order.
• Each line must, at least, contain the coordinates for the start
and end points of the line. If no name is imported, the LINE
EDITOR automatically numbers your lines when you import the
data.
1. Open the LINE EDITOR. Select PREPARATION-EDITORS-
LINE EDITOR.
2. Select FILE-IMPORT. This will give you the dialog box which
you will use to set up your import of the text document.
FIGURE 58. Line Import Dialog—Importing the Second Through Fifth Fields
of Each Record: The Waypoint Positions

3. Select and order the fields used to create your new line
file.
• Place a check in the box for each field in your text file
you want to use to populate the Line file
• Use the cursor to drag the fields into the order that they
appear in your file.
• To skip a field in the string, check ‘Ignore’ and drag it to
the position of the field to be skipped in the list. If you need
more than one Ignore field, click [Add Ignore Field] to
generate as many as you need.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 55

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

FIGURE 59. Ignoring Fields in the Import String—Ignoring the Second Field in
an XY Import

4. Choose the correct delimited format. The program supports

comma, tab and space delimiters.
5. Load the text file. Click [Load File], select your file and click
[Open]. In the Lines area, you will see your waypoints as they
appear in your file and you can see the syntax of the records.
6. Check the syntax of your file against the field list.
(Optional) This process verifies that your configuration settings
are compatible with the text file you have loaded.
a. Select a line from the Lines area.
b. Click [Check Syntax]. A message window will appear to
tell you how many records of the total number can be
converted using your current settings.
7. Click [Convert] A message window will appear to tell you how
many records have been converted.
8. Click [Exit]. The Import dialog will close and the LINE EDITOR
will be populated with the data from the text file.
9. Save your line file. Select FILE-SAVE or FILE-SAVE AS and
name your file. Your data will be saved, by default, with an LNW
extension to your project folder.

CREATING PLANNED LINES TO FIT YOUR SURVEY

AREA
You can create a border file in the BORDER EDITOR, which
defines the boundary areas of your survey area. Use it to guide
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM in creating or "clipping" the survey lines
to exactly fit within a coastline or unorthometric survey area.

2- 56 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

Create one or more border files to describe your survey area. You
will need one border to define the perimeter of your survey area.
Additional border files may be required if there are obstructions,
such as islands, in your survey area that will disrupt your line
pattern.

NOTE: The last point of the border describing the perimeter should
always be inside the border area. The last point of borders
describing unsurveyable areas, such as islands, within the
survey area should be outside the border area.

Once you have defined your survey area with border files, you can
clip existing line files or generate a new line set within the border
defining the perimeter.

CLIPPING If you have a planned line file whose lines extend outside the
PLANNED LINES survey area, you can use a Border file to clip the lines to fit your
TO THE SURVEY area.
AREA 1. Create a border file (or border files) defining the boundaries of
your survey area.
2. Open your planned line file by opening the LINE EDITOR
and clicking FILE-OPEN then selecting the correct line file.
FIGURE 60. Planned Line File with Border File overlaid

3. Click [Clip Lines].

4. Select the border file that you want to clip with and
click [OK]. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM does the rest. If
the border is concave and lines are broken, the segments
toward the end of the line will be renamed with an “_Number”
appended. For example, line 2 would become “2” and “2_1”.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 57

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

NOTE: You may need to repeat this process multiple times if you
have more than one border file.

FIGURE 61. Clipped Planned Lines --After First Clip (left) and Second Clip
(right)

5. Save your file. Use FILE-SAVE if you want to overwrite your

original line file. Use FILE-SAVE AS to preserve your original
line file and save the clipped lines to a different name. Your
data will be saved, by default, with an LNW extension to your
project folder and enabled in the project files listing.

CREATING If you are creating a new line file the LINE EDITOR can create a
PLANNED LINES set of survey lines with user-defined spacing and azimuth to fit
INSIDE A BORDER within the border file.
FILE 1. Create the border file to describe the perimeter of your area.
Take care to place the last point inside the area defined.
2. Open the LINE EDITOR.
3. Select LINE-GENERATE LINES IN BORDER. A dialog will
appear.
FIGURE 62. Entering the parameters to create lines inside a border file.

2- 58 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

4. Enter border file, line spacing and line azimuth for your file
and click [OK]. The lines will be generated and drawn to the
design window for preview.
5. Save your line file. Your data will be saved, by default, with an
LNW extension to your project Folder and enabled in the
project files listing.
FIGURE 63. Sample Line File within a border

More Information
• “Border Files” on page 2-68

EDITING YOUR PLANNED LINE FILE IN THE LINE EDITOR

You may edit a planned line file that has been created in the LINE
EDITOR, at any time, by opening the LINE EDITOR and selecting
FILE-OPEN and selecting the LNW from the file selection dialog.
The saved data will appear in the spreadsheet where you can
make your changes.
Many changes can be made either in the spreadsheet or by using
the cursor in the area map. The following describes the editing
operations available and instructions to do them in each mode.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 59

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

TABLE 2. Editing Tools and Methods in the LINE EDITOR

Task Spreadsheet Method Cursor Method

Add Line Click the Add Line Add Line icon then the
icon then the Add Cursor icon. Click on
point icon. Enter the the map at waypoint
waypoint position positions.
data.
Delete Line Right-click on the line name of
the line to be removed and
select ‘Delete’.
Insert a Select waypoint below where Select waypoint immediately
Waypoint the new point should be before it on the line. (The circle
inserted and click the Insert will fill.) Hold the Shift key and
Point icon. Enter the click with the cursor at the new
appropriate coordinates. waypoint location.
Delete Select the waypoint in the Select the waypoint in the area
Waypoint spreadsheet and click Delete map (it becomes solid filled)
Point icon. and push the delete key on
keyboard.
Reposition a Type new coordinates for the Select the waypoint in the area
Waypoint point you want to move. map then drag it with the
cursor to the new location.
Reverse the Right-click on the current line
Order of name and select ’Reverse
Waypoints Order’.
Clip lines to (See “Clipping Planned Lines to the Survey Area”. )
survey area
Rename lines Right-click on the current line name, select ‘Rename’ and enter
the new line name.

UNDO OFFSETS If you have just used the automatic Offsets feature and are
unsatisfied, and you have not yet closed the file, select LINE-
UNDO OFFSETS and try again. Continue to preview and edit until
your lines are satisfactory.

EXTENDING OR Modifying the length of the planned line (at either or both ends)
SHORTENING enables you to expand your survey area and maintain the ability to
LINES do accurate historical comparisons with previous surveys.
1. Open the line file where you want to extend lines.
2. Click the Offsets icon and select the Extend Lines tab.

2- 60 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

FIGURE 64. Offsets – Extend Lines Tab

3. Select whether you want to extend All Lines or Specific

Lines.
4. If you choose “Specific Lines”, specify a range of lines (by
line number) to be affected. (The dialog default includes all of
the lines in your file.)

NOTE: These numbers usually correspond to the line numbers.

However, if the line naming scheme is other than
sequential numbering beginning at one, you should count
the lines in the Lines list to determine how to describe the
range of lines. For example, if you are extending the
offsets in a center line pattern, the center line is "1", then
the section lines begin, by default, at "0+00". If you
specify a range of 5-15, the lines named "3+00" to
"13+00" will be extended.

5. Enter the distance that you want to extend the lines at the
start or end (or both) of the specified lines. (If you want to
shorten your line, enter a negative distance.)
6. Click [OK] and the LINE EDITOR will move the start line point
by the specified distance.

INSERTING You can insert a user-defined number of survey lines between two
EQUIDISTANT adjacent lines in an existing planned line file. The Line Editor will
LINES WITHIN A calculate the required waypoint coordinates to distribute them
LINE FILE evenly between the two existing lines using the same offset
pattern. Line Editor generates unique numeric line names for the
inserted lines.
To insert additional lines into an existing planned line file:
1. Open the existing planned line file in the LINE EDITOR.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 61

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

FIGURE 65. The Original Planned Line File

2. Hold the Ctrl key and use your cursor to select the two
adjacent lines between which you want to insert the additional
lines.
3. Right-click in the shaded space created by the selection
and select “Add lines between 2 selections”. A dialog will
appear.
FIGURE 66. Inserting lines in the LINE EDITOR

FIGURE 67. Specifying the number of lines to be inserted

4. Enter the number of lines you want to insert and click

[OK]. The lines will be inserted into the file. In this example, we
began with six lines named by number. The inserted lines are
named 7, 8 and 9. You may rename them manually, if you wish.

2- 62 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

FIGURE 68. Three Lines Inserted to a Line File with Parallel Offsets

5. Save your modified file. Select FILE-SAVE to overwrite the

original line file. Select FILE-SAVE AS to write the results to a
new line file. Your data will be saved, by default, with an LNW
extension to your project Folder and enabled in the project files
listing.

APPENDING LINE FILES

You can append one existing Line File to another in the LINE
EDITOR.
1. Open or create a line file in the LINE EDITOR.
2. Select FILE-APPEND and a file selection dialog will appear.
3. Choose the second line file and click [OK]. The second file
will be appended to the end of the first. When the Line Editor
combines the two files, it checks for duplicate line names. If
there are duplicate line names in the appended file, the LINE
EDITOR appends an “_1” to the name. If that name already
exists, the LINE EDITOR appends an “_2”. LINE EDITOR will
continue incrementing the number after the underscore until it
creates a line name that is unique to the file.
4. Preview the results by clicking the Extents icon.
5. Save your file. FILE-SAVE will overwrite the original line file.
FILE-SAVE AS will enable you to assign a new name to the
combined file.

CREATING WAYPOINTS USING DISTANCE AND BEARING

You can extend the end of a survey line by adding a waypoint
based on distance and bearing information instead of waypoint
coordinates.
1. Define the coordinates of at least one waypoint in a survey
line. You can enter it manually or use the cursor method.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 63

Planned Survey Lines • Creating Planned Lines in the Line Editor

FIGURE 69. Initial Survey Line

2. Click the Offset Icon from the lower toolbar. A dialog

will appear.
FIGURE 70. Offset Point Dialog

3. Enter the distance and bearing from the last waypoint in

the line to the end point of your extension and click [OK].
The LINE EDITOR will calculate the position and automatically
append the coordinates as the last waypoint in the line.
FIGURE 71. Survey Line Extended 45 Survey Units at a Bearing of 45
Degrees

CREATING CURVED LINES WITH THE LINE EDITOR

Curved survey lines will be defined in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
as any survey line containing one or more arched segments
connecting their defining points.
1. Create your initial line as you would with straight lines.
Typically, you define the initial line by entering a few points,
using either the cursor or spreadsheet method. These points
will automatically be connected by straight segments.
2. Add curvature to any segment of the line as needed. Enter
your radius In the Arc column for the waypoint preceding the
segment you want to curve. In this example, we alternated 300
and -300.

2- 64 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

FIGURE 72. Specifying the Radius of your Arc

• Enter any radius that is, by absolute value, greater than the
half-length of the segment. Otherwise, the arc can not be
created.
• A positive or negative radius determines that the center
point of the arc will be right or left of the segment
respectively.
3. Create your offsets as normal. All offset patterns can be used
with curved lines (some with more useful result than others).
FIGURE 73. Curved Parallel Lines—Four Consecutive Curved Segments

NOTE: The Clip Lines option does not support curved lines. It will
clip curved segments, as if they were straight.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 65

Planned Survey Lines • Line Reports

LINE REPORTS
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM generates line reports from a right-click
menu in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Project Items list and from
the LINE EDITOR. Both list the distance along line for each line in
the planned line (*.LNW) file. The report generated in the LINE
EDITOR also attempts to estimate the time to survey the line set
based on your estimates of your average speed and time to
change lines.

SHOW LINES REPORT

Once you have a line file loaded to HYPACK®, you can generate a
listing of the distances along each survey line and their total by
right-clicking on the Line File name in the Project File list and
selecting Show Lines Report.
FIGURE 74. Show Lines Report

ESTIMATING SURVEY TIME AND DISTANCE

A lines report is a listing of the distances along each survey line,
and the calculated the total line distance and the approximate
travel time based on user-defined travel speed and line change
time. You can generate lines reports from enabled planned line
files (*.LNW), or raw data files (*.RAW, *.HSX).
1. Load the planned line file into the LINE EDITOR.
2. Click the Line Report icon.The Line Report dialog appears.

2- 66 Preparation
Planned Survey Lines

FIGURE 75. Line Report Dialog

3. Enter your report calculation variables and click [OK]. The

generated report appears in Windows® Notepad.
• Survey Speed: Estimated average travel speed (knots).
• Interline Transit Time: Estimated time between an end
line and the next start line.
FIGURE 76. A Sample Line Report

4. Save your report. (Optional) In Notepad, select FILE-SAVE

AS, set the location and name for your report and click [Save].

NOTE: FILE-SAVE defaults to the \HYPACK Sub-bottom\Temp

folder.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 67

Border Files • Creating a Border File with the Cursor Method

BORDER FILES
Border Files (*.BRD): A user-defined listing of XY positions that
defines an area in your project area. Typically, Border files are
created in the BORDER EDITOR and stored in your project folder.
They have several uses, most often to clip data or limit program
calculations to a user-defined area.
Use a border file to trim data and limit the extents of your display in
the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR.

CREATING A BORDER FILE WITH THE CURSOR METHOD

In the BORDER EDITOR, the cursor method is a quick and easy
way to define your borders if you have a background file of your
survey area available to you.
Use your cursor to define the perimeter of your area. These
locations appear as open circles at the map location. The
BORDER EDITOR also, automatically generates small, black
“virtual waypoints” between each pair of defined waypoints. At any
time, you can click and drag a waypoint or virtual waypoint to a new
position. If you reposition a virtual waypoint, it becomes a waypoint
and two additional virtual points appear on either side of it.

NOTE: You may need to repeat this process multiple times if more
than one area must be defined.

1. Open the background file in your project.

2. Open the BORDER EDITOR by selecting PREPARATION-
EDITORS-LINE EDITOR.
3. Specify that you are creating a new file by selecting FILE-
NEW.
4. Click [Cursor]. The BORDER EDITOR will minimize and a
BORDER EDITOR button will appear at the lower left, leaving
the map visible again.
5. Click on the map at enough locations around the perimeter
of your survey area to define its shape.
6. Restore the BORDER EDITOR to the screen by clicking
[Border Editor]. It will display a spreadsheet of all points you
have selected.

2- 68 Preparation
Border Files

FIGURE 77. BORDER EDITOR

7. Check or clear the Outside option to indicate the area in

which you want to keep your data.
8. Edit your points at this time if necessary using the Add icon
and right-click menu.
Once a border is defined, you can select any point in the
border, which will turn it red, and modify the file as follows:
• Overtype any coordinates you want to change.
• [Add]: Inserts a waypoint at the end of the spreadsheet
mid-way between the first and last points.
• Insert: Adds a point mid-way between the selected point
and the point before it.
Tip: Alternatively, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically
generates a virtual point in the area map at the midpoint
between each point defined in the BORDER EDITOR.
Virtual points only become part of the border file if you click
on it. At this time, two new virtual points appear before and
after the new border point.
• Delete: Removes the selected point.
• Delete All: Removes all waypoints in the current file.
• Copy: Copies the selected coordinate pair to the
Windows® clipboard.
• Paste: Overwrites the selected coordinate pair with the
copied coordinate pair on the clipboard.
9. Preview your entries by clicking [Preview]. The BORDER
EDITOR will minimize and the area map will zoom in on your
points.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 69

Border Files • Creating a Border File with the Spreadsheet Method

FIGURE 78. BORDER EDITOR Preview—Preliminary Border (left), Detailed

Border (right)

10. Save the file. When you are satisfied, click FILE–SAVE AS.
You will be asked to name the border file which will be saved,
by default, with a BRD extension to the project directory and
enabled (drawn to the screen) in your project.

NOTE: The BRD file stores the waypoints in XY coordinates.

Alternatively, you can save the same file with WGS-84
coordinates (*.B84) for use outside of HYPACK®.

CREATING A BORDER FILE WITH THE SPREADSHEET

METHOD
In this method, it is useful if you know the coordinates of your
shoreline, islands and any other areas you want to exclude from
your survey area that is currently covered by your planned lines.

NOTE: You may need to repeat this process multiple times if more
than one area must be defined.

1. Open the BORDER EDITOR by selecting PREPARATION-

EDITORS-BORDER EDITOR. The BORDER EDITOR will
appear.
2. Click on FILE-NEW to clear the spreadsheet.
3. Set the format in which you want to enter your target
positions. You can enter position data in either X,Y or Lat./
Lon. format. Toggle between these options using the EDIT-

2- 70 Preparation
Border Files

UNITS menu selection. Lat./Lon. displays follow the default

setting found in the General Tab of the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM Control Panel.
4. Enter the coordinates for your boundary. To enter your
waypoints manually:
a. Click the Add Point icon for each point needed
to define the area perimeter. Each point will be
automatically filled with the coordinates of the
upper left corner of the area map.
b. Edit the coordinates with the waypoint position
information for your border file.. Remember that the
points must form one continuous line.
5. Check or clear the Outside option to indicate the area in
which you want to keep your data.
FIGURE 79. The BORDER EDITOR Window

6. Preview your entries by clicking [Preview]. The BORDER

EDITOR will minimize and the area map will zoom in on your
points.
7. You may edit your points as necessary by reopening the
BORDER EDITOR and making any changes using the right-
click menu.
Once a border is defined, you can select any point in the
border, which will turn it red, and modify the file as follows:
• Overtype any coordinates you want to change.
• [Add]: Inserts a waypoint at the end of the spreadsheet
mid-way between the first and last points.
Tip: Alternatively, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically
generates a virtual point in the area map at the midpoint

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 71

Border Files • Importing Border Points To the Border Editor

between each point defined in the BORDER EDITOR.

Virtual points only become part of the border file if you click
on it. At this time, two new virtual points appear before and
after the new border point.
A right-click on the selected point accesses the following
menu:
• Insert: Adds a point mid-way between the selected
point and the point before it.
• Delete: Removes the selected point.
• Delete All: Removes all waypoints in the current file.
• Copy: Copies the selected coordinate pair to the
Windows® clipboard.
• Paste: Overwrites the selected coordinate pair with the
copied coordinate pair on the clipboard.
8. Save your file by clicking on FILE-SAVE, giving it a name and
saving your file to your project. Your Border File will be saved
with the BRD extension in your project directory and enabled
(drawn to the screen) in your project.

NOTE: The BRD file stores the waypoints in XY coordinates.

Alternatively, you can save the same file with WGS-84
coordinates (*.B84) for use outside of HYPACK®.

IMPORTING BORDER POINTS TO THE BORDER EDITOR

The Border Import dialog enables you to extract data from ASCII
text files and use it to populate the fields of the BORDER EDITOR.
Each line (or record) in the text file must contain the data for one
point in the border and present the data in the same order.
1. Open the BORDER EDITOR from the Editors menu in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM shell.
2. Select FILE-IMPORT. This will give you the dialog box which
you will use to set up your import of the text document.

2- 72 Preparation
Border Files

FIGURE 80. Border Import Dialog--importing the first two fields of each
record: the XY positions

3. Select and order the fields used to create your new border
file.
a. Place a check in the box for each field in your text file
you want to use to populate the border file
b. Use the cursor to drag the fields into the order that they
appear in your file.
• To skip a field in the string, check ‘Ignore’ and drag it to
the position of the field to be skipped in the list. If you need
more than one Ignore field, click [Add Ignore Field] to
generate as many as you need.
FIGURE 81. Ignoring Fields in the Import String--Ignoring the Second Field in
an XY Import

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 73

Border Files • Adjusting Border Size

4. Choose the correct delimited format. The program supports

comma, tab and space delimiters.
5. Load the text file. Click [Load File], select your file and click
[Open]. In the Lines area, you will see your border points as
they appear in your file and you can see the syntax of the
records.
6. Check the syntax of your file against the field list.
(Optional) This process verifies that your configuration settings
are compatible with the text file you have loaded.
a. Select a line from the Lines area.
b. Click [Check Syntax]. A message window will appear to
tell you how many records of the total number can be
converted using your current settings.
7. Click [Convert] A message window will appear to tell you how
many records have been converted.
8. Click [Exit]. The Import dialog will close and the BORDER
EDITOR will be populated with the data from the text file.
9. Save your border file by selecting FILE-SAVE and naming
your file. Your file will be saved, by default, to your project
folder.

ADJUSTING BORDER SIZE

If you find an existing border file is incorrectly sized, you can
quickly expand or contract the border by a user-defined amount.
If the value is mathematically impossible to implement based
on the original border measurements, the editor displays a
message and aborts the adjustment.
1. Open the BORDER EDITOR from the Editors menu in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM shell.
2. Open the border file you want to resize. Select FILE-OPEN,
select your file, and click [Open].
3. Select EDIT-OFFSET BORDER. The Adjust Border Size
dialog appears.
FIGURE 82. Border File Adjust Dialog

2- 74 Preparation
Border Files

4. Enter the distance, in survey units, by which you want to

shift the border waypoints and click [OK]. A positive value
expands the border area, and a negative value decreases the
border area.
The adjusted waypoints replace the original waypoints in the
BORDER EDITOR spreadsheet, and a preview of the adjusted
border appears in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Map display.
FIGURE 83. Three Border Files—The Original BRD, a BRD Increased by 50
and a BRD Decreased by 50

5. Save your border file.

• To overwrite the original border file, select FILE-SAVE.
• To generate a new border file, select FILE-SAVE AS and
name your file. Your file will be saved, by default, to your
project folder.

BORDER REPORTS
A border report displays the perimeter distance and area of a
border file.
To display a border report:
1. In the Project Files list, right-click on the border file for
which you would like to generate the statistics.
2. Select ‘Border Report’.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 75

Configuring your Hardware • Principles of Sub-bottom Profiling

FIGURE 84. Sample Border Report

CONFIGURING YOUR HARDWARE

In general, sub-bottom profiling (SBP) systems are single-channel
systems used for shallow reflection seismic profiling. These sub-
bottom profilers operate at different transmit frequencies and this
has an effect on the depth of acoustic penetration into the seabed
and the resultant resolution. Lower frequency sound sources
produce more acoustic penetration into the seabed, but at a lower
resolution; and conversely, higher frequency systems attain less
penetration but produce higher resolution data. Signal penetration
is further limited in coarse sediment or highly compacted sands,
due to scattering. Most sub-bottom profiling systems can be
considered as “uncalibrated systems” which makes statistical
sediment classification and other quantitative measurements
difficult to calculate. There are however certain SBP systems,
making use of Chirp Technology, which can be considered
“calibrated systems” and these could be used for quantitative
seabed assessments.
Sub-bottom profilers are used extensively in offshore, coastal and
port engineering and geotechnical site surveys, renewable energy
surveys, dredging studies, mineral exploration and habitat mapping
projects. The interpreted data from these systems includes the
thickness and qualitative sediment characteristics of the different
sediment layers that comprise the sub-bottom strata.

PRINCIPLES OF SUB-BOTTOM PROFILING

Depending on the type of sub-bottom profiling system, the energy
source and the receiver can be combined, as in a transducer, or
separated, as a sound source (i.e. boomer plate) and a receiver
(hydrophone array) – see Figure 85. It is important that the number
of hydrophone elements and the spacing between the elements is
matched to the acoustic characteristics of the sound source.

2- 76 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

Sub-bottom profilers work by transmitting sound energy in the form

of a short pulse towards the seabed. This sound energy is reflected
from the seabed and the sub-surface sediment layers. The
reflected energy intensity depends on the different densities of the
sediments, the denser (harder) the sediments, the stronger the
reflected signal. The reflected signal then travels back through the
water to the receiver (either a towed hydrophone or transducer).
The received signals are then amplified, processed and displayed
in the acquisition system.
FIGURE 85. Deployment of Various Shallow-Water Sub-bottom Profiling
Systems. After Stoker et al. (1997).

TYPES OF SUB-BOTTOM PROFILING SYSTEMS

Typically sub-bottom profiling surveys are undertaken using a
variety of systems: Chirp, Pinger, Parametric, Bubble Pulser,
Boomer, Sparker or mini-Airgun systems. In the following table,
these systems are listed according to their increasing typical depth
of acoustic penetration into the seabed/lake/river substrate.
Generally, sub-bottom profilers transmit acoustic energy around a
central frequency, but the band width varies from system to
system. The exceptions to this are Chirp and Parametric sub-
bottom profilers. Chirp sub-bottom profiling systems operate
around a central frequency that is swept electronically across a
range of frequencies between 2 kHz to 16 kHz, which can improve
resolution in shallow seabed sediments. Parametric sub-bottom
profilers are non-linear systems that transmit two different higher
frequencies that interact during sound propagation to generate a
resultant lower frequency (i.e. 4 kHz). This lower frequency can
penetrate the seabed more effectively.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 77

Configuring your Hardware • Installation & Towing Configuration Recommendations

TABLE 3. Acoustic characteristics of commonly used sub-bottom profiling

systems. The depth of penetration is related to the frequency, source
energy & nature of the seabed geology..

Operating Source & Typical Typical Depth Mount

System
Frequency Receive Array Resolution of Penetration Configuration
Vessel
Swept frequency
Chirp 2 - 16 kHz 0.05 – 0.1 m 5 – 50 m mounted or
transducer
sub-towed
Vessel
Parametric Parametric
2 - 22 kHz 0.05 – 0.1 m 5 – 30 m mounted or
SBP transducer
sub-towed
Combined piezo- Vessel
Pinger 2 - 12 kHz transducer/ 0.2 m 10 – 50 m mounted or
transceiver sub-towed
Bubble Plate & towed Surface
0.4 kHz 0.3 - .0.5 m 20 – 100 m
Pulser array catamaran
Plate & towed Surface
Boomer 0.3 - 6 kHz 0.2 - 0.5 m 20 – 150 m
array catamaran
Surface
Spark electrodes
Sparker 0.2 – 3 kHz 0.3 – 1 m 30 – 750 m catamaran or
& towed array
sub-towed
Airgun & towed
Mini-Airgun 0.1 – 3 kHz 0.5 – 1 m 30 – 200 m Towed
array

INSTALLATION & TOWING CONFIGURATION

RECOMMENDATIONS
Mounting a sub-bottom profiler on a vessel and towing the source/
hydrophone array correctly are critical to acquiring a noise-free
dataset. In vessel hull mounted or over-the-side systems, it is
important that the transducers are mounted away from areas of
potential noise or turbulence, which can have a considerable effect
on the quality of the data acquired. With a surface towed source
and receive array configuration, it is a good idea to have the source
and the receive array separated by the aerated propeller wash as
this significantly reduces the amplitude of the direct/first arrival
signal. It is, however, important that the source and receive array
do not get towed into the aerated propeller wash as this causes
acoustic blanking and poor data quality. The data position origin
when using a surface towed source and separated receive array is
mid-point between the source and receive array and this is termed
the SBP Common Midpoint.

2- 78 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

FIGURE 86. Various towed and vessel mounted sub-bottom profiling system
installations.

CONFIGURING SUB-BOTTOM PROFILING SYSTEMS IN

HARDWARE
‘Hardware’ is the term we use for the sensor devices from which
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM receives data. In order for HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM to work properly, we need to know what kind of
instruments you have, how they are connected, how often you
want to read them, how often you want to record them, etc.
All devices are configured from a common HARDWARE interface;
however, HARDWARE includes three separate sets of
configuration tabs according to the type of project and device—
HYPACK, HYSWEEP® and SIDE SCAN HARDWARE.
A sub-bottom survey requires only HYPACK devices. They can be
hull-mounted or towed systems with GPS or inertial positioning.
If your equipment does not change, and you are satisfied with
the communication between your equipment and the survey
programs, you don’t have to run HARDWARE again.
If you change survey equipment, you will have to reconfigure
your hardware.
1. Select PREPARATION-HARDWARE SETUP or click on the
Hardware icon. The HARDWARE window will appear with any
configured devices listed on the left. When there are no devices
configured, it lists a “boat” with no devices.
2. Select FILE-NEW. The configuration begins with a single
vessel and no devices. The program asks whether to save the

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 79

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

current configuration. If you want to save it, click [Yes] and save
your configuration file before proceeding with this step. If you
don't need it or have already saved the current configuration,
click [No] and build a new hardware configuration from the
beginning.
3. Create a mobile for each device position you will track. For
example, the vessel and the towfish.
4. Set your mobile settings. Your hardware configuration
includes a mobile for each device position you will track.
A sub-bottom configuration depends on the type of transducer:
a hull-mounted pinger needs only the initial boat mobile with
the tracking point at the transducer, while towed systems
requires a second mobile with the tracking point at the sub-
bottom profiler common midpoint.
Each vessel (mobile) in your configuration has an associated
Mobile dialog which appears when you select the vessel name
in your device list. This is where you can rename the mobile
and set the tracking point.
5. Configure each device in your system. This includes
selecting a device driver for each device and configuring the
driver setup options, connection information and the position of
the device relative to a fixed reference point on the mobile
(measured offsets).
6. Test the communication between the devices and your
survey computer.
7. Save your configuration. When you select FILE-SAVE, your
current hardware configuration is stored in the \HYPACK Sub-
bottom\Projects\ProjectName\survey32.ini.

MOBILES AND MOBILE SETTINGS

A Vessel (also called a mobile) in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM is
any independently mobile object. ‘Vessel’ most commonly means
some sort of boat, but in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, it may be a lot
of other things—a towfish, an ROV, a digging tool on a dredge, one
HYPACK® computer monitoring signals broadcast over wireless
connection from multiple vessels, etc. If HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
needs to have a position for it, it’s a vessel. For each mobile,
SURVEY displays a symbol or boat shape at its current position.
HARDWARE always has at least one mobile. Each mobile has an
origin (reference point) and a tracking point. You may also assign a
boat shape which can be used in place of the simple symbol
options to more closely represent your vessel in SURVEY.

The vessel origin is the reference by which you position your

devices and tracking point on your vessel. The tracking point and

2- 80 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

each sensor is referenced to the origin based on the distance in

survey units it is starboard (X-direction), forward (Y-direction) and
vertically (Z-direction). Vertical offsets are measured from the static
water line, and are always positive downward.

A tracking point is the position used by SURVEY to position the

mobile in the world. It is used to provide left/right guidance, make
automatic “start line” and “end line” decisions, and calculate
horizontal distances between the vessel and features in your
survey area. It is also the location at which Quickmark targets are
marked.
SURVEY must know the position of each mobile and, in order to
-->

properly position your other data, which devices are on each

mobile. To do this our hardware configuration defines the devices,
the mobiles, which devices are on each mobile and each device
position relative to the origin of its mobile.

ADDING A MOBILE A new HARDWARE configuration begins with a ‘boat’ mobile.

-->

Your configuration must include a mobile for each independent

position SURVEY will track.
For configurations requiring multiple mobiles, you must insert
additional mobiles.
1. Right-click on HYPACK Configuration and select ‘Add
Mobile’. An additional boat mobile appears.
2. Select the boat in the configuration tree to display the
Mobile, Survey Devices and Vessel Shape tabs for the selected
mobile.
3. Name your mobile. Each mobile should have a unique name.
4. Set your Mobile properties: the tracking point and vessel
shape.
FIGURE 87. Setting your Mobile Properties

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 81

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

MOBILE OFFSETS If a mobile has no positioning device, HYPACK® SURVEY can

calculate its position based on a set of user-defined measurements
and the position of another mobile.
BEWARE! When the position of a mobile is calculated relative to
another mobile, the horizontal offset signs are reversed from the
normal convention (i.e. distances port and forward of the origin are
negative and distances starboard and aft of the origin are positive).
To avoid confusion, enter the offsets, using the normal convention,
in the driver setup dialog instead of in the usual Offsets fields when
possible. The driver then assigns the correct offset signs.

To accommodate this idiosyncrasy, specify offsets in the

driver setup dialog where available. Some drivers, such as the
towfish driver, include offsets in the driver setup dialog (accessed
when you select the driver and click [Setup] in HARDWARE).
There, you can enter the offsets using the normal sign convention
and leave the forward, starboard and height offsets in the Offsets
tab of HARDWARE set to zero.

NOTE: The height offset can be entered using the normal sign
convention either in the driver setup or in the Offsets tab, but
not both!

2- 82 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

FIGURE 88. Towfish Driver Setup—Offsets in the Device Setup are All Zero

• Reverse the signs for the X, and Y offsets. Drivers without

offsets in the driver setup dialog require that you reverse the
signs of the forward, starboard offsets in the offsets on the
Offsets tab.
FIGURE 89. Trackp Driver Setup (left), Offsets 10m port and 3m aft (right)

ASSIGNING THE In addition to the sensors, each mobile must include a tracking
TRACKING POINT point.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 83

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

A tracking point is the position used by SURVEY to position the

mobile in the world. It is used to provide left/right guidance, make
automatic “start line” and “end line” decisions, and calculate
horizontal distances between the vessel and features in your
survey area. It is also the location at which Quickmark targets are
marked.

To define the tracking point position, enter its offset distances

from the vessel origin in the Mobile tab.
On a sub-bottom survey, it depends on the type of system. For
hull-mounted pingers, you typically place the tracking point over
the transducer because all of the tracking point functions should be
relative to the transducer. For towed systems, you typically place
the tracking point at the towfish attachment point (0,0).

ASSIGNING A In the Vessel Shape tab, you may select a boat shape file (*.SHP)
BOAT SHAPE TO and view an overhead display of the shape and a rear view of a
EACH MOBILE vessel, overlaid with the device positions. The devices in your
configuration are listed in the order they are entered in the
configuration and their device numbers are positioned in the boat
shape according to their offset settings.
When you assign a boat shape to a mobile in HARDWARE, you
can display a shape that more closely represents your vessel in
SURVEY.
FIGURE 90. Boat Symbol

FIGURE 91. Boat Shape in SURVEY

To assign a boat shape to a mobile do the following:

1. Use the BOAT SHAPE EDITOR to create a boat shape file
(*.SHP) that represents each mobile.

2- 84 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

2. In HARDWARE, select the mobile in the tree view.

3. In the Vessel Shape tab, click the [...] and browse for the
boat shape file that represents the selected mobile and
click [Open]. The boat shape is then displayed, in top and rear
views, with the origin and tracking points.
The Vessel Shape Tab includes a toolbar with some basic tools
with which you can adjust the display.
• Basic zoom tools adjust the scale of the vessel display.
• Grid Options affect the display other than the
boat shape and devices. Access the dialog with
the Control Panel icon.
FIGURE 92. Control Panel

• Show Device Coordinates displays the offsets for

each device.
• Show Grid draws grid lines or tics, according to the
Grid Style selection, in the display to provide
information about the scale of the vessel.
• Show HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Devices and Show
HYSWEEP® Devices: Choose whether to display of the
devices configured in HARDWARE or HYSWEEP®
HARDWARE respectively.
• X, Y and Z displays of the current cursor position relative
to the vessel origin in the displays.

CONFIGURING YOUR DEVICES

For each device in your configuration, you must provide HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM with the information it needs to read, interpret and
record the device output.
1. Select the device driver (*DLL) for one of your devices.
2. Set the type of data to be obtained from the device.
3. Set the offset and connection information.
4. Click [Setup] (or double-click the driver in the Installed list)
and specify any setup information specific to that device
driver. Each setup is different according to the needs of the

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 85

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

device driver. Some devices do not require any special

configuration, and [Setup] is disabled or just returns information
about that device. Other device drivers require detailed
information that can only be entered through the Driver Setup
dialog.

SPECIFYING When you have created a mobile for each position you want to
DEVICES IN track in SURVEY, you are ready to begin configuring your devices.
HARDWARE A sub-bottom configuration includes a positioning driver for each
mobile and the sub-bot.dll for each sub-bottom profiler.

1. Open the HARDWARE program. Select PREPARATION-

HARDWARE SETUP.
2. Add a mobile for each vessel.
3. For each device:
a. Select the correct mobile in the tree view for your
device type.
b. Select the Survey Devices tab.
c. Move the devices in your configuration to the Installed
list.
• Select the device in the Available list on the left and
click [Add->] or
• Double-click the device in the available list.
d. Name your device. The name (under the Installed list)
defaults to the driver description, but you can change it to
something simpler or to distinguish between two devices
using the same device driver.
e. Configure the Connection, Offsets and Driver Setup
options.
4. Save your configuration (FILE-SAVE).

HYPACK® SUB- When you are configuring HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM devices (not
BOTTOM DEVICE multibeam or side scan), the Functions list in the Survey Devices
FUNCTIONS AND tab shows types of data the selected driver can collect. Select the
OPTIONS driver in the tree view and check the data types that you want to
record with the selected driver. For example, a GPS unit, may be
used to get the position, calculate speed and heading. With RTK
capability, the GPS driver can also calculate tide information.
• Position tells the driver to accept the designated position
messages and convert them to X-Y coordinates, using the
datum transformation and projection parameters as given in the
GEODETIC PARAMETERS program.
SURVEY tags position records with POS in the raw files.
• Heading tells the SURVEY program to store heading data.

2- 86 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

SURVEY tags heading records with GYR in the raw files.

BEWARE! If you have a gyro, the SURVEY program will use that as
the primary orientation information. In this case, you should not
also select for GPS heading as this would cause SURVEY to
switch between gyro and GPS orientation as each device updates,
and your vessel will ‘twitch’ on screen.
• Speed tells the SURVEY program to use the speed information
from the VTG message for the vessel speed. The GPS speed
is much smoother and more accurate than the speed the
SURVEY program will calculate.
SURVEY tags speed records with SPD in the raw files.
Tip: We recommend that you use the speed from your GPS
antenna.
• Tide is available for tide gauge drivers. If you check this box,
the program will store water level corrections from a tide gauge.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM does not support real-time RTK
tides.
• Heave records motion data. Drivers with this function may
record heave only, pitch and roll, or heave, pitch and roll data.
SURVEY tags these records with HCP in the raw files.
• Record Raw Messages enables you to record the data string,
as it is read from the device, into your raw files.
SURVEY tags raw messages records with MSG (single beam),
RMB (multibeam) or RSS (side scan) in the raw files.
• Record Device Specific Messages records data strings as
described in the driver. It allows us to customize output strings
for our users where necessary.
SURVEY tags these records in the raw files using unique tags
determined in the device driver.
• Generate Output Messages: The driver constructs and sends
messages out the designated port.Paper Annotation:
Annotates each event on the sounder’s paper roll or digital
echogram. SURVEY tags these records in the raw files using
FIX tags.

The Options settings allow you to optionally record or annotate (or

both) the Raw and Quality measurements from certain types of
survey equipment. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM records all of the
final information for all sensors. It always records the calculated
position for GPS updates, the raw depth information received from
echosounders, the gyro heading from gyros, etc.
• Use for Matrix Update is only available for echosounders and
magnetometers. If this option is checked, data from this device
is used to fill the matrix file in HYPACK® SURVEY. If you have
more than one depth device in your setup, check this box for
only one of them.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 87

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

• The Paper Annotation selection is only applicable to

echosounders with annotation capability. Checking this will
enable echosounders with this capability to mark significant
events during the survey.
• Record Raw Data: When this box is checked for a GPS
device, the program will also record the WGS-84 latitude/
longitude/ellipsoid height along with the position record. This
enables you to recalculate positions or RTK tides in post-
processing should you collect data with erroneous settings.
• Record Quality Data allows you to record quality information
obtained from different devices.

CONFIGURING The Connect information tells the SURVEY program the device
CONNECTIONS location and communication parameters.
FOR HYPACK® 1. Select the device in the tree view and open the Survey
SUB-BOTTOM Connect tab.
DEVICES FIGURE 93. Survey Connect Tab

2. Check the Enabled option.

3. Specify the device connection type for this device.
a. Click [...]. The Device Connection dialog appears.

2- 88 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

FIGURE 94. Device Connection Dialog

b. Select the connection type. The default settings

corresponding to the selected type are displayed below the
selection.
c. Enter the port settings or data file you are simulating. If
the default settings are not accurate, they may be edited.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM uses the same serial (COM1:
through COM50:) and parallel (LPT1: through LPT4:)
drivers utilized by the Windows® operating systems.
• The Serial connections (Parity, Flow Control, Baud,
Data Bits, Stop Bits and Flow Control) must be set to
match your equipment or SURVEY will not read the
device data.
FIGURE 95. Serial Connect Options

• Network Connections: Network devices are becoming

more common. Echosounders with network
connections are advantageous in that full scan
information can be recorded instead of only the depths.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 89

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

FIGURE 96. Network Connect Options

Protocol: Choose between TCPIP, which passes data

between two specific computers or UDP, which
broadcasts to all computers on the local network
Role: Only valid for TCPIP protocol, it depends the
configuration in the echosounder. You can check your
sounder’s user manual for that information but, the
majority of the time, the sounder will be the Server so
you should configure HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to be
the Client.
Host: This is the IP address of your sounder. Your
sounder should be set to read the IP address of your
survey computer.
Port: The port number is set for each device. It is the
port from which HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM is to read
data. (Odom devices use 1601. Reson devices use
1998.)
Write Port is only required for the UDP protocol. It is
the port at which HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM should
respond to this device.
• Parallel Connections: The port number is the only
setting required for parallel connections.
• No Connection (None): Analog devices are frequently
found on dredges to measure rotation. They interface
with your survey computer through an Analog to Digital
(A/D) card specific for the kind of input: 4-20mA, 0-
5VDC, 0-10VDC, or -5 to +5VDC
d. Click [OK].
4. Set any of the remaining options where they are
applicable:
• The Limit Update Rate To option is the time interval (in
milliseconds) that the SURVEY program requests
information from the device. The default value is 10, but
you can modify the amount of information passed between
the device driver to the SURVEY program through this
setting.

2- 90 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

A millisecond is 1/1000th of a second. If your echosounder

is updating 20 times per second and you specify an update
frequency of 100 milliseconds, the device driver will only
pass the last depth received to the SURVEY program 10
times per second, based on the update frequency setting.
Tip: Drivers that have “Generate Output Messages”
capability default to 100 msec.. A limit of 500 msec. will be
appropriate for the purposes served by most of these
drivers.
All devices in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM operate on a “Last
Only” basis. This means if a new piece of information
arrives at the device driver before it has delivered the last
update, it deletes the earlier information and holds only the
last measurements. If you want to get every bit of
information received from a particular device, make sure
the update frequency is quicker than the update rate of the
equipment.
• Recording Rate is the rate (in seconds) at which records
values for the device when logging. The default rate is 10
msec.
• Device Initialization Script sends user-supplied
configuration information to certain echosounders. The
information is sent at the start of HYPACK® SURVEY to
restore the device to exact settings.

TESTING SERIAL 1. Make sure the equipment is turned on and actually sending
COMMUNICATION information. This can be confirmed by attaching a serial LED
WITH WCOM32 line tester to the end of your cable. The Receive Data light
should be flashing (changing state from red to green) at each
measurement transmission. If there are no lights flashing, your
equipment is not transmitting or your cable is grossly wrong. A
serial LED line tester is a great piece of equipment that can be
picked up inexpensively at an electronics store.
2. If you have verified the equipment is transmitting, try to
display or record the data in the WCOM32 program.
HYPACK has included a shareware program (courtesy of
Comtrol Corp., the manufacturer of Rocketport serial cards) in
your HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM install to make this recording
process really easy. Here's how it works.
a. Launch the Wcom32 program by selecting OPTIONS-
WCOM32 in the HARDWARE window. The WCom32
dialog will appear.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 91

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

FIGURE 97. Connect-Data Window

b. Select PORT-OPEN PORT and select the port from which

you want to capture data.
FIGURE 98. Selecting the Port

c. Select SETTINGS-PORT SETTINGS and select settings

that match those of your device.
FIGURE 99. Port Settings

d. Repeat the steps 3 and 4 for each device from which you
would like to record data.

2- 92 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

e. Select PORT-SAVE TO DISK and wait about a minute. The

data is now recording to files on your hard drive.
f. Select PORT-SAVE TO DISK again (deselecting this
option) to end the recording process.
g. Rename your saved data files by device name. Use
Windows® Explorer to go to the \HYPACK Sub-
bottom\Support\Com directory. The files that you have just
recorded are named KOMx.txt where x is the port number
from which the data was recorded. You can see that a data
file named for the port rather than the device would soon be
mixed up with all of the others that are named in the same
way. This will avoid that problem.

NOTE This is also the procedure to use if you have

questions or problems regarding your data and or
Technical Support asks you to send us some sample
data.

3. If you are successful in reading the messages in the WCOM32

program, test each device in the HARDWARE program. This
checks that you are using the correct device driver and whether
the communication settings have been properly set.
a. Start the HARDWARE program.
b. Test your first device by right-clicking on the device in
the configuration list and selecting “Test”, The
HARDWARE program will launch the TEST program with a
sample device window for that device.
To suspend the display updates to allow you to view it
more easily, select TEST-PAUSE ALL. Repeat the same
selection to resume scrolling.
To terminate the test select TEST-STOP ALL.. If you are
unsuccessful at this point, you probably have the wrong
device driver specified in the library entry. Contact
HYPACK, and ask for Technical Support.
FIGURE 100. Launching the Interface Test for all equipment from the
HARDWARE Program

c. Repeat the test process for each device. When all test
correctly individually, go on to the next step.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 93

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

NOTE: Once the Test program is open, you can test

remaining devices from within the Test program by
selecting TEST- DeviceName.

d. Test all of the survey devices at once. This determines if

there are hardware conflicts between serial ports. In the
TEST program, select TEST-TEST ALL. A device window
will appear for each device.
If every device is being properly interfaced, you are ready to enter
the HYPACK® SURVEY program.
If all of your devices work when testing them individually, but do not
work when testing them together, you have a problem with your
serial communication hardware. Contact Technical Support at
HYPACK, Inc. for assistance.

TESTING If you are using a network connection, you can test your settings to
NETWORK which you are connecting:
COMMUNICATION FIGURE 101. Network Test Dialog
FOR ALL
NETWORK
DEVICES

• For TCP/IP connections, click [Ping Device]. If the

designated address is found, the status reads ‘Ping OK’. If not,
it says ‘Time out waiting for a reply’.

NOTE: If you leave the address at the default 127.0.0.1, you

ping your own computer and the status message tells
you it is not a remote address.

• For UDP connections, click [UDP Connect] to attempt to

read incoming data from the UDP port. If the connection is
successful, the status field continuously updates the number of
messages and their size. Each message display in the field at
the bottom, though it will not be text you can read.

2- 94 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

TESTING 1. Install the Wireshark Program. The 32-bit and 64-bit installer
NETWORK DEVICE packages for the Wireshark program can be found in your
CONNECTIONS \HYPACK 2014\Support\Utilities\Wireshark folder.
USING 2. Open Wireshark to find the home page.
WIRESHARK 3. List the available network connections from which
to capture data. Click the List Available Interfaces
icon.
4. Choose the network connection from which you would like
to view network packets and click [Start].
5. Enter the port setting in the Filter field using the following
format:
Udp.port == PortNumber. (For example, Udp.port == 5656”
displays the device attached to port number 5656.) The field
turns green to indicate a valid input string.
6. Click [Apply]. The data from that port scrolls through the
Wireshark display.

NOTE: You must see packets displayed for HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM to receive data.

FIGURE 102. Wireshark with Streaming Data

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 95

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

To view the contents of any packet, select it in the list then check
the display at the bottom of the dialog.

OFFSETS AND LATENCY IN HARDWARE

The vessel origin is the reference by which you position your
devices and tracking point on your vessel. The tracking point and
each sensor is referenced to the origin based on the distance in
survey units it is starboard (X-direction), forward (Y-direction) and
vertically (Z-direction). Vertical offsets are measured from the static
water line, and are always positive downward.

The offsets for a device on the towfish is measured from the cable
anchoring point on the towfish.

Hull-mounted SBP systems: Enter the horizontal offsets for the

SBP relative to the GPS, and the vertical offset relative to the static
waterline.
Surface-towed SBP systems get calculated positioning from the
Towfish device driver (Towfish.dll). Enter the offsets from the GPS
to the A-frame attachment point as the A-Frame Offsets in the
Towfish device driver setup, and set the Catenary Factor to 1 for
surface towed SBP systems. The Cable Out value, from the A-
frame attachment point to the SBP Common Midpoint, is input in
the Towfish Device Window in SURVEY.

MEASURING The position of everything on a mobile is determined by applying

HARDWARE their offsets to the mobile heading and origin position. For the most
OFFSETS accurate data collection, it is important to measure as accurately
as possible.
Location Mea- Position measurements are the distances, measured in survey
surements: units, starboard, forward and vertically from your boat origin to your
device.
• The Starboard and Forward offsets: Use positive numbers for
positions forward and starboard of the origin and negative
numbers for devices aft and port of the origin.

IMPORTANT! Mobiles that are positioned relative to another

mobile (eg. towfish and dredge hopper arms) are
exceptions to this rule. Reverse the signs for offsets
entered in the Offsets tab; do not reverse the signs for
offsets entered in the Driver Setup. Enter offsets in either
location, not both.

2- 96 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

• The Vertical offset is the distance below the static waterline of

the vessel. Enter the antenna height above the water line as a
negative value. The distance from the waterline to the
transducer head will be positive.
Tip: To view an overhead display of the boat shape and a
rear view of a generic vessel, overlaid with the device
positions, select the mobile in the tree view and open the
Vessel Shape tab. The devices in your configuration are listed
in the order they are entered in the configuration and their
device numbers are positioned in the boat shape according to
their offset settings.

SPECIFYING When you have carefully measured your position offsets, enter
OFFSETS IN your measurements for each in the Offsets tab of HARDWARE.
HARDWARE 1. Open HARDWARE.
2. For each device, do the following:
a. Add the device to the appropriate mobile in your
configuration.
b. Select the device in the tree view.
c. Click the Offsets tab.
d. Enter your position offsets and close HARDWARE.

NOTES:
Take care that the offsets are correct. There is no way to
correct them for the SEG-Y data in the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR.
Do not apply latency during acquisition; it may negatively
effect your SEG-Y data. Latency is applied during post-
processing in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR.

3. Save your configuration (FILE-SAVE).

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 97

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Sub-bottom Profiling Systems in HARDWARE

The following example shows a simple sub-bottom configuration:

FIGURE 103. Sample Sub-Bottom Configuration

• The boat origin has been positioned directly below the GPS at
the level of the static water line.
• The tracking point, used by HYPACK® SURVEY to position
your vessel in the world, is positioned over the sub-bottom
profiler. This assists the helmsman in keeping the profiler over
the survey line and bases all logging calculations such as start
and end line, alarms, etc on the profiler position.
FIGURE 104. Tracking Point Coordinates in the Mobile Tab

• The GPS antenna is directly above the boat origin so the port
and forward offsets are zero. The vertical offset is the distance
above the waterline. This value is negative because, in
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, the Z axis is positive downward
from the waterline.

2- 98 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

FIGURE 105. Sample GPS Offsets

• The profiler is starboard and aft of the origin so the starboard

offset is positive and the forward offset is negative.

SYSTEM SETTINGS IN HARDWARE

To access the System settings select “Hardware” in the tree
view. In Sub-bottom surveys, the only setting you may need is the
Synchronize the Computer Clock option.
All devices must use the same time basis—the computer Veritime
or UTC time. If any device sends UTC time-stamped data, you
must synchronize your computer clock with UTC time using the
1PPS box or the NMEA ZDA message.
If you synchronize the clock, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM adjusts
the Veritime clock speed to match the UTC time based on the time
in the ZDA message from the GPS.
For example, if you are using inertial positioning that outputs time-
stamped data, you must synchronize the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM Veritime clock to the UTC time from the inertial system
by selecting the inertial system name in the Synchronize Computer
Clock area.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 99

Configuring your Hardware • Sample Sub-bottom HARDWARE Configuration

FIGURE 106. Hardware System Settings

SAMPLE SUB-BOTTOM HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

The following example shows a dual sub-bottom configuration:
FIGURE 107. HARDWARE Configuration with Hull-mounted and Towed Sub-
bottom Profilers

In this example, one sub-bottom profiling system is installed on the

boat mobile and a second sub-bottom profiling system is surface
towed on the second mobile. Both systems are configured with the
subbot device driver, and you just select the model of your sub-
bottom profiler (SBP) in the driver Setup dialog.

2- 100 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

FIGURE 108. Hardware Configuration—Choose the SBP Model in the Subbot

Driver Setup Dialog

Hull-mounted SBP systems use a GPS for positioning. Enter the

horizontal offsets for the SBP relative to the GPS, and the vertical
offset relative to the static waterline.
Surface-towed SBP systems get positioning calculated using the
Towfish device driver (Towfish.dll). Enter the offsets from the GPS
to the A-frame attachment point as the A-Frame Offsets in the
Towfish device driver setup, and set the Catenary Factor to 1 for
surface towed SBP systems. The cable out value, from the A-
frame attachment point to the SBP Common Midpoint, is input in
the Towfish Device Window in SURVEY.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 101

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Analog Devices

FIGURE 109. Towfish Driver Setup—HARDWARE (left) and SURVEY (right)

CONFIGURING ANALOG DEVICES

For analog systems, connect a National Instruments NI USB-6221
A/D box to the survey computer to acquire the data. HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM has a single program, the Analog Monitor, which
talks directly to the NI USB device and acts as an intermediary
between it and the HYPACK® SURVEY drivers. Digital systems do
not use this program.

NOTE: HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM supports other National

Instrument A/D cards with analog output for internal
triggering. For dual channel profilers, an output FIFO size of
greater than 8000 samples/channel is required. Single
channel systems require 4000 samples/channel.
Other Analog A/D cards with external triggering require
analog output.

The NI USB device (I/O ports, voltage levels, etc.) configuration

occurs in the Analog Monitor; therefore, the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM drivers need very minimal setup themselves. By default,

2- 102 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

the first analog SBP device is allocated to Channel 1. For the

second SBP, select the “Use Channel 2” option under its Subbot
driver setup dialog.
When SURVEY starts, the drivers automatically start the Analog
Monitor. From there, you can access the dialogs to configure the
input/output channels and triggers.
FIGURE 110. Input/Output Configuration in the Analog Monitor—The Analog
Monitor (left) and I/O Configuration (right)

1. Configure the Input/Output. Click [I/O Channels] on the

Analog Monitor to access the dialog. For each field, configure
the channel on the NI USB device to which the signal is wired.
Each of the Channels can be assigned a custom label or name
applicable to the SBP system in use (i.e., “Sparker Signal”).

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 103

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Analog Devices

FIGURE 111. Input/Output Configuration in the Analog Monitor—The Analog

Monitor (left) and I/O Configuration (right)

2. Configure the triggers. Click [Trigger Configuration] on the

Analog Monitor to access the dialog which provides advanced
options on setting the SBP triggering configurations.
FIGURE 112. Trigger Configuration

Any configuration problems will be reported as a bright red

message at the bottom of the Analog Monitor. Signal traces are
displayed for diagnostic purposes and to insure that the trigger

2- 104 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

signal is being received. (Click the labels to cycle through the

channels.)
At this point, if the wiring and Analog Monitor configuration is
correct, you should be able to start SURVEY, see data coming in
on the correct signal traces, and view the Ping Number field on the
Analog Monitor steadily increasing. The scrolling data window in
SURVEY will also display the sub-bottom profiling data.

ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

1. In the Analog Monitor window, click [I/O Channels].
2. Check the Sub-bottom option to pass the data to the subbot
driver.
3. For each field, configure the channel on the NI USB device
to which the signal is wired.
• Custom Labels: (Optional) Assign a name applicable to
the SBP system in use (i.e., “Sparker Signal”).
• Trigger voltage generally use the default levels of -5V/+5V.

TABLE 4. Recommended Signal Voltage Levels

System Type Recommendation

Pinger/Chirp In the -5V/+5V and -2V/+5V range
depending on the age of the system
Hydrophone Arrays In the -1V/+1V to -5V/+5V volt range
for Boomers/ depending on the sensitivity of array, the
Sparkers/etc. gain on the hydrophone preamp and the
reflectivity of the seabed.
Channel 1 and/or 2 voltage levels can be considered as a
•
“base gain” for the channel. It is important not to clip the
incoming signals as these clipped data cannot be
recovered.
Tip: Rule of Thumb: Set the voltage range about one third higher
than the actual input signal voltage.

ANALOG TRIGGER CONFIGURATION

The trigger threshold should be set just above the base voltage; it
-->

is displayed as a red line in the Analog Monitor. Each time the

trigger signal crosses this line, a ping is logged.
• Trigger Mode: Various Trigger Mode options are available to
suit most applications and four options are provided.
• External: Triggers originate from outside HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM and the Analog Monitor only listens for signals.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 105

Configuring your Hardware • Configuring Analog Devices

• Internal creates only one sub-bottom trigger from the NI

USB box.
• SS Divisible: Side-scan is the primary trigger, sub-bottom
Channel 1 is the divisible.
• SB Divisible: Two channels of sub-bottom, sub-bottom
Channel 2 is the divisible.
• Trigger Interval: The rate (in milliseconds) that the sub-bottom
will fire if it is the primary system.
• Trigger Delay: The time delay (in milliseconds) to wait before
firing the sub-bottom system.
• Sweep: The length of time (in milliseconds) that the sub-bottom
receiver listens for the return acoustic signal.
• Sweep Delay: The length of time (in milliseconds) to wait after
the sub-bottom system has fired before starting to listen for the
return acoustic signal. This feature can be used in deeper
water to reduce the length of the water column in the data.
• SS Divisor: How to divide the side-scan trigger if sub-bottom
channel 1 is the secondary system.
• SB Divisor: How to divide the primary trigger if sub-bottom
channel 2 is the secondary system. If the primary trigger
interval is set to 250 ms and the SB Divisor set to 2, the
resultant Channel 2 trigger interval will be 500 ms.
As an example, the general rules of thumb for configuring the
triggers and sweep length for various sub-bottom profilers, in a
maximum water depth of 30 meters, appear in the following table.

NOTE: To convert from meters to milliseconds, divide by 0.75.

TABLE 5. General rules for setting the sweep length based for different
expected acoustic penetration for a selection of sub-bottom profilers.

Max. Water Depth Plus Sweep

System Trigger Interval Sweep Setting
Expected Penetration Calculation
30 m depth plus 15 m
Pinger/Chirp 250 ms 40 ms + 20 ms 60 ms
penetration
30 m depth plus 30 m
Boomer 500 ms 40 ms + 40 ms 80 ms
penetration
30 m depth plus 40 m
Sparker 500 ms to 1 s 40 ms + 53 ms 93 ms
penetration
30 m depth plus 50 m
Mini-Airgun 1 s to 2 s 40 ms + 67 ms 107 ms
penetration

2- 106 Preparation
Configuring your Hardware

NOTE: It is a good idea to set the sweep value to a bit more than is
calculated to allow a safety margin for unknown seabed
conditions.

These advanced trigger configuration features enable you to

acquire two different sub-bottom profiling (SBP) systems
simultaneously with no acoustic interference between the systems.
You can tell if there will be any acoustic interference between the
systems, if the blue sweep lines overlap vertically, in the graphic at
the top of the dialog. When there is no overlap, the result will be
two interference-free datasets.
In the following figure, the SBP System 1 is triggered every 250 ms
with sweep length of 70 ms (±53 m). The SBP System 1 trigger
divided by 2 gives a SBP System a trigger interval of 500 ms with a
85 ms trigger delay and a 150 ms sweep length.
FIGURE 113. Sample Trigger Configuration for Dual Channel Sub-bottom
Profiling Acquisition.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 107

Matrix Files (*MTX) in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Creating a Matrix File with the Matrix Editor

MATRIX FILES (*MTX) IN HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

Matrix files (*MTX) are gridded rectangular areas. You can fill the
cells with depth information from your sub-bottom profiler in real
time during data collection, or in post-processing.
Empty matrix files are typically created in the MATRIX EDITOR
and saved to the project folder.

More Information
• “Matrix Files in SURVEY” on page 3-51

CREATING A MATRIX FILE WITH THE MATRIX EDITOR

1. Load the files that define your survey area (ex. background
files or planned line files). Right-click on background files or
planned line files at the lower left and select Add File and follow
the prompts to select your file. You may choose to zoom-in or –
out to adjust the size of the area to fit your screen.
2. Open the Matrix Editor by selecting PREPARATION-
EDITORS-MATRIX. A default Matrix will be drawn to the screen
and defined in the Matrix Editor dialog.
FIGURE 114. The Matrix Editor

2- 108 Preparation
Matrix Files (*MTX) in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

3. Position and size the Matrix File to cover your survey area.
• With the cursor, drag the corners in the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM map window.
• To move the matrix file, click and drag the circled
corner.
• To rotate the matrix file, click and drag the square
corner opposite the circled corner.
• To change the length of your matrix area, click and
drag the first square corner counter-clockwise from the
circled corner.
• To change the width of your matrix area, click and
drag the first square corner clockwise from the circled
corner.
• In the MATRIX EDITOR, edit the length, width and rotation
information displayed.
The X-Y coordinates represent the position of the circled
corner of the matrix file. All other information is relative to
that point.
As you enter each change in the MATRIX EDITOR, the
drawing in the Area Map updates accordingly.
4. Define the cell length and width to set the size of the
individual cells inside the matrix. The number of cells and
approximate memory required for this matrix is displayed in the
status bar.
Tip: To see the specified cell size relative to your other chart
files, select EDIT-DRAW CELL OUTLINES. The matrix grid
draws in the matrix preview in the HYPACK® SURVEY Map.
5. Choose the Type of matrix.
For sub-bottom surveys, choose the Hypack type.
6. Save your matrix file by selecting FILE-SAVE. You will be
asked to name your file. It will be saved to your project directory
with the MTX extension and will be enabled in your project. You
now have an empty (unfilled) matrix!

MATRIX FILE BACKUPS IN HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

You can quickly and easily make a backup copy of your filled
matrix file and include it in your Project Items list. HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM automatically names the backup copy by appending the
date and time to the original matrix file name: FileName
yyyy.mm.dd hh.mm.ss.mtx.
This enables you to maintain a series of backup matrix files over
time. You can compare files to see changes from one time to
another.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 109

Matrix Files (*MTX) in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Editing an Existing Matrix File

1. Select one or more matrix files in the Project Items list.

2. Right-click on the selection and select Backup MTX Files
from the menu.
FIGURE 115. Two Matrix Files Backed up at 3:06 on August 20, 2014

EDITING AN EXISTING MATRIX FILE

You can make changes to an existing Matrix file in the MATRIX
EDITOR. The changes can be saved to the original file name
(overwriting it), or saved to a new file name.
1. Load the Matrix file to the MATRIX EDITOR. You can do this
by:
• Double-clicking on the file name in the Project Files List.
• Selecting FILE-OPEN from the MATRIX EDITOR menu and
selecting the file you want to change.
2. Edit the matrix file. you can click and drag the corners to
move, rotate or resize the matrix. You can also go to the
MATRIX EDITOR and change cell dimensions as well as the
positioning of the matrix area. The changes are reflected in the
area map as they are entered.
BEWARE! If you edit a “filled” matrix file, it will lose its depth content.
3. When you are satisfied, save your file.
• To overwrite the original matrix information with a new,
empty matrix, select FILE-SAVE.
• To create a new, empty matrix, select FILE-SAVE AS and
name your file.
The HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen display will reflect your
work.

2- 110 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

TARGETS IN HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

Targets mark points of interest in your project area. To that end,
each target must at least include a name and the XY position, but it
can also include a lot of other metadata according to the project
and the technology used and the program in which you mark your
target. Targets marked in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR
includes depth and depth of burial.
You can create targets in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM interface
or in the TARGET EDITOR then display them in the SURVEY
program. This enables you to navigate to predetermined locations
or away from areas dangerous for navigation. You can also mark
targets at points of interest in SURVEY and in post-processing and
save them to the project target list. The TARGET EDITOR displays
all information about each target in one window and enables you to
modify target properties and attributes where appropriate.

FIGURE 116. Sample TARGET EDITOR Display

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 111

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Marking Targets with your Cursor in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

A target group is a list of individual targets, which allows you to

enable and disable all targets in the group in one operation (in
much the same way catalogs facilitate data files).
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically creates several default
groups in the Project Items list named according to the program in
which the member targets were created. You can also create
target groups to suit your needs. Targets can be members of more
than one group.

Each project maintains a target database (targets.db) in the

project folder. The HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM shell, SURVEY and
SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR all read and write target information
to this database. The database model currently supports a lengthy
list of target properties and attributes. Each program reads and
writes only the properties and attributes they need.

More Information
• “Targets in SURVEY” on page 3-42
• “Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR” on page 4-44

MARKING TARGETS WITH YOUR CURSOR IN HYPACK®

SUB-BOTTOM
You can use the cursor, in Target Editor mode, to mark targets in
the Map window. For each click, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM marks
a target in the map and saves it in the Shell target group in the
Project Items list. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically names
targets using consecutive numbers, but you can rename them in
the TARGET EDITOR.
1. If you have files that define your survey area (ex.
background files or planned line files), load them.
2. In the Map View tools, click the Add Target icon.
The cursor changes to a triangle beside crosshairs.
3. Click in the Map window (with the cross hairs part
of the cursor) at each target location. For each
click, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM marks a target in the map and
saves it to the Shell group.

TARGET DISPLAY OPTIONS

The Targets tab in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel
affects the display in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM area map. The

2- 112 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

Target Parameters in SURVEY provide the default target display

options in SURVEY. These settings are applied universally to all
targets enabled in your map windows.
For options that affect only select targets, use the right-click menu
or TARGET EDITOR to modify the target properties.

ZOOM EXTENTS ON TARGETS IN HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
You can use the right-click menu to zoom in on an individual target,
on the enabled targets in a select group or on all of the project
targets:
1. In the Project Items list, right-click on the target item on
which you want to zoom.

Targets to Zoom Right-click Location

Individual target Target
Target group Target group
All project targets Target folder
2. Select Zoom Extents.

TARGET EDITOR
The TARGET EDITOR is the interface where you can create, view
and edit your target information.
To open the TARGET EDITOR, use any of the following methods:
• Select PREPARATION-EDITORS-TARGET EDITOR.
• Right-click on the Targets folder in the Project Items list and
select Open Target Editor.
• Right-click on a target in the Project Items list and select Edit
Target.
• Double-click on a target in the Project Items list.
It presents your target properties and attributes in two tabs: Details
and Spreadsheet.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 113

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • TARGET EDITOR

DETAILS TAB
The Details tab lists all of the targets in your project. Most viewing
and editing can be done in this tab.
• Choose a sort method: date, survey line, name or group.
Click on the link above the tree listing until you reach your
preferred sort option.
• Enable and disable targets or target groups using the check
boxes. You may also use these selections to display only
selected targets from the spreadsheet menu. The Export
Checked options in the File menu limit target reports and target
exports.
• View and edit target properties. When you select a target in
the tree, its properties appear in the tab. Only select fields can
be modified in Edit Target Mode.

FIGURE 117. Sample Details Tab

2- 114 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

SPREADSHEET TAB
The Spreadsheet tab enables you to see each of your targets and
their properties in one row of a table. In this view, you can see the
properties of multiple targets at once.
You can configure the TARGET EDITOR Spreadsheet using
common Windows® spreadsheet operations:
• Sort the spreadsheet based on any attribute in ascending or
descending order by clicking on the column heading.
• Resize the columns. Click and drag the right-hand edge of
each column heading.
• Reorder the columns. Click and drag the column heading.
• Enable and disable targets. Click the target number.
• Display only enabled targets (SPREADSHEET-SHOW
CHECKED) or all project targets (SPREADSHEET-SHOW
ALL).
• Choose the displayed properties by selecting and
deselecting them in the Columns menu. A Select dialog
enables you to more easily configure multiple columns:
Items available are listed on the left, while items selected are
listed to the right. Select items in either column then use the
[Add=>] and [<=Remove] to include or omit them from your
spreadsheet display.

NOTE: The list of items available is maintained in alphabetical

order. The list of items selected shows the order that the
columns will be displayed in the spreadsheet. Normally,
they will be listed in the order that they are selected. To
reorder the selected items, use the cursor to drag and
drop items in the list.

Tip: Use the Default button for your project type to

automatically configure the spreadsheet to display the target
name, position and the attributes specific to the project type.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 115

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • TARGET EDITOR

FIGURE 118. Select Dialog—Classic Defaults

FIGURE 119. Select Dialog Defaults—Sub-Bottom

2- 116 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

FIGURE 120. Sample Spreadsheet View

CREATING TARGETS IN THE TARGET EDITOR

When you know the coordinates of your target positions, you can
create targets by entering target names and positions in the
TARGET EDITOR:
1. Open the TARGET EDITOR. Select PREPARATION-
EDITORS-TARGET EDITOR.
2. Select FILE-ADD TARGET (or click the Add icon).
The Add Target dialog appears.
FIGURE 121. Add Target Dialog

3. Select your preferred units with which to enter the

position: X/Y, Local Latitude/Longitude, or WGS-84 Latitude/
Longitude.
4. If you have chosen one of the Latitude/Longitude options,
set your preferred input format.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 117

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • TARGET EDITOR

5. Enter your target name and position coordinates.

6. Click [Add]. The TARGET EDITOR saves the target to the
Default group.

TARGET PROPERTIES
Properties Target Properties can apply to all targets, regardless of where or
how you generate them.

TABLE 6. Target Properties

Property Definition Editable?

Name Target Name Yes
Date Acquired Date and time the target was originally No
generated.
Date Modified Date and time the target was last edited. No
WGS-84 Latitude and Current target position. Automatically updates if Yes
Longitude you change X,Y.
X, Y Current target position. Automatically updates if Yes
you change Lat/Lon.
Depth Water depth at target location. Yes
Event If the target is marked during SURVEY, this is the Yes
latest event number. Otherwise, this value will be
0.
Survey File/Line Name Survey line file on which the target is marked Yes
during SURVEY.
Source Program in which you mark the target or No
“imported”.
Notes User-defined memo regarding target position. Yes
User notes entered in the Target Properties
dialog in SURVEY, in TARGETING AND
MOSAICKING during targeting, or in TARGET
VIEWER.
Symbol S57 chart display symbol that can be displayed Yes
at target locations. The symbols are set in the
TARGET EDITOR or through the right-click
menu from the Project Items list. Overridden by
Display Method = 1 (Alarm)
Rotation Clockwise symbol rotation. Yes
Attributes Target attributes are generally only pertinent to the source
program. For example, circles, alarm, transparency is only
supported in HYPACK® SURVEY, but not in main HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM Map window.

2- 118 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

TABLE 7. Target Attributes

Attribute Definition Editable?

Distance Distance from the current target position. Yes
SURVEY displays the target at the position
calculated using Distance and Bearing
properties, with a dotted line back to the original
location. You can relocate all targets based on
these attributes in the TARGET EDITOR.
Bearing Direction the target is offset by the Distance Yes.
property value.
Code In
development
Quality Confidence Code for Target Classification. Yes
Otherwise, value is always ‘0’.
Orientation The angle of the alarm flag from the target when Yes
displaying it in SURVEY. Applicable only when
Display Method = 1 (Alarm)
Circle Radius Radius of the first circle around the target (and Yes
distance from there to any subsequent circles)
when you select the Circle Target Display option
in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel
Applicable only when Display Method = 0 (Circle)
Number of Circles Number of concentric circles around the target Yes
when you select the Circle Target Display
Method in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control
Panel. Applicable only when Display Method = 0
(Circle)
Towfish Heading Towfish Heading when the target was marked. Yes
Display Method In the HYPACK® SURVEY Map window. 0 = Yes
Circle or 1 = Alarm.
Depth of Burial Isopach depth. Generated in the SUB-BOTTOM Yes
PROCESSOR.
Transparency Percent opaqueness. (0 = transparent, 100 fully Yes
opaque)

EDITING TARGET PROPERTIES

In the TARGET EDITOR, when you are in Edit Mode, you can edit
or add target properties and attributes in either the Tree or
Spreadsheet tab. The program automatically saves your changes
when you close the dialog.
Set Edit Mode in the Spreadsheet menu. The Edit Mode item
toggles the mode on and off.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 119

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • TARGET EDITOR

Target attributes are generally only pertinent to the source

program. For example, circles, alarm, transparency is only
supported in HYPACK® SURVEY, but not in the main HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM Map window.
Tip: The Recent Symbols menu provides the ten most recently
used S57 symbols. Those you commonly use are more readily
available than in the full list of the Display tab and are also
accessible from the Spreadsheet.

A right-click menu from the Project Items list also accesses a

routine specifically for assigning S57 symbols to a select target.

EDITING TARGET 1. Right-click on a target in the Project Items list and select
PROPERTIES IN Edit Target. The TARGET EDITOR appears with the target
THE DETAILS TAB information displayed.
2. Select SPREADSHEET and be sure the Edit Mode is
checked.
3. Return to the Details tab.
4. Select (highlight) the target you want to edit. The properties
for the selected target are displayed on the right side of the
TARGET EDITOR.
5. Modify the target properties as needed.
6. Add any other applicable attributes as needed:
a. Click [+] and select the required attribute. The selected
attribute appears in the Other Attributes list.
b. Enter the attribute value.
7. Close the dialog.

EDITING TARGET In the Spreadsheet tab, you can edit properties for individual
PROPERTIES IN targets, as you can in the Details tab. (Just find the row for the
THE target and change the property value in the appropriate column.)
SPREADSHEET You can also apply the same property to multiple targets at once:
TAB 1. Open the Target Editor. Select EDITORS-TARGET EDITOR.
2. Select SPREADSHEET and be sure the Edit Mode is
checked.
3. Limit your Spreadsheet display to the targets you want to
modify:
a. In the Details tab, check all targets to which you want to
enter the same property.
b. In the Spreadsheet tab, select SPREADSHEET-SHOW
CHECKED.
4. Enter the new property at the top of the column (eg. the
target symbol).

2- 120 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

5. Multiselect the column and click the Fill

Selection icon. The property value of the first
selected cell gets copied to the remaining
selected cells. It is not applied to targets that are
not displayed.
6. Close the dialog.

ASSIGNING S57 You can assign an S57 display symbol to any target in HYPACK®
DISPLAY SUB-BOTTOM, in the TARGET EDITOR or from Project Items list.
SYMBOLS FROM The symbol appears at the target location together with the circles
THE PROJECT or alarm flags designated in the Control Panel settings.
ITEMS LIST 1. Access the Target Symbol dialog.
• In the Project Items list, right-click on the target to which
you want to assign the symbol and select Assign Display
Symbol.
• In the Spreadsheet tab of the TARGET EDITOR, right-
click on the target name in the spreadsheet and select Edit
Symbol.
FIGURE 122. Target Symbol Dialog

2. Use the Symbol drop-down to select your S57 symbol.

3. Enter the rotation. (Optional) The number of degrees to rotate
the symbol clock-wise.
4. Preview the results, (Optional) Click [Apply].
FIGURE 123. Sample S57 Target Symbols

5. Click [OK].

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 121

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • TARGET EDITOR

To remove the S57 Symbol, do the following:

1. Right-click in the Project Items list on the target to which
you want to assign the symbol and select Assign Display
Symbol. The Target Symbol dialog appears.
2. Click [Clear]. The symbol disappears in the dialog.
3. Preview the results. (Optional) Click [Apply].
4. Click [OK]. The HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM displays remove
the symbol and the map window restores the default target
symbol.

OFFSETTING TARGETS IN THE TARGET EDITOR

In the TARGET EDITOR, you can create additional targets at user-
defined positions relative to existing targets.
1. In the TARGET EDITOR, select one or more targets in the
tree view.
Tip: To multiselect files, hold the Ctrl key and select multiple
individual records or hold the Shift key and click on the first and
last records in a range of consecutive records.
2. Right-click and select Offset Selected Targets. The Offset
Point Dialog appears.
FIGURE 124. Offsets Point Dialog

3. Enter the distance and bearing, at which you want the new
targets generated relative to the selected targets and click
[OK].
FIGURE 125. The Resulting Targets in the TARGET EDITOR

2- 122 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

4. Name your new targets. Enter a Name attribute in the

TARGET EDITOR.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM assigns the new targets to the Default
target group
FIGURE 126. Resulting Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

DELETING TARGETS IN THE TARGET EDITOR

IMPORTANT! There is a critical difference between removing and

deleting targets:
Removing a target omits it from the current group listing,
but the target remains in the project. If it has no assigned
group, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically assigns it to
the Default group.
Deleting a target removes it from your project and from
your hard drive. It no longer exists.

• From the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface, right-click in

the Project Items list on the target you want to delete and select
Delete Target.
• From the TARGET EDITOR, select the target you
want to delete in the Details tab and click the Delete
icon.

IMPORTING AND EXPORTING TARGET DATA TO THE

TARGET EDITOR
When you open a project with legacy TGT format target files from
earlier HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM versions, HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM automatically converts each TGT file to a target group.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 123

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Importing and Exporting Target Data to the TARGET EDITOR

In addition, you can import or export target information in the

Project Items list using either a simple text (*.TXT) file or the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM target file (*.TGT) format, respectively.

NOTE: This procedure was designed to import HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM TGT files from earlier projects. For this reason, it
only supports select target properties (not target attributes).

More Information
• “Target Properties” on page 2-118
• “Target Reports” on page 2-128

IMPORTING TEXT FILES TO THE TARGET EDITOR

The Target Import dialog enables you to extract data from ASCII
text files and use it to populate the fields of the TARGET EDITOR.
Each line (or record) in the text file must contain the data for one
target and present the data in the same order.
1. In the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM File List, right-click on the
target group to which you want to import the targets and
select Import Targets: *.TXT FILE. The Target Import dialog
appears where you configure the import.
FIGURE 127. Target Import Dialog

2. Select and order the fields used to create your new target
file.

2- 124 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

a.Place a check in the box for each field in your text file
you want to use to populate the line file
b. Use the cursor to drag the fields into the order that they
appear in your file.
• To skip a field in the string, check ‘Ignore’ and drag it to
the position of the field to be skipped in the list. If you need
more than one Ignore field, click [Add Ignore Field] to
generate as many as you need.
3. Choose the correct delimited format. The program supports
comma, tab and space delimiters.
4. Load the text file. Click [Load File], select your file and click
[Open]. In the Lines area, you will see your targets as they
appear in your file and you can see the syntax of the records.
5. Check the syntax of your file against the field list.
(Optional) This process verifies that your configuration settings
are compatible with the text file you have loaded.
a. Select a line from the Lines area. (Optional) The default is
the first line in your input file.
b. Click [Check Syntax]. A message window will appear to
tell you how many records of the total number can be
converted using your current settings. If you don’t get the
expected results, adjust your configuration and check the
syntax again.

NOTE: Alternatively, you may need to adjust the structure of

your text file and restart the entire process.

6. Click [Convert] A message window appears to tell you how

many records have been converted.
7. Click [Exit]. The Import dialog closes and the target group is
populated with the data from the text file.

EXPORTING TEXT FILES FROM THE TARGET EDITOR

You can generate a user-configured text file which may then be
imported to a text editor or spreadsheet programs. You can export
all targets in the project or only selected targets. The output file is
stored, by default to the project folder.
1. Configure your Spreadsheet tab with the data you want to
export.
a. Select the data using the Columns menu or dialog.
b. Order the columns. Drag the spreadsheet headings.
c. Select the targets you want to export:
i. Select SPREADSHEET-SHOW ALL.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 125

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Importing and Exporting Target Data to the TARGET EDITOR

Click the target number to select or deselect targets

ii.
until only the targets for export are checked.
iii. Select SPREADSHEET-SHOW CHECKED.
2. Select FILE-SPREADSHEET EXPORT. A File Save dialog
appears.
3. Choose a location, name your file and click [Save]. The
exported file is saved, by default, to the project folder with a
CSV extension.
FIGURE 128. Sample Output File:

455473.70,4942631.39,0.00,"Man Overboard"
455216.00,4943428.67,0.00,"Red Buoy"
454113.00,4945510.67,0.00,"Green Buoy"

TARGET DATABASE COMPARISONS

The Difference routine compares the target database (targets.db)
from the current project with a second target database. For
example, you can compare targets in your project between your
survey and office computers, or historical and current target data.
The routine compares the targets by name, position or both.
Each target (row) is color-coded based on how it compares to
those in the project targets:

TABLE 8. Target Comparison Color-coding

Color Comparison Results

Red Missing (No match in the project targets.)
Green Match
Yellow Partial match: When comparing both name and
position, only one of the two criteria matches.

2- 126 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

FIGURE 129. Initial Comparison—Project Targets.db (left) and Second

Targets.db in the Difference Dialog

You can then, optionally, import targets from the second file based
on how they compare to the first. The imported targets are copied
to the Default target group.

NOTE: The second target database remains unchanged.

1. Configure the columns in the Spreadsheet tab. The same

columns appear in the comparison results.
2. Click the Difference icon. The Import Target File
dialog appears.
3. Select the second target database and click [Open].
The Difference window appears listing the targets in the second
database.
4. Set your comparison criteria:
• Compare: Positions, Name or both.
• Tolerance: When comparing positions, if targets are within
the specified distance (survey units), it is considered a
match.
The color-coding updates accordingly.
5. Import select targets to the project targets database.
(Optional)
a. Set the import criteria:

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 127

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Target Reports

• Accept Misses Only imports only the red rows. (Red

rows update to green and yellow rows remain yellow.)
• Accept Partial Matches imports the red and yellow
rows. (All rows become green.)
• Accept All imports all targets from the second
database regardless of comparison results. Green rows
create targets in the Default target group that duplicate
targets already in another target group. (All rows
become green.)
b. Click the Import icon. The Default target group
receives the imported targets and the color-codes
in the Difference display update.
FIGURE 130. The Project Targets.db—Before Importing the Missing Targets
(left) and After (center and right)

6. Close the Difference window to return to the TARGET

EDITOR.

TARGET REPORTS
The TARGET EDITOR generates a report in rich text format
(*.RTF) that presents the data about each target in an easy-to-read
form, one page per target. The output file is stored, by default to
the project folder.

The TARGET EDITOR and TARGETING AND MOSAICKING

generate a report in rich text format (*.RTF) that presents the data

2- 128 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

about each target in an easy-to-read form, one page per target.

The output file is stored, by default to the project folder.
1. Choose your targets to export:
• To export select targets, check the targets or groups you
want to export and select FILE-EXPORT CHECKED TO
RTF.
• To export all targets, select FILE-EXPORT ALL TO RTF.
2. Name your file and click [Save]. The report is saved, by
default, to your project folder.
FIGURE 131. Sample Target Report

MANAGING TARGETS AND TARGET GROUPS

A target group is a list of individual targets, which allows you to
enable and disable all targets in the group in one operation (in
much the same way catalogs facilitate data files).
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically creates several default
groups in the Project Items list named according to the program in

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 129

Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Managing Targets and Target Groups

which the member targets were created. You can also create
target groups to suit your needs. Targets can be members of more
than one group.

NOTE: The Project Items list displays empty groups, but the
TARGET EDITOR displays only populated groups.

FIGURE 132. Sample Target Groups

ADDING TARGET GROUPS

1. Open the Create New Target Group dialog.
• From the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface, right-click
on Targets in the Project Items list and select Add Group.
• From the Target Editor, select FILE-ADD GROUP.
FIGURE 133. Create New Target Group

2. Enter the name for your new group and click [OK]. Your
new target group appears under Targets in the Project Items list
when you close the TARGET EDITOR. It appears in the Details
tab of the TARGET EDITOR only when you add a target to the
group.

ADDING TARGETS TO TARGET GROUPS

When you first mark a target, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM stores it in
the default group according to the program in which you marked it.
However, targets can be members of multiple groups, if you wish.

2- 130 Preparation
Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

You can copy one or more targets from their current group to
another as follows:
1. Select one or more targets in the Details tab.
Tip: To multiselect files, hold the Ctrl key and select multiple
individual records or hold the Shift key and click on the first and
last records in a range of consecutive records.
2. Right-click on the selection and select Add to Group then
the name of the group to which you want to copy the
selected targets.
FIGURE 134. Adding Selected Targets to a Target Group

REMOVING TARGET GROUPS

When you remove a target group, the targets in the selected group
remain and become part of the Default target group.
• From the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Interface, right-click in
the Project Items list on the target group you want to remove
and select Remove Target Group.
• From the TARGET EDITOR, select one or more groups to
remove in the Details tab and select FILE-REMOVE GROUP.
Tip: To multiselect files, hold the Ctrl key and select multiple
individual groups or hold the Shift key and click on the first and
last group in a range of consecutive groups.

REMOVING TARGETS FROM TARGET GROUPS

In the TARGET EDITOR, you can remove select targets from one
or more groups:

IMPORTANT! There is a critical difference between removing and

deleting targets:
Removing a target omits it from the current group listing,
but the target remains in the project. If it has no assigned

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 131

Plotting Sheets (*.PLT) • Creating Plotting Sheets in the Plotting Sheet Editor

group, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically assigns it to

the Default group.
Deleting a target removes it from your project and from
your hard drive. It no longer exists.

1. Select one or more targets in the Details tab.

2. Right-click on your selection and select the appropriate
Remove option:
• Remove from Group omits the selected target from the
group in which you have selected it. If it resides in another
group, it remains there.
• Remove from All Groups omits the selected target from all
groups and moves it to the Default group.

RENAMING TARGET GROUPS

1. From the TARGET EDITOR, select the group you want to
remove in the Details tab.
2. Select FILE-RENAME GROUP. A dialog appears with the
current group name.
3. Enter the new name and click [OK].

PLOTTING SHEETS (*.PLT)

Plotting Sheet files (*.PLT) contain origin coordinates, scale,
rotation, and sheet dimensions for plotting on smooth sheets.
These files are typically created in the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR
and saved with the PLT extension to your project file. They are
primarily used by HYPLOT to define the plot area.

More Information
• “HYPLOT” on page 5-1

CREATING PLOTTING SHEETS IN THE PLOTTING SHEET

EDITOR
1. Load the files that define your survey area (ex. background
files or Planned Line Files). Right-click on background files or
Planned Line Files at the lower left and select Add File and

2- 132 Preparation
Plotting Sheets (*.PLT)

follow the prompts to select your file. You may choose to zoom-
in or –out to adjust the size of the area to fit your screen.
2. Open the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR by selecting
PREPARATION-EDITORS-PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR.
3. Open a new Plotting File by selecting FILE-NEW. The
PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR is open and displays, behind it, a
Plotting file on a blank grid or with your background file if you
have opened one. The Plotting file is defined by pink lines to
indicate it is only in memory. When the file has been saved, the
lines will change color according to the settings in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel.
4. Set your input units. You can enter either X,Y or Lat./Lon..
Select EDIT-UNITS to toggle from one unit to the other.
5. If you want to position the file with your cursor, set the
sizing method. In the Edit menu, the sizing option can be
toggled between Scale or Length/Width.
• Scale (ft/in on foot grids or m/m on metric grids) maintains
the scale ratio between the length and width of the plotting
sheet.
• Length/Width (inches on foot grids and cm on metric grids)
enables you to resize the length and width of the plotting
sheet independently of each other.
6. Position and size the Plotting File. You may position the
Plotting file and resize it to cover your survey area.
• With the cursor:
• Click and drag the circled corner to move the plotting
file.
• Click and drag the square corner opposite the circled
corner to rotate the plotting file.
• Click and drag corners adjacent to the circled corner to
change the length and width of your plotting area.

NOTE: If you selected the ‘Scale’ sizing method, the border

will maintain the specified length:width ratio.
Otherwise, you can scale length and width
independently.

• Edit the information in the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR.

• The X-Y or Lat./Long. coordinates represent the
position of the circled corner of the plotting file.
• All other information is relative to that point.
Any changes you have made will be reflected in the screen
when you click [Enter].

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 133

Plotting Sheets (*.PLT) • Editing an Existing Plotting Sheet File in the Plotting Sheet Editor

NOTE: Most standard MS Windows® printers will not print to

the very edge of a piece of paper. You probably need
to account for this margin. The size of the margin is
printer-dependent. Check the printer’s manual.
Also, you must leave space for any border you plan to
add in HYPLOT.

7. Save your Plotting Sheet file by selecting FILE-SAVE and

naming your file. It will be saved with the extension .PLT to your
project directory and displayed in the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM Area Map .
FIGURE 135. The PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR

EDITING AN EXISTING PLOTTING SHEET FILE IN THE

PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR
You can make changes to an existing Plotting file in the PLOTTING
SHEET EDITOR. The changes can be saved to the original file
name (overwriting it), or saved to a new file name. The procedure
is very simple.

2- 134 Preparation
Plotting Sheets (*.PLT)

1. Load the plotting sheet file to the PLOTTING SHEET

EDITOR. You can do this by:
• Double-clicking on the file name in the Project Files list.
• Selecting FILE-OPEN from the PLOTTING SHEET
EDITOR menu and selecting the file you want to change.
2. Edit the plotting sheet file, you can click and drag the corners
to move, rotate or resize the plotting area. You can also use the
PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR to change the Scale, Sheet
Dimensions and the positioning of the plotting area. Convert
your coordinates from XY to Lat Long (or vice versa) by
selecting EDIT-UNITS. You will automatically see your results
displayed on the screen.

NOTE: If you are editing a PLT file that has had additional display
settings saved to it in HYPLOT, the display settings will
remain. However, if you are making the sheet smaller, be
mindful of the placement of your non-data items (for
example, the north arrow, ruler, color bar...). Objects near
the top or left edge of a larger plot may disappear out of
range of the smaller plotting sheet size. You will have to
retrieve them by repositioning them in the HYPLOT Control
Panel.

3. When you are satisfied, save your file. Click on either FILE-
SAVE or FILE-SAVE AS. If you select SAVE, it will overwrite
the original size, scale and rotation information. If you use
SAVE AS, it will ask you for a new file name and create a new
plotting file using that name.
The plotting sheet display in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
window will show only the plotting sheet border.
In HYPLOT, the non-data items remain positioned relative to the
lower left corner of the PLT.

GENERATING PLOTTING SHEET LAYOUT GRAPHICS

When you plot your data, it is often helpful to know where your
plotting sheet fits in the context of the surrounding area. This may
be particularly helpful if you are plotting a small portion of a large
project area.
A plotting sheet layout graphic is a bitmap screen capture of the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM area map that highlights the selected,
active plotting sheet file.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 135

Boat Shape Editor • Generating Plotting Sheet Layout Graphics

FIGURE 136. Sample Plotting Sheet Layout Bitmaps

To generate a Plotting Sheet Layout graphic:

1. Setup your HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Map display as you
want it to appear in the graphic.
• Enable one or more PLT files.
• Enable other project and data files you want to include.
• Set other view options in the control panel, by selecting a
scheme or both.
2. In the Project Files list, right-click on the enabled PLT file
that should be highlighted in the resulting graphic and
select ‘Sheet Layout Block’. The graphic is automatically
named FileName_SheetLayout.bmp and saved to the project
folder.

BOAT SHAPE EDITOR

The BOAT SHAPE EDITOR is used to create a custom, true-to-
scale boat shape that matches your survey or dredge vessel. Boat
shapes include at least a polygon defining the perimeter of your
vessel. It may include structural features and anchor attachment
points.
Boat shape files (*.SHP) are saved, by default, to the \HYPACK
Sub-bottom\Boat Shapes folder. You may then load a boat shape
to represent each mobile displayed in the Map windows of
SURVEY, HYSWEEP® SURVEY or DREDGEPACK® to show real
time boat position, and use the Anchor Manager to display your
anchor positions when you drop, raise and transport them.

2- 136 Preparation
Boat Shape Editor

CREATING A BOAT SHAPE

In the BOAT SHAPE EDITOR, you draw your boat shape in the
design area. You describe the boat shape using XY coordinates, in
survey units, relative to the boat origin. This is the same origin from
which you offset your devices in the HARDWARE program. A solid
circle represents the origin in the design area.
• In Manual Mode, type the offset coordinates in the
spreadsheets provided: Boat Points, Anchor Points and
Drawing Objects.
• In Mouse Mode, use the drawing tools and click in the design
area to define the boat shape perimeter and features.
The Snap to Grid feature shifts each point to the nearest grid
intersection.
1. Establish an origin point on your vessel.
2. Open the BOAT SHAPE EDITOR by clicking PREPARATION-
EDITORS-BOAT SHAPE EDITOR.
3. Click on FILE-NEW SHAPE to indicate that you are creating a
new boat shape (or FILE-OPEN SHAPE to load a boat shape
that you want to modify).
4. Set your display options.
• Check which items you want to see drawn in the BOAT
SHAPE EDITOR.
• Show Devices shows a list of hardware devices in the
upper left corner of the drawing area.
• Show Offsets draws devices and tracking point in
position on the boat shape according to the listing in the
Survey32.ini.
• Show Anchor Points draws an "X" at each anchor
point.
• Show Drawing Objects draws the lines described in
the Drawing Objects spreadsheet.
• Set your grid options. (Optional) Using a grid is not
required, but it is much easier to create a vessel with the
correct dimensions.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 137

Boat Shape Editor • Creating a Boat Shape

FIGURE 137. BOAT SHAPE EDITOR Grid Options

•Show Grid implements the grid display in the design

window. If you check ‘Snap to Grid’ in the editor toolbar,
all points that you define with your cursor while drawing
your boat shape will automatically shift to the nearest
grid line.
• Grid Increment sets the distance represented by each
grid line.
• Grid Style determines whether the grid is drawn with
lines or only marks where line intersections would
occur.
5. Describe your boat shape.
• In Manual Mode: In the Boat Shape spreadsheet, enter the
coordinates defining the perimeter of the boat shape
relative to the boat origin.
• In Mouse Mode: Click the boat tool and, using the origin
and the grid to guide you, click around the outline of your
vessel. The horizontal offset coordinates of those points (in
survey units) relative to the origin appear in the Boat Points
list on the left. The program will automatically close your
boat shape back to the first point in the list.
FIGURE 138. Drawing Tools—(left to right) Boat, Anchor, Drawing and Box
Tools

6. Enter your anchor points. (Optional)

• In Manual Mode: In the Anchor Points spreadsheet, enter
the coordinates defining the offsets relative to the boat
origin for each anchor attachment point.
• In Mouse Mode: Click the anchor tool then click on the
boat shape at the anchor locations. The horizontal offset
coordinates of those points, relative to your vessel origin,
appear in the Anchor Points list on the left.
You can enter up to nine anchor locations for your boat.

2- 138 Preparation
Boat Shape Editor

7. Describe any drawing objects. (Optional) Drawing objects

describe objects inside the perimeter of the vessel for visual
effect only. The programs do not take them into account for any
calculations. Each drawing object is comprised of the start and
end points, and the radius. The start and end points are
expressed as offsets relative to your vessel origin. Radius
measurements create arcs between the points. Radius values
can be positive or negative to arc right or left respectively, but
the absolute value should be greater than half the distance
between the end points.
Tip: Use the Box tool to draw the four segments of a user-defined
rectangle in one operation.
• In Manual Mode: In the Drawing Object spreadsheet, enter
the coordinates defining the end points and arc of each line
segment in your object.
• In Mouse Mode: Use the drawing object tool to click and
drag each line segment in your object then enter the radius
in the spreadsheet in the Mouse Mode tab.
8. When you are finished, save your file. You may do either of
the following to save your file, by default, to the boat shapes
directory:
• To save a HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM boat shape file,
click on FILE-SAVE SHAPE and name your file. It is saved
with an SHP extension.
• To save your shape in a format that may also be
opened in CAD, select FILE-EXPORT TO DXF.

MODIFYING AN EXISTING BOAT SHAPE

It’s simple to modify your boat shape in the BOAT SHAPE
EDITOR. At any time, you can do any of the following:
• Edit any of the coordinates that describe the vessel outline,
anchors or drawing objects.
• Change the location of the vessel origin.
• Rescale the vessel to a different size.

MODIFYING OBJECT COORDINATES IN YOUR BOAT

SHAPE
You may need to change one or more coordinate pairs in your boat
shape for any of the following reasons:
• To change the vessel outline
• To relocate an anchor

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 139

Boat Shape Editor • Modifying an Existing Boat Shape

• To change the size, shape or location of a drawing object

There are two methods to relocate select coordinates that describe
your vessel.
Relocating Coor- 1. Click the tool appropriate for the object you want to
dinates Using change.
your Cursor 2. In the design area, drag the object to a its new location.
The coordinates will update accordingly.
3. Save your boat shape file. Select FILE-SAVE SHAPE and
name your shape in the dialog provided.
Relocating Coor- 1. Select the coordinates in the object list.
dinates in the 2. Edit them in the spreadsheet at the lower left. The drawing
Spreadsheet in the design area will update accordingly.
3. Save your boat shape file. Select FILE-SAVE SHAPE and
name your shape in the dialog provided.
Adding a Point in 1. Select the boat tool.
your Boat Shape 2. Right-click on the coordinate pair preceding where you
Outline need the new point and select ‘Insert Point’. A point is
added mid-way between the selected point and the next
existing coordinate pair.
Tip: The selected point is displayed in blue in the design area. You
can determine which side of a selected point the new one will be
drawn by clicking two consecutive points and observing where they
are located relative to each other.
3. Edit the coordinates to position the new point as required
for your boat shape.
4. Save your boat shape file. Select FILE-SAVE SHAPE and
name your shape in the dialog provided.
Deleting Points in You can delete any point in your boat shape—in boat points, in
the Boat Shape drawing objects or anchor points—through the right-click menu in
the Mouse Mode tab:
1. Open the Mouse Mode tab.
2. Expand the area of the tree where you want to delete
points.
3. Right-click on the point you want to delete and select the
Delete Point option. The drawing in the design area updates
accordingly.

RELOCATING THE VESSEL ORIGIN IN YOUR BOAT

SHAPE
If you have an existing boat shape file, but the origin on which it is
based, is not the origin of your hardware configuration, you could
draw a new boat shape file, but there’s an easier solution. You can

2- 140 Preparation
Boat Shape Editor

redefine the position of the origin in your shape file and the BOAT
SHAPE EDITOR updates all the offset coordinates accordingly.

NOTE This does not affect your hardware configuration.

1. Select OPTIONS-SET ORIGIN POINT. The cursor, held over

the drawing area, appears as two concentric circles.
2. In the drawing area, click at the new origin position. The
origin marker will move to the click position and all coordinates
listed on the left will update accordingly.
3. Save your boat shape file. Select FILE-SAVE SHAPE and
name your shape in the dialog provided.

SCALING YOUR BOAT SHAPE IN THE BOAT SHAPE

EDITOR
You can uniformly increase or decrease the size of your boat
shape by multiplying all offsets and radii by the same number. You
could do this by manually editing each set of coordinates and radii
individually, but there’s a much easier way.
1. Select OPTIONS-SCALE BOAT SHAPE.
2. Enter a value by which the coordinates should be
multiplied. For example, to double the size of the boat shape,
enter 2.
3. Click [OK]. The coordinates and radii will be multiplied and the
drawing in the design area will update accordingly.
4. Save your boat shape file. Select FILE-SAVE SHAPE and
name your shape in the dialog provided.

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 141

Plotting Sheets (*.PLT) • Creating Plotting Sheets in the Plotting Sheet Editor

PLOTTING SHEETS (*.PLT)

Plotting Sheet files (*.PLT) contain origin coordinates, scale,
rotation, and sheet dimensions for plotting on smooth sheets.
These files are typically created in the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR
and saved with the PLT extension to your project file. They are
primarily used by HYPLOT to define the plot area.

More Information
• “HYPLOT” on page 2-1

CREATING PLOTTING SHEETS IN THE PLOTTING SHEET

EDITOR
1. Load the files that define your survey area (ex. background
files or Planned Line Files). Right-click on background files or
Planned Line Files at the lower left and select Add File and
follow the prompts to select your file. You may choose to zoom-
in or –out to adjust the size of the area to fit your screen.
2. Open the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR by selecting
PREPARATION-EDITORS-PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR.
3. Open a new Plotting File by selecting FILE-NEW. The
PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR is open and displays, behind it, a
Plotting file on a blank grid or with your background file if you
have opened one. The Plotting file is defined by pink lines to
indicate it is only in memory. When the file has been saved, the
lines will change color according to the settings in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel.
4. Set your input units. You can enter either X,Y or Lat./Lon..
Select EDIT-UNITS to toggle from one unit to the other.
5. If you want to position the file with your cursor, set the
sizing method. In the Edit menu, the sizing option can be
toggled between Scale or Length/Width.
• Scale (ft/in on foot grids or m/m on metric grids) maintains
the scale ratio between the length and width of the plotting
sheet.
• Length/Width (inches on foot grids and cm on metric grids)
enables you to resize the length and width of the plotting
sheet independently of each other.
6. Position and size the Plotting File. You may position the
Plotting file and resize it to cover your survey area.

2- 142
Plotting Sheets (*.PLT)

• With the cursor:

• Click and drag the circled corner to move the plotting
file.
• Click and drag the square corner opposite the circled
corner to rotate the plotting file.
• Click and drag corners adjacent to the circled corner to
change the length and width of your plotting area.

NOTE: If you selected the ‘Scale’ sizing method, the border

will maintain the specified length:width ratio.
Otherwise, you can scale length and width
independently.

• Edit the information in the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR.

• The X-Y or Lat./Long. coordinates represent the
position of the circled corner of the plotting file.
• All other information is relative to that point.
Any changes you have made will be reflected in the screen
when you click [Enter].

NOTE: Most standard MS Windows® printers will not print to

the very edge of a piece of paper. You probably need
to account for this margin. The size of the margin is
printer-dependent. Check the printer’s manual.
Also, you must leave space for any border you plan to
add in HYPLOT.

7. Save your Plotting Sheet file by selecting FILE-SAVE and

naming your file. It will be saved with the extension .PLT to your
project directory and displayed in the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM Area Map .

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 143

Plotting Sheets (*.PLT) • Editing an Existing Plotting Sheet File in the Plotting Sheet Editor

FIGURE 1. The PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR

EDITING AN EXISTING PLOTTING SHEET FILE IN THE

PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR
You can make changes to an existing Plotting file in the PLOTTING
SHEET EDITOR. The changes can be saved to the original file
name (overwriting it), or saved to a new file name. The procedure
is very simple.
1. Load the plotting sheet file to the PLOTTING SHEET
EDITOR. You can do this by:
• Double-clicking on the file name in the Project Files list.
• Selecting FILE-OPEN from the PLOTTING SHEET
EDITOR menu and selecting the file you want to change.
2. Edit the plotting sheet file, you can click and drag the corners
to move, rotate or resize the plotting area. You can also use the
PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR to change the Scale, Sheet
Dimensions and the positioning of the plotting area. Convert
your coordinates from XY to Lat Long (or vice versa) by
selecting EDIT-UNITS. You will automatically see your results
displayed on the screen.

2- 144
Plotting Sheets (*.PLT)

NOTE: If you are editing a PLT file that has had additional display
settings saved to it in HYPLOT, the display settings will
remain. However, if you are making the sheet smaller, be
mindful of the placement of your non-data items (for
example, the north arrow, ruler, color bar...). Objects near
the top or left edge of a larger plot may disappear out of
range of the smaller plotting sheet size. You will have to
retrieve them by repositioning them in the HYPLOT Control
Panel.

3. When you are satisfied, save your file. Click on either FILE-
SAVE or FILE-SAVE AS. If you select SAVE, it will overwrite
the original size, scale and rotation information. If you use
SAVE AS, it will ask you for a new file name and create a new
plotting file using that name.
The plotting sheet display in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
window will show only the plotting sheet border.
In HYPLOT, the non-data items remain positioned relative to the
lower left corner of the PLT.

GENERATING PLOTTING SHEET LAYOUT GRAPHICS

When you plot your data, it is often helpful to know where your
plotting sheet fits in the context of the surrounding area. This may
be particularly helpful if you are plotting a small portion of a large
project area.
A plotting sheet layout graphic is a bitmap screen capture of the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM area map that highlights the selected,
active plotting sheet file.
FIGURE 2. Sample Plotting Sheet Layout Bitmaps

Last Updated May / 2017 2- 145

Plotting Sheets (*.PLT) • Generating Plotting Sheet Layout Graphics

To generate a Plotting Sheet Layout graphic:

1. Setup your HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Map display as you
want it to appear in the graphic.
• Enable one or more PLT files.
• Enable other project and data files you want to include.
• Set other view options in the control panel, by selecting a
scheme or both.
2. In the Project Files list, right-click on the enabled PLT file
that should be highlighted in the resulting graphic and
select ‘Sheet Layout Block’. The graphic is automatically
named FileName_SheetLayout.bmp and saved to the project
folder.

2- 146
CHAPTER 3 Survey

The Survey section primarily describes configuring and logging

data with the SURVEY program. Additionally, it provides
information about the optional SURVEY DATA TRANSFER and
SURVEY LOG programs that may be run simultaneously with
SURVEY.

HYPACK® SURVEY
FIGURE 1. Program Interface

To launch HYPACK® SURVEY, select SURVEY-HYPACK®

SURVEY or click the icon.

Last Updated May / 2017 3-1

HYPACK® SURVEY • Windows in SURVEY

Tip: Smart Launch Survey icon in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

toolbar launches one or more survey programs according to your
current hardware configuration:
• Single beam, sub-bottom or magnetometer configurations
launch only HYPACK® SURVEY.
• Multibeam configurations, including those with side scan
sonar, launch HYPACK® SURVEY and HYSWEEP® SURVEY.
• Side scan configurations launch HYPACK® SURVEY and
SIDE SCAN SURVEY.
The HYPACK® SURVEY program loads the information from the
current project. The program reads geodetic information and
hardware information from the project initialization files. It loads the
most recently used planned survey line file (*.LNW) from the
current project, as well as any background files and matrix files that
are currently ‘Enabled’.
HYPACK® SURVEY functions can be executed through the
menus in the shell, the (optional) toolbar, or through keyboard
shortcuts.
FIGURE 2. HYPACK® SURVEY Toolbar

The toolbar is a row of icons that duplicate the function of several

of the menu selections. To determine each icon's function, hold the
cursor over the icon and a tool tip will appear.

WINDOWS IN SURVEY
The SURVEY display is comprised of the ‘shell’, with a menu bar
and toolbars, as well as your choice of several independently-
displayed and configured windows:
• Area Map:This is a plan view of your project area. It displays
any enabled project files along with the position of the vessels
and their track lines.
• Left-Right Indicator: Shows the position of the boat relative to
the current planned line segment.
• Data Display: Shows real-time, textual information regarding
your survey.
• Device Windows: Each device driver has an independent
window that displays information relative to that device.
• GPS Graphs: Graphical displays of various GPS-related data.
• The Comment window stores your input to the project log.

3- 2 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

To generate additional window displays, select WINDOW-NEW

and select the type of window you want.
SURVEYcan display multiple windows of each type, each
independently configurable through its menus. Multiple windows of
the same type are distinguished by numbers, both on their title bars
and in the Window Manager.
You may reposition and size all windows, in one or more monitors,
using the Window Manager or using the cursor to drag the title bars
and window edges. You can lock them in place by selecting
WINDOW-FREEZE WINDOWS. WINDOW-THAW WINDOWS
allows you to again size and position all windows.
Once you have configured, sized and placed the windows on the
screen, the SURVEY program remembers and restores them to
the same status and location each time you start the SURVEY
program.

FIGURE 3. The SURVEY Program Showing the Map, Scrolling Data & Left/Right
Indicator windows

Bang Pulse Signal Amplitude

Window
SBP Controls

Scrolling Data Window

Sediment Layers
Seabed First Multiple

AREA MAP IN SURVEY

The Area Map window contains a plan view of your survey area
that includes all files active in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM when you

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 3

HYPACK® SURVEY • Windows in SURVEY

start SURVEY and a symbol representing each mobile in your

hardware configuration.
FIGURE 4. A Sample Area Map

Sounding colors are determined by the project’s color settings. The

position of the survey boat is updated on the Area Map at an
interval defined by the GPS Update Frequency in the HARDWARE
program.
Each area map includes the standard zoom and pan controls:

NOTES: The Range setting in the Area Map toolbar enables you to
set the zoom at any of a series of preset zoom scales.

A tracking setting other than "No Tracking" overrides the

effect of the pan tool.

When you exit the SURVEY program, it records the status of the
items in the Area Map and restores the same configuration when
you re-start the program.

LEFT-RIGHT INDICATOR
The Left-Right Indicator window only appears when you have
planned lines loaded into the SURVEY program. It shows the
position of the main vessel relative to the planned survey line, as
well as certain information of particular interest to the helmsman:

3- 4 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

TABLE 1. Left-Right Indicator Statistics

Logging
Status Display
Logging Distance and Timea to the end of the current survey
line.
Not Distance and Time* to the start of the next survey
Logging line.
Always Logging status, uncorrected depth and tide
a. Times are calculated based on distance and current speed.

Additional, displays can be loaded by selecting WINDOW-NEW-

LR INDICATOR.
FIGURE 5. The Left-Right Indicator

Configuring the You can display the cross track error using either of two scales,
Scale and expand and contract the either scale to suit your purposes.
To choose the type of scale, select or deselect the Logarithmic
Scale option in the Options menu.
To contract the scale:
• Click ‘Contract’ on the menu bar.
• Use Ctrl-C (Contract) from the keyboard.
To expand the scale:
• Click ‘Expand’ on the menu bar.
• Use Ctrl-V (Expand) from the keyboard.

NOTE These keyboard commands only work with the focus on the
Left-Right Indicator window.

Configuring the The cross track error label is a real-time display of the distance off
XTE Label line. The font and float properties can be configured to meet the
needs of different operators.
To modify the font, select OPTIONS-FONT in the indicator menu.
The Windows® Font Dialog appears for you to make your

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 5

HYPACK® SURVEY • Windows in SURVEY

adjustments. Only the font, style and size apply. These settings
override the current scheme until you exit SURVEY.
The label can float above the pointer in the indicator or remain
centered over the graphical display.
To toggle the float setting, select and deselect the OPTIONS-
FLOATING TEXT menu option.
Setting the XTE SURVEY alerts you that your vessel is too far off the currently
Alarm Distance selected survey line. You can decide the distance at which you will
be alerted.
To set a “Cross Track Error Alarm” distance:
• Drag the tab indexes in the left–right indicator window. The
tab indexes are small gray bars, equidistant from center on the
indicator scale.
• Set the XTE limit in the Navigation Parameters dialog (in
the Options menu).
When this setting is changed, all other Cross Track Error displays
update accordingly.
When the boat travels outside this range, the frame around the
cross track label turns either red (planned line is to starboard) or
green (planned line is to port), and the ‘XTE’ alarm appears in the
shell. This has no effect on the data logging; it is only a visual
alarm to the helm to steer toward the survey line.

DATA DISPLAY WINDOW IN SURVEY

The Data Display window shows textual information about the
survey.

3- 6 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 6. The Data Display Window

When you first start the SURVEY program, the display does not
contain any items. Use the menu in the Data Display window to
configure the Data Display. You can select the items to display, the
font of the displayed items, or change the style of the display.
Once the Data Display has been configured, the SURVEY program
will restore the items and font in the same way, when the program
is re-started.
STYLE-STAY ON TOP assures the Data Display window remains
visible even when it overlaps with another window.

DEVICE WINDOWS IN SURVEY

Each device you have selected in the HARDWARE program will
generate it’s own window. The device driver, not the SURVEY
program, controls the content of each window. This means that the
information for different devices will vary according to the device
type and model.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 7

HYPACK® SURVEY • Windows in SURVEY

FIGURE 7. GPS.dll Device Window

You can also adjust the scale of the display by resizing the window
itself and often by using the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.

Apply Offsets is available only for the HPR and Depth Device
Windows. Check this option to correct the graphed values using no
real-time lever-arm calculations.

COMMENTS IN SURVEY
The Comment window stores your input to the project log.
FIGURE 8. Sample Comments Window

3- 8 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

Enter your notes in the field at the top. Each time you press your
Enter key, your comment drops down to the display in the lower
part of the window and a copy is stored to the project log. In the
single beam and HYSWEEP® editors, you can refer to these
comments during the editing process.

ALARMS IN SURVEY
Alarm windows are located along the bottom of the SURVEY
screen. They are used to denote error conditions to the operator.
When the criteria are met, the alarm window turns red and the
Windows® exclamation alarm sounds. You can turn off the audio
alarm by pressing the Escape key. This will also change the alarm
boxes to yellow until the reason for the alarm has been corrected.
The SURVEY program can generate the following alarms:

TABLE 2. Survey Alarm

Alarm Text Displayed Reason Documented

Track Error XTE Generated when the tracking point Trace Filea
is outside the limit set in the
Navigation Parameters dialog or
the Left-Right Indicator
Time Out Time Out Generated when a device has not Survey Log
reported an update within the last
5 seconds.
Minimum Depth Min Depth Generated when the measured Survey Log
depth drops below the value
defined in the Navigation
Parameters dialog
Maximum Depth Max Depth Generated when the measured Survey Log
depth is greater than the value
defined in the Navigation
Parameters dialog
Heave Drift Drift = Current If the heave value differs from the Survey Log
Drift Value average of the last 100 heave
readings by more than the “Alarm
Threshold” set in the Vessel
Setup.
a. The Trace file is named RAW date.txt (eg RAW0927.txt) and saved in your project folder. It contains basic
information about which files you are using as you survey, as well as data about events, targets, logging, etc.
You can read it with any text editor.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 9

HYPACK® SURVEY • Windows in SURVEY

CONFIGURING YOUR WINDOW DISPLAY WITH THE

WINDOW MANAGER
The Window Manager may be used to arrange your survey
windows in one or more monitors.
1. Access the Window Manager by selecting WINDOW-
WINDOW MANAGER in the SURVEY shell. The Window
Manager will appear with a list of your current Survey windows.
Multiple windows of the same type are distinguished by
numbers, both on their title bars and in the Window Manager.
FIGURE 9. Window Manager

2. Choose the windows to view.

a. Select one or more windows in the list.
b. Click [Minimize], [Hide] or [Restore].
• [Minimize] closes the selected window and positions a
restore button at the bottom of the screen.
• [Hide] closes the selected window. It can only be
restored through the Window Manager.
• [Restore] reopens the selected window in your display.
3. If you have multiple monitors, assign windows to each
monitor. (Optional) The monitor numbers designated in the
Windows® display settings populate the Monitor drop-down
list.
a. Select the monitor window to configure.
b. Select the windows for the selected monitor.
4. Position the windows in the monitor.
a. Select the windows for the selected monitor.
b. Click [Tile] or [Cascade].

3- 10 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

• [Tile]: SURVEY attempts to arrange the selected

windows optimally on the screen.
• [Cascade] arranges all of the windows, diagonally offset
from each other, in the upper-left corner of your screen.
5. Save your configuration. (Optional) Click [Save Cfg] and
name your window configuration. At any time, you can return to
this layout by clicking [Restore Cfg] and selecting the file. This
is handy to quickly switch between multiple configurations or to
return to a “user-defined default” after you have rearranged the
windows.
6. Click [Exit] and manually make any final adjustments to
window size and positioning.

SHARED MEMORY PROGRAMS

The Shared Memory programs enable you to display and export
information from the SURVEY program. These programs were
developed to enable you to write powerful interface drivers for
application programs without interfering with the SURVEY
program. These programs can be launched from the OPTIONS–
SHARED MEMORY menu item of SURVEY.

MEMORY VIEWER
This program is used to monitor items from the SURVEY program.
It also provides for scrolling DOP and # of Satellites graphs which
can be useful while surveying.
Start the program by selecting OPTIONS–SHARED MEMORY–
MEMORY VIEWER. The program will automatically seek and
display the information to the screen.
If this program is open when you close SURVEY, it will store the
options in the ProjectName.ini file and use the same settings the
next time you launch SURVEY.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 11

HYPACK® SURVEY • Shared Memory Programs

FIGURE 10. Vessel Information Window from Memory Viewer

FIGURE 11. DOP History Window from the Memory Viewer Program

3- 12 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 12. Number of Satellites Window from the Memory Viewer Program

SHARED MEMORY OUTPUT PROGRAM

The Shared Memory Output program is used by those who need to
save specific data from the HYPACK® SURVEY program out the
serial, network or parallel ports or to a file. You can select which
items to export from a set-up window and format the chosen items
according to your needs.
If this program is open when you close SURVEY, it will store the
options in the \HYPACK Sub-bottomProjects\smo.ini file and use
the same settings the next time you launch SURVEY.

NOTE: If you want to output multiple sets of data, you can launch
more than one incident of this module with different
connection settings for each.

1. Start the program by selecting OPTIONS-SHARED

MEMORY-OUTPUT. The Shared Memory Output window will
appear.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 13

HYPACK® SURVEY • Shared Memory Programs

FIGURE 13. Shared Memory Output

2. Select and order your output data.

3. Set your output format and connection options.
4. Start the data output by clicking [Start]. You can preview the
data strings on the status bar at the bottom of the window.

SETTING YOUR The SHARED MEMORY OUTPUT interface includes one tab for
MEMORY OUTPUT survey data that is not vessel-specific (the General tab) and one
DATA tab for each active mobile in the hardware configuration.
1. Select each item you wish in your export string.
a. Select the correct tab.
b. Select the item and click the right arrow button to move it to
the list on the right.

NOTE: You can also enter up to five custom strings which may
then be selected when configuring your Shared Memory
Output.

3- 14 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

2. Arrange the items on the right in the order that they should
appear in the exported data string. You can reposition an
item relative to another by:
• Selecting the item and using the up or down arrows.
• Selecting an item and dragging it in the list.

SETTING YOUR All data available from SURVEY is listed in the left-hand side of the
MEMORY OUTPUT Shared Memory Output window.
OPTIONS The whole idea of Shared Memory Output is that you can create a
custom output string. There are several output options to consider
beyond the data you want to include in your output string:
• The exported data string format according to the needs of
the receiving computer.
• Use Decimal Degrees: If unselected, lat./lon. is output in
dddmm.mmmm format with or without a degree and minute
symbol.
• Invert depth: If you are exporting depths and you want to
invert them, check the box.
• Add Checksum: If your device expects a checksum, check
the box.
• Lat./Lon. Options enable you to choose the format of the
position information regarding degree signs and the use of
N/S and E/W. At this time the only configuration is dd
mm.mmm.
• Speed units: Choose knots, meters/second, or feet/
second.
• Delimiter: Items in your output string can be separated by
commas or spaces.
• Enter the characters expected by your receiving device for
the start and end of the message. The End of Message
string from the second column will appear immediately
before the End of Message selection in the third column.
• Indicate what message should appear at the end of the
string. You have a choice of Carriage Return, Line Feed or
both. If none of these suits your need, create one that does
under Other.
• Towfish Source Mobile: If you have more than one towfish
mobile, select the mobile from which the output data should be
read.
• Automatically Start after 5 Seconds: All options are disabled
and the Shared Memory Output begins to send output five
seconds after you open the program.
• Initialization String options enable you to configure and send
an initialization string if you are outputting data to a recording
device that first needs to be prepared in this manner.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 15

HYPACK® SURVEY • Shared Memory Programs

a. Enter the initialization string required by your device.

b. Check the Send String At Startup option. This
automatically sends the initialization string when you start
the Shared Memory Output.
• The Send Frequency: You can send your string at any of the
following times:
• At each reading of any kind.
• At each record with a new position. (Export New Position
Only)
• Only when an event is marked. (On Event Only)

NOTE: Selecting both check boxes will result in no output.

• Tell the program where to send the message. Click

[Connect] to access the standard connect parameters as in the
HARDWARE program.
FIGURE 14. Serial and Parallel Connection Settings

3- 16 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 15. Network and File Connection Settings

a. Select the output destination. The data can be exported

through either a parallel or serial port, to a file or over a
network.
If you connect to a file, the program will output to a write-
only text file with the *.OUT extension (SMOutput.out, by
default) to the project folder. The program continues to
append data to that file until you change this setting.
b. Provide the output information pertinent to the
destination.
c. Specify the Update Frequency (msec).
d. Click [OK] to return to the Shared Memory Output dialog.

BROADCASTING If you save your Shared Memory Output settings to an INI file and
SURVEY DATA export your Shared Memory Output to the network, any network
OVER THE computer, including your own, can use the Shared Memory Input
NETWORK device driver (SMInput.dll) to read the data strings.
This requires that both computers have licensed versions of
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM that can run SURVEY and the dongle
that goes with it.
In this way you can run another incident of SURVEY, but read the
data from Shared Memory instead of the devices themselves.

NMEA OUTPUT
NMEA Output enables you to export user-defined NMEA strings
from the SURVEY program. It can be used together with the
NetNMEA.dll to broadcast the output strings over the network. If
you want to output multiple sets of data, you can launch more than
one incident of this module with different connection settings for
each. If this program is open when you close SURVEY, it will

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 17

HYPACK® SURVEY • Shared Memory Programs

resume using the same settings the next time you launch
SURVEY.
1. Select OPTIONS-SHARED MEMORY-NMEA OUTPUT.
FIGURE 16. NMEA Output Display

2. Select which NMEA strings to export. Checking the WGS84

option tells it to output WGS84 rather than local coordinates.
3. Define the Update Rate (the frequency to send messages).
4. Define the Prefix. This is typically GP, but it can be anything.
5. Choose to output your position data in WGS84 (check
WGS84) or local grid coordinates.
6. If your output must include a GPS status code, check
‘Fake GPS Status’. This option outputs hard-coded GPS
status values and ellipsoid height.
• Mode = 2
• Number of Satellites = 7
• HDOP = 0
• Ellipsoid Height = 0
When unselected, the output uses the incoming GPS data.
7. Set the connection information by clicking [Connect] and
filling in the dialog (as in HARDWARE).
8. Click [Start]. You can preview the output in the bottom of the
screen or click on [Hide Screen] to remove this display.

NOTE: The [Start] key changes to [Pause] when the program is

exporting data. You can toggle the export of data on and off
with this button.

3- 18 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

ODOMETER
The Odometer program enables you to monitor the distance
traveled. This is only for on-screen viewing; there is no data output.
The program allows you to view up to 3 different configurations.
If this program is open when you close SURVEY, it will store the
options in the ProjectName.ini file and use the same settings the
next time you launch SURVEY
1. Launch the ODOMETER program by selecting OPTIONS-
SHARED MEMORY-ODOMETER.
FIGURE 17. Odometer Display

2. Select the distance units.

3. Specify distance to measure, all travel or only the distance
traveled while surveying.
4. Check the Active check box and view the distances in the
windows on the left. Toggle this measurement on and off
manually by checking and clearing the box.
To prevent the Odometer from being hidden behind other
windows (optional), right-click on the window and select Always
On Top.
To display zeros up to the 1 million place (Optional), right-click
and select Show Leading Zeros.

GRAPHICAL MOTION REFERENCE UNIT

The Graphical MRU program shows Heading, Pitch and Roll in a
real time, visual display.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 19

HYPACK® SURVEY • Shared Memory Programs

FIGURE 18. Graphical MRU Display

The scale at the top of the window represents the heading.

The vessel is represented by the square in the center. When the
vessel:
• Is stationary, the lines extending out on either side lie at the
change from green to blue.
• Rolls, the diagram green/blue border rotates out of line with the
horizon line by the amount of the roll.
• Pitches, the square moves vertically out of line with the circle
by the amount of the pitch.
The Day/Night label enables you to toggle between dark and light
displays according to your survey environment.

HEADING AND SPEED INDICATOR

The heading and speed indicator is a graphical display of your
vessel's heading and speed.
FIGURE 19. Heading and Speed Indicator

3- 20 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

CONFIGURING YOUR AREA MAP DISPLAY IN SURVEY

The SURVEY program loads the information from the current
project. It gets geodetic information and hardware information by
reading the project’s initialization files. It will load the most recently
used planned survey line file (*.LNW) from the current project, as
well as any background files and matrix files that are currently
‘Enabled’.
The HYPACK® SURVEY interface also enables you to load
additional files and set other display options. If you have more than
one area map display, you can configure each display
independently.

LOADING FILES TO YOUR AREA MAP DISPLAY IN

SURVEY
In addition to the files loaded based on the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM display, you can load files through the SURVEY menus.
• Background Files may be loaded using the CHART menu in
the SURVEY shell. In addition to background chart files, you
can also load several other HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM file
types (eg. BRD, CHN, MTX, LNW, PLN, TGT...) for display
purposes only.
• Planned Lines: A planned line file may be loaded by selecting
LINE-SELECT FILE and choosing your file. Since you may only
have one line file loaded at a time, SURVEY will unload any
active Line File and load the selected file. This will be the one
on which the Cross Track Error, Distance from Beginning of
Line and other such measurements are based. You may
display other planned line files as charts by loading them
through the Charts menu.
• Targets: Select targets for display the Targets menu. SURVEY
append new targets to the SURVEY target group.
• Active Matrix files: Load matrix files through the Matrix menu.
You may use multiple matrix files loaded at a time to cover
large project areas. You may also load matrix files for display
purposes only through the Charts menu.
Corrected or Raw Soundings and/or Events at each event mark.
These items are stored in the current Project directory. Each day,
separate Sounding and Event files are created. The SURVEY
program automatically re-loads each file to provide you with a
history of the day’s survey.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 21

HYPACK® SURVEY • Configuring your Area Map Display in SURVEY

AREA MAP LAYER MANAGER

In addition to your project files, you may also include chart
features, such as a legend, scale, north arrow, and projection and
lat./lon. grids, in your area map display.
To set the files displayed and their draw order:
1. Access the Layer Manger by selecting SETTINGS-LAYER
MANAGER.
2. Check the files and features you want to display.
3. Set the draw order. You can click and drag the files in the list
or select one and reposition it with the Up and Down buttons.
Items at the end of the list are drawn first and will be overlaid by
any in the list above them that are selected.
4. Click [OK].
FIGURE 20. A Sample Area Map

AREA MAP MENU OPTIONS

Print Output Menu:
• Save Bitmap saves a bitmap record of the current Area Map
window to the project directory.
• Print Map sends a copy of the Area Map to the default
Windows® printer.
View Menu:
Zoom In/Out: When this option is selected, a left-click decreases
the scale (zoom in) and a right-click increases the scale (zoom
out).

3- 22 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

Zoom Window: Select this option and drag a rectangle in the

window to define the extent of your desired view. The program
redraws the screen to display the defined area optimally.
Zoom Extents: Draws the display at a zoom scale that displays all
enabled data.
Pan: Select this option, then click in the window and drag the
cursor to the position where that point should be displayed. As you
drag, the program displays the distance and azimuth of the cursor
motion. When you release the mouse button the display updates
accordingly.

Move options (or the arrow keys) can be used to pan the screen.
Rotate options turn the area map display.

AREA MAP GRID PROPERTIES

Grid Properties set how the projection and lat/long grids are
presented. Select SETTING-GRID PROPERTIES to access the
Grid Setup dialog. As in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control
Panel, you can choose automatic or fixed spacing and the style of
the labels. Labeling is available on all four sides of the map.

NOTE The Lat/Lon grid is displayed in Lat/Lon of the local datum.

FIGURE 21. Grid Setup Dialog

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 23

HYPACK® SURVEY • Configuring your Area Map Display in SURVEY

AREA MAP TRACKING AND ORIENTATION OPTIONS

Tracking and Orientation options automatically re-adjust the
screen when the boat leaves the display area and to rotate your
map to your preferred orientation.
Vessel track points are limited to one per second.
FIGURE 22. Tracking and Orientation Dialog

Select SETTINGS-TRACKING/ORIENTATION from the menu and

the Orientation and Tracking dialog appears.
Vessel Tracking: • In Center returns the boat to the center of the screen as it
nears the edge. The Edge Dist to Win Size Pct option
determines when the centering will occur based on the
distance between the vessel and the edge of the area map
(expressed in percentage of the Area Map window size with an
allowable range of 5-25%).

NOTE: If you enter a value outside the 5-25 range, the program
will reset the value to 5, if you have entered a value less
than 5, or 25 if you have entered a value greater than 25.

• Look Ahead moves the boat further back from the center to
maximize the amount of space displayed ahead of the vessel.
• Vessel and Target keeps the boat and the current active target
in view. The map automatically zooms to fit as you approach.
• No Tracking allows you to move the screen anywhere you
want without having it zoom back to keep the boat in view.
(Press the Home key to center the vessel on your screen.)
If you set your preferred method of tracking, you can quickly toggle
between this setting and “No Tracking” by selecting SETTINGS-
TOGGLE TRACKING (Ctrl+T).
Map Orientation: • Vessel Up aligns the Area Map with the current vessel
heading. Define a threshold (in degrees) to determine how

3- 24 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

much the vessel heading must change to cause the map

orientation to adjust. This prevents constant (annoying)
updates of the map orientation with only small changes in
vessel heading.
• Line Up draws the screen so the current line segment is
directly “up” the screen. If you are in the “Line Up” orientation,
the boat should be progressing up the screen. If your boat is
going “down” the screen, you need to “whip” the line ends
(change the start-line and end-line points) by using the Ctrl-W
key command or the LINE–SWAP menu item.
• User-Defined Rotation draws the Area Map according to the
specified degrees. Zero degrees will orient the map with North
up.

AREA MAP RANGE OPTIONS

Range options on the Area Map toolbar allow you to quickly scale
the map display. Just select a range in the SURVEY toolbar.
SURVEY automatically scales the selected Map window so the
length of shortest side displays the selected real-world distance.
Each subsequent window resize adjusts the scale accordingly, but
any zoom action will cause the range to revert back to "None".
The default values are 500, 1000, 2000, 3000 and 5000 survey
units, but you can customize this list for your needs in each project:
1. Select the Edit option from the Range drop-down list. A
dialog appears with a list of the current zoom ranges.
2. Modify the list as needed and click [OK].
FIGURE 23. Map Zoom Ranges—Default (left), Edited (right)

MEASURING DISTANCE AND BEARING IN THE AREA MAP

You can measure the distance and azimuth between points in the
SURVEYarea map.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 25

HYPACK® SURVEY • Boat Features in HYPACK® SURVEY

1. Use the drop-down list in the toolbar to set the units in

which you want to measure: U.S. feet, meters, kilometers or
nautical miles.
2. Click and drag between the two points on the map. The
measurements appear in the status bar.
FIGURE 24. Measuring in SURVEY

Tip: If you configure your Data Display to show Cursor North and
Cursor East (current cursor coordinates), when you do a
measurement these values change to display the distance and
bearing.

BOAT FEATURES IN HYPACK® SURVEY

You can configure the display options and draft correction for each
vessel through a Vessel Setup dialog. In addition, each Map
window can display the same vessels identically or differently,
each according to its own vessel setup.

3- 26 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 25. Vessel Setup Dialog

1. Open the Vessels Setup dialog by clicking VESSELS on the

menu bar.
2. Select the vessel whose features you want to modify and
the Map window for which these settings apply at the upper
left.
3. Choose your vessel settings and click [Apply]. The Apply
button allows you to preview your display before exiting the
dialog. If it doesn't suit you, make some adjustments and apply
again.
4. When you are satisfied, click [OK].
The configuration for each vessel is saved when you exit the
SURVEY program and are restored when you re-start the program.

SPECIFYING THE MAIN VESSEL IN SURVEY

For applications with multiple vessels or a vessel and towfish, one
vessel must be set as the “Main Vessel”. The main vessel is used
for calculating Cross Track Error and Distance To Go information.
It is also used for the automatic Start Line and End Line decisions.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 27

HYPACK® SURVEY • Boat Features in HYPACK® SURVEY

To set your selected vessel as the Main Vessel:

1. Open the Vessels Setup dialog by clicking VESSELS on the
menu bar.
2. Select the vessel whose features you want to modify at the
upper left.
3. Check the ‘Main Vessel’ option. Checking this box will
automatically clear this option for any other vessel.

Tip: If you are tracking an ROV or using a towfish, you probably

want to make the ROV or towfish the main vessel.

BOAT SHAPES AND SYMBOLS IN SURVEY

When the SURVEY program first loads a new vessel, it will default
to a circle symbol.
Assigning a Boat You can assign a custom Boat Shape, created in the BOAT
Shape SHAPE EDITOR (*.SHP) to a vessel through the vessel setup
dialog.
1. Access the Vessel Setup dialog, select VESSELS in the
menu.
2. Select the vessel whose features you want to modify and
the Map window for which these settings apply at the upper
left.
3. Check the ‘Display Shape File’ option and click the [...] for
the Shape field. It will bring up a listing of the available
shapes, defaulting to the \HYPACK Sub-bottom\Shapes folder.
4. Select the vessel shape file that represents your vessel and
click [Open]. Multiple file types are supported:
• SHP files: The default file type is created in the BOAT
SHAPE EDITOR
• DXF files, typically drawn in a CAD program, with the 0,0
point at the boat origin.
• BMP files
To display the boat symbol instead of the shape, clear the
‘Display Shape’ check box.
By default, SURVEY draws each vessel shape using the ECDIS
boat symbol. You can select an alternate symbol (circle, fish or
square) from the Symbol list or a boat shape for each vessel.
In the following figure, we selected the BOAT.SHP (custom shape
found in the \HYPACK Sub-bottom\Support\Boat Shapes folder) for
our main vessel. For the ROV, we have selected a Fish shape from
the SHAPE options.

3- 28 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 26. Main Vessel and Towfish Shapes and Symbols in SURVEY

You may distinguish between different vessels by assigning

different symbols, shapes or fill colors, or by displaying vessel
labels.
Displaying Origin, When you display a boat shape, check Display Offsets in the
Tracking Point Vessels dialog to display colored pixels at the locations of the
and Device Loca- vessel origin (green), the tracking point (blue) and the location of
tions each device (red).

NOTE: If a device is located at the origin or tracking point, the red

pixel representing the device will hide the green and blue
pixels for the origin and tracking point.

FIGURE 27. Viewing the Origin and Device Locations on the Vessel Shape in
SURVEY.— In this example, the tracking point is at the
echosounder location so it is not visible.

Vessel Shape A transparent shape allows you to view other map display items
Transparency (chart information, soundings, planned lines, etc.) that may
otherwise be obscured from view by the boat shape. Transparency
affects only the fill color; the perimeter remains opaque.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 29

HYPACK® SURVEY • Boat Features in HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 28. Sample Transparent Vessel Shape

To change the level of transparency, use the transparency

slider.
Vessel Shape Scale affects the size of the vessel shape displayed. Enter a scale
Scale multiplier in the Vessels Setup dialog to adjust the size of your
vessel in the Map window.
Tip: If you use real measurements in the BOAT SHAPE EDITOR
when you generate your boat shape, a scale of 1 should display
your vessel at a proper scale in SURVEY.
Vessel Perimeter The Vessel Perimeter Color.defines the color of the vessel
Colors symbol, the outline of the boat shape that may be assigned to this
vessel, as well as the color used to display text information about
the boat in the Data Display.

NOTES: If you have multiple vessels, you can keep track of different
ones by assigning different perimeter colors for each vessel.

The Vessel Fill Color is the color used to fill a boat shape. Note
the fill color is independent of the symbol color.
To assign either the perimeter or fill color, click in its color
square and select a new color from the color selection dialog.
Labeling your It may be useful, when tracking multiple vessels, to place a short
Vessels label on the vessel.
To label your vessels, check the ‘Display Vessel Label’ option.
FIGURE 29. Labeling the Boat

NOTE: Vessel names (determined in HARDWARE) should be kept

short, as the SURVEY program needs to capture the entire
area surrounding the boat and label. If boats and labels
overlap, the display can get confused as it captures pieces

3- 30 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

of other labels. This can be re-set by zooming the screen in/

out one time.

BOAT TRACK PARAMETERS IN SURVEY

The track parameters are the settings that affect the calculation
and display of the boat track line in SURVEY.
The track line shows the path that the vessel has traveled. It
updates once per second.
To Display the • Check Display Visible Track and set the track length in
Track Line: seconds. A longer time results in a longer displayed track line.
• Set the track color by clicking in the Vessel Track Color
square and selecting your color from the Colors dialog.

VESSEL HEADING IN SURVEY

Typically, HYPACK® SURVEY orients your boat shape according
to heading data received from your sensor (GPS or compass)
configured in HARDWARE with the heading function. If no driver is
configured to read heading, HYPACK® SURVEY calculates the
heading based on course over ground (COG).
The Use COG for Heading option in the Vessel Setup dialog
(VESSELS menu) enables you to ignore heading sensor data and
use COG until you close HYPACK® SURVEY or deselect this
option in the Vessel Setup dialog.

IMPORTANT: Each time you open HYPACK® SURVEY, the program

automatically resets this option according to your
HARDWARE configuration.

To permanently use course over ground and ignore your

heading data, close your SURVEY programs, return to
HARDWARE and deselect the Heading function.
Tip: If HYPACK® SURVEY always draws the vessel facing north,
you have a driver configured to read heading, but HYPACK®
SURVEY is not receiving heading data. Check that your heading
device is outputting the heading or deselect the Heading function in
HARDWARE and use COG.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 31

HYPACK® SURVEY • Chart (Background) Files in SURVEY

POSITION FILTERS IN SURVEY

GPS devices can occasionally generate an inaccurate reading.
Position spikes such as this may cause a problem for users who
are using automated features such as switching planned line
segments, cross-track error, and Start and End Line Gates to
control data logging in SURVEY. The position filters in the Vessel
Setup dialog provide criteria for SURVEY to recognize a bad
position and ignore it for these purposes.
1. Open the Vessels Setup dialog by clicking VESSELS on the
menu bar.
2. Select the vessel whose features you want to modify and
the Map window for which these settings apply at the upper
left.
The Dead Reckoning option tells SURVEY to calculate a position
based on current heading, speed and elapsed time since the last
position, and use it in place of a rejected position.
Gate Distance is the maximum distance allowed between two
consecutive positions when the vessel is stationary. Each time
SURVEY receives a position, it calculates the distance it should be
from the last recorded position based on the vessel speed and
elapsed time since the last position. It compares that calculated
distance against the actual distance. If the actual distance exceeds
the calculated distance by more than the gate distance, SURVEY
records the position to the data file, but ignores it for the purpose of
the automated features in SURVEY.
Tip: Use a value slightly larger than your expected GPS error.
Maximum Consecutive Positions Rejected limits the number of
points that can be rejected without accepting one. If SURVEY has
rejected this number of consecutive position readings, it will accept
the next position regardless of where it is.
Tip: Calculate the number of positions you would normally log over
the distance where you lose signal and use a value slightly greater.

CHART (BACKGROUND) FILES IN SURVEY

The SURVEY program loads the information from the current
project. It gets geodetic information and hardware information by
reading the project’s initialization files. It will load the most recently
used planned survey line file (*.LNW) from the current project, as
well as any background files and matrix files that are currently
“Enabled”.

3- 32 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

In addition to background chart files, you can also load several

other HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM file types in SURVEY (eg. BRD,
CHN, MTX, LNW, PLN, TGT...) for display purposes only.
FIGURE 30. SURVEY with a DIG Chart, Target File (*.TGT) as Background
File (Red Buoy) and an Active Target File (13:26:17).

LOADING CHARTS DURING SURVEY

1. Select CHART–LOAD. A file selection window will appear.
2. Select the desired file type and the name of the data file
you wish to add to the SURVEY Area Map.

NOTE: Vector Product Format charts may also be loaded from

SURVEY through the Chart menu. The process is the same
as loading them to HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM.

Chart Geodesy: For Chart data to be correctly drawn, the geodetic parameters of
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM must match the geodetic parameters of
the background file (BSB, DIG, DGN, DGW, DXF, TIF, ARCS). For
data stored in WGS-84 (C-Map, S57, VPF), the SURVEY program
will transform the data files to the local datum, using the datum
transformation parameters in the GEODETIC PARAMETERS
program before converting them to your projection. This allows you
to use these file formats on any projection.
Draw Order: Charts inside the SURVEY program will draw in the order they
have been loaded. If you have a Chart which has a solid
background (e.g. BSB, S57, TIF, VPF), these will obliterate other
types of background charts. To view both charts together, you must
do either of the following:
• Specify the correct draw order.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 33

HYPACK® SURVEY • Chart (Background) Files in SURVEY

• Set the transparency setting of the file drawn on top to allow

you to see through to the files below.

More Information
• “Setting Chart Transparency” on page 1-11

UNLOADING CHARTS DURING SURVEY

1. Select CHART–UNLOAD. The window shown in the following
figure will appear.
FIGURE 31. Unload Chart File Window

2. Click on the file you wish to “Unload” and click [Remove].

The screen will now redraw without the file you have unloaded.

DISPLAYING HAZARD CONTOURS IN SURVEY

A Hazard Contour (also known as a safety contour) is a user-
defined contour level that warns of depths unsafe for navigation.
When you display contours exported from the TIN MODEL
program, the hazard contour can be set to draw in red in the
SURVEY Map window. More than one DXF file can be affected by
the Track Hazard Contour setting.
During SURVEY, the program monitors changes in your real-time
tide and draft corrections, and shifts the red contour up or down
accordingly.

NOTE: The Hazard Contour setting affects only DXF contours

constructed in the TIN MODEL program.

1. Load one or more DXF files to SURVEY.

2. Select TIDE-CONTOUR. The Track Hazard Contour dialog
appears.

3- 34 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 32. Track Hazard Contour Dialog

3. Enter the hazard contour level when the tide is at zero for
your project area.
4. Choose which contours you want to display.
• Hazard contour shows in red
• Shallow displays the hazard contour in red and all shoaler
contours in gray.
• All: Shows all contours from your files with the hazard
contour in red.
• None: Shows all contours from your files, but the hazard
contour is not drawn in red.
5. Preview your results (Optional) by clicking [Apply].
FIGURE 33. Hazard Contour - Shallow (left), Hazard (right)

6. When you are satisfied with the results, click [OK] to return
to SURVEY.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 35

HYPACK® SURVEY • Configuring the Data Display Window

CONFIGURING THE DATA DISPLAY WINDOW

Selecting the Data You can select the items displayed and the order in which they are
Display Items displayed using the Data Display Configuration dialog.
1. Select CONFIGURE on the menu bar and the Data Display
Configuration window appears.
FIGURE 34. Configuring the Display

2. Select the items to be displayed.

There are two lists: ‘Available’ and ‘Display’. The items in the
‘Display’ list appear in the Data Display.
To move any item from one list to the other, do either of the
following:
• Double-click on the item
• Select the item in the list, then click [Add=>] or
[<=Remove].
Items appear in the Data Display in the order they have been
added to the Display list. To re-configure the entire order, just drag
the items up or down the Display list.
If your configuration includes multiple vessels, each vessel has a
list of items which is preceded by the vessel name in your Data
Display window. For example, if you have main vessel and a
towfish named “ROV”, you will find items named “ROV–East”,
“ROV–North”, etc.
The Data Display uses black for all items that are not associated
with a specific vessel. It uses the outline color designated for each

3- 36 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

vessel to display vessel-specific information. This is an easy way to

distinguish between the different vessels in the Data Display.

NOTE If you are surveying with only a multibeam system, the depth
reading in the Data Display is the nadir depth. (The
hysweep.dll must be installed to report this data.)

Tip: If you load Cursor East and Cursor North, you can drag your
cursor between two points to temporarily display the corresponding
distance and bearing measurements in your Data Display Window.
Set the distance units for these measurements in the toolbar.
View Options: • Display Speed: Choose to display your speed in knots,
kilometers/hour. or meters/second.
• Font: The Font in the Data Display can be temporarily changed
to meet the needs of different operators through the menu.
These settings override the current scheme until you exit
SURVEY.
To Set the Font, select DISPLAY-FONT and set your font in
the Windows® Font dialog. Only the font, style and size apply.
FIGURE 35. Selecting the font for the Data Display

• Enhanced Display: Select items in the Data Display can be

enhanced (written in a bolder font) to make them stand out
among the other items.
To “Enhance” an item, click on the item in the ‘Display’ list
you want to enhance and then check the ‘Enhanced’ box.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 37

HYPACK® SURVEY • Sub-Bottom Profilers in SURVEY

NOTE The “Enhance” feature will work best, if you are using a
standard font. If you have selected a “Bold” type font, it
will be less effective.

SUB-BOTTOM PROFILERS IN SURVEY

In SURVEY the sub-bottom profiling data is viewed in the Scrolling
Data Window. If you simultaneously acquire two channels of sub-
bottom data, there will be two instances of the Scrolling Data
window—one for each channel.
FIGURE 36. The SURVEY Program Showing the Map, Scrolling Data & Left/
Right Indicator windows

Bang Pulse Signal Amplitude

Window
SBP Controls

Scrolling Data Window

Sediment Layers
Seabed First Multiple

3- 38 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 37. The SURVEY program Showing Dual Sub-bottom Systems

Displayed on Two Instances of the Scrolling Data Window.

Sub-bottom Device Window – Channel 1

Sub-bottom Device Window – Channel 2

CONFIGURING THE SUB-BOTTOM DEVICE WINDOW

There are two Sub-Bottom Controls accessed through icons at the
top of the Scrolling Data window:
• View Options control the window display other than the data
itself.
• Sub-bottom Corrections affect how the data is drawn in the
window.

SUB-BOTTOM FIGURE 38. Scrolling Data Window Display Options.

VIEW OPTIONS

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 39

HYPACK® SURVEY • Sub-Bottom Profilers in SURVEY

• Scale: Configure the vertical scale using Autoscale or Manual

values.
• Grid: If you choose to display a grid on the sub-bottom data
imagery, you may also choose the units: milliseconds or
meters.
• Show Bottom Detect: Draws a red line in both the signal
amplitude display and the scrolling data window.

SUB-BOTTOM The options in the Sub-bottom Corrections window control the data
CORRECTIONS Band Pass Filtering, TVG, Bottom Tracking and Signal Display
Modes.

NOTE: These corrections are not applied to the SEG-Y data files as
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM always records the raw data to
the SEG-Y file.

FIGURE 39. Sub-bottom Correction Window used to Adjust the Data

Visualization Parameters.

• Band Pass Filtering reduces extraneous noise recorded by

the sub-bottom receiver during acquisition. This can take the
form of vessel, electrical or ambient ocean noise. The
recommended starting point for filtering sub-bottom data is a
low pass start frequency of half of the sub-bottom transmit
frequency and a high pass end frequency of double the sub-
bottom transmit frequency. For example, if you are using a sub-
bottom profiler transmitting at 4 kHz, use band pass filtering of
between 2 kHz and 8 kHz as a starting point then adjust
accordingly to achieve good quality data.

NOTE: Generally, additional band pass filtering should not be

applied to Chirp data due to the match filtering and

3- 40 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

correlation that is applied to the signal arrivals by the

sub-bottom profiler manufacturer.

• TVG (Time Varied Gain) has three levels (TVG1, TVG2 &
TVG3) that can be applied to enhance the real-time data
display. TVG1 rate applies through the water column, TVG2
rate applies from the seabed bottom tracking through the
seabed strata and TVG3 rate applies during the final part of the
sweep period.
Set TVG3 to a lower rate than TVG2 to prevent the saturation
that might otherwise occur if the gain continues to increase
during long sweep periods.
Set a delay period for when you require the TVG3 rate to apply.
The TVG3 delay begins at the seabed bottom tracking (start of
the TVG2 ramp).

NOTE: If you set a TVG3 delay period of zero, the TVG2 rate
will apply from the seabed tracking to the end of the
sweep. For shallow penetration sub-bottom profiling
systems only TVG1 & TVG2 are generally used. The
optimal combination varies, depending on the sub-
bottom system and the depth of penetration.

• Bottom tracking can be determined by one of three methods:

• Calculate: Calculation based on the signal amplitude levels
using the user-defined blanking, gate size and sensitivity
values.
• Manual: Manually setting the depth for the bottom tracking.
• Sensor: Reading the bottom tracking from the sub-bottom
system.
To set the bottom tracking location, click where the red
horizontal bottom track line should appear in the Signal
Amplitude window in the Scrolling Data window.
• Signal Display Modes (Color by Amplitude) are available
to adjust how the data is visualized. The display scale can
be set to Autoscale or manually adjusted:
• Unipolar: Gray scale image in which the negative
signal amplitude is zeroed. This works well with Pinger
and Chirp data.
• Bipolar: Gray scale image in which both positive and
negative signals are displayed with the zero signal level
colored 50% gray. This works well for Boomer/Sparker
data.
• Rectified: Gray scale image displayed as the absolute
signal amplitude value where negative signals are

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 41

HYPACK® SURVEY • Targets in SURVEY

converted to positive values. This works well for

Boomer/Sparker data.
• Color: Color version of the Bipolar display.

LAYBACK FOR TOWED SUB-BOTTOM SYSTEMS

You can set the layback value of the common midpoint behind the
attachment point in SURVEY. In the Towfish device window, enter
this value in the Cable Out field. For surface towed sub-bottom
systems the Catenary Factor should be set to 1, but for sub-towed
systems a value of 0.8 is more appropriate.
FIGURE 40. Input the Layback Value of the Sub-bottom System in the Towfish
Window in SURVEY.

You can also position a sub-tow sub-bottom system using a USBL/

LBL positioning system, which can be set up in the HARDWARE
program.

More Information
• “Configuring the Sub-bottom Device Window” on page 3-39
• “Corrections in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR” on
page 4-34

TARGETS IN SURVEY
Targets mark points of interest in your project area. To that end,
each target must at least include a name and the XY position, but it
can also include a lot of other metadata according to the project

3- 42 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

and the technology used and the program in which you mark your
target. Targets marked in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR
includes depth and depth of burial.
You can create targets in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM interface
or in the TARGET EDITOR then display them in the SURVEY
program. This enables you to navigate to predetermined locations
or away from areas dangerous for navigation. You can also mark
targets at points of interest in SURVEY and in post-processing and
save them to the project target list. The TARGET EDITOR displays
all information about each target in one window and enables you to
modify target properties and attributes where appropriate.

In SURVEY , targets can be used to mark items such as navigation

aids (buoys, beacons, etc.), locations where you take water quality
or bottom samples, or the “Waters Edge” location when surveying
on rivers.
When you mark a target, SURVEY draws it to the area map and
stores it to the SURVEY target group.
FIGURE 41. Targets in an Area Map

More Information
• “Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM” on page 2-111
• “Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR” on page 4-44

MARKING TARGETS IN SURVEY

When you mark a target in SURVEYthe name defaults to the
computer clock time at which a target was marked, except when
you create it through the Target Select dialog.
You can use any of the following methods:
• Select TARGETS–QUICK MARK (or F5 key), marks a target
at the current tracking point position.
• If you have multiple mobiles:
• Alt + F5 marks a target at the tracking point of the second
mobile.
• Shift+F5 marks a target at the tracking point of the third
mobile.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 43

HYPACK® SURVEY • Targets in SURVEY

• Double-click in the Area Map window, a target is set at that

position.
• Select TARGET-SELECT and click [New] in the dialog. The
Target Properties dialog appears for you to enter the necessary
data.
Each time you create a target in SURVEY, it is saved to the Survey
target group.

EDITING TARGET PROPERTIES IN HYPACK® SURVEY

You may edit the target properties just by typing in the new
information in the Target Properties dialog.
1. Access the Target Properties dialog.
• Right-click on a target and select Properties.
• Select TARGET–PROPERTIES from the menu.
• Select a target and press F6.
• Through the Select Target dialog:
i. Select TARGETS-SELECT. The Select Target dialog
displays a list of project targets.
ii. Click on the target you want to delete. (It is
highlighted.)
iii. Click [Modify].
2. Enter your new target properties and click [OK].

3- 44 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

TARGET PROPERTIES IN SURVEY

FIGURE 42. The Target Properties Dialog

The Name of a Target defaults to the computer clock time a target

was marked.
Display the Boat Position and Target Position in either X-Y or
Lat-Lon. in the format specified in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Control Panel. The Target Position is the actual location of the
target, offsetting it by the Distance and Bearing entered from the
tracking point. This is changed with the Display Position in Lat/
Lon check box.
The Boat Position is the location of the tracking point when the
target is marked using the Quickmark function. If the target was
created with the Targets cursor in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Screen Controls, it will be the same as the Target Position.
Distance and Bearing settings enable you to display a target
offset from the marked location. Enter the Distance and Bearing
then click [Recalc]. SURVEY displays the target in the new position
with a line connecting it to the original position to show the offset.

NOTE: The Distance and Bearing affect only the display in

SURVEY. They appear at their original location in the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Map window. You can
permanently translate the targets according to their Distance
and Bearing properties in the TARGET EDITOR.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 45

HYPACK® SURVEY • Targets in SURVEY

The Depth represents the corrected depth at the time the target
was marked.
The Code and Notes fields are available to you for whatever
purpose you desire.
Orientation (Angle) The angle of the alarm flag from the target
when displaying it in SURVEY .
Alarm: Display method in SURVEY To display the alarm flag, enter
1. For circle display enter 0.
Display Options:
• Number of Circles: Circles drawn around each plain target to
make them more visible on your map displays.
• Radius Increment: Distance, in survey units, between the
target and target circles around each target.
• Transparency: Adjusts the circle display to be opaque or allow
viewing charts and data drawn beneath.
Time, Date, Event, and QUA data are saved for each target as it is
created.
In the following figure, Buoy 23 Red is the current selected target,
noted by the triangle in the center. Buoy 20 Green has been offset
100’ at a bearing of 045 degrees. A vector is drawn from the boat
origin to the Target Position and the Target Circles are centered
about the Target Position.
FIGURE 43. Displaying an Offset Target (Buoy 20 Green)

DELETING TARGETS IN SURVEY

Deleting targets permanently removes them from your project.
1. Select TARGETS-SELECT. The Select Target dialog displays
a list of project targets.
2. Click on the target you want to delete. (It is highlighted.)
3. Click [Delete] and confirm the deletion.

3- 46 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

CHOOSING TARGETS TO DISPLAY IN SURVEY

SURVEY automatically displays the targets that were are enabled
in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM when you launch the program. You
can modify the target display through the Target Select dialog:
1. Select TARGETS-SELECT. The Select Target dialog displays
a list of project targets.
FIGURE 44. Select Target Dialog

2. Check the checkbox for each target you want to have

displayed in the Area Map.
• Check the checkbox for each target.
• Select one or more targets in the list and click [Select].

NOTE: [Select] toggles the check status of each selected

target.

Tip: To multiselect targets, hold the Ctrl key and select

multiple individual targets or hold the Shift key and click on
the first and last target in a range of consecutive targets.
3. Click [Close] to close the dialog and draw the checked targets
in the Area Map window.

REMOVING TARGETS FROM THE DISPLAY IN SURVEY

You can configure which targets display in the Area Map by
selecting them in the Select Target dialog. Additionally, you can
remove one or all targets from the Area Map. When you remove
targets from the display, the targets remain in the target list, but

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 47

HYPACK® SURVEY • Targets in SURVEY

they become deselected and can be restored to the display in the

Select Target dialog.
• To remove any target from the Area Map display, right-click
on the target and select Erase.
• To remove the currently active target (denoted by a red
triangle), select TARGETS-ERASE CURRENT.
• To remove all of the targets from the Area Map display,
select TARGETS-ERASE ALL.

SETTING THE ACTIVE TARGET IN SURVEY

The currently active target is drawn with a triangle at its center
while other targets are drawn with a “plus” sign at their center.
SURVEY can calculate and display several statistics about the
active target relative to the main vessel in the Data Display
window.
To set the active target, use either of the following methods:
• Use the right-click menu: Right-click on the desired target
and select the Select option.
FIGURE 45. Right-clicking on a Target Displays the Target Selection Menu.

• Use the Select Target dialog:

a. Select TARGETS-SELECT. The Select Target dialog
displays a list of project targets.
b. Select the desired target in the list and click [Make
Current] then [Close].

TARGET DISPLAY DEFAULTS IN SURVEY

To set the Target Display defaults:
1. Select TARGETS-TARGET PARAMETERS. The Default
Target Parameters dialog appears.
2. Set your options and click [OK].

3- 48 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 46. Default Target Parameters

Number of Circles When the Alarm option is unselected, this

option draws concentric circles around the target.
Radius Increment: Distance, in survey units, between the target
and target circles around each target.
Making Targets does not produce Events prevents events at
target locations. Clear this option to produce events when targets
are created.
Display Label toggles the display of the target name when you are
drawing circle targets. Too many target labels may clutter your
display.
Alarm includes a flag with the target name. Its background
changes color according to the Alarm Distances settings. In
SURVEY, alarm flags also display distance and bearing from the
tracking point to the target. The text box changes color, according
to the alarm distances set in the Target tab of the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM Control Panel. The default colors are green (low), yellow
(medium caution) and red (danger), but you can set your own
colors using the SCHEME BUILDER program.

NOTE: This Alarm setting overrides the setting in the Control Panel,
Targets tab.

Tip: If alarm flags overlap or if they are obstructing your view of

other critical features in your area map, you can modify the
positioning of the flag through the Target Properties. (Right-click
the target whose alarm flag you want to modify, select Properties
and change the Orientation setting.)

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 49

HYPACK® SURVEY • Targets in SURVEY

CONNECTING TARGETS WITH SURVEY LINES IN

SURVEY
You can create a single-segmented survey line wherever you need
one--right in HYPACK® SURVEY.
1. Create two targets, one at each end of the line you need.
2. Select the Target to which you want to draw the line.
3. Right click on the Target that you want to draw the line
from and select "Line to Current". A survey line will be drawn
between the indicated Targets and added to the currently
selected Planned Line File.
FIGURE 47. Drawing a Survey Line Between Two Targets

CONNECTING TARGETS TO THE BOAT POSITION IN

SURVEY
If you have a planned line file enabled, you can create a survey line
from your tracking point position to a target. Just right-click on the
target and select ‘Line to Vessel’. A survey line will be drawn
between the indicated target and your vessel, and added to the
currently selected planned line file.

NOTE: This option is disabled if there is no planned line file enabled.

FIGURE 48. Drawing a Survey Line Between a Target and the Boat Position

3- 50 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

MATRIX FILES IN SURVEY

Matrix files (*MTX) are gridded rectangular areas. You can fill the
cells with depth information from your sub-bottom profiler in real
time during data collection, or in post-processing.
Empty matrix files are typically created in the MATRIX EDITOR
and saved to the project folder.

FIGURE 49. Matrix File in SURVEY

Matrices can be filled in the survey programs to provide a coverage

diagram. This is particularly useful for multibeam and multiple
transducer surveys.

NOTE: Be aware that there are limits to the maximum size of a

matrix that can be successfully used in SURVEY. The
maximum size depends on the amount of RAM, free hard
drive space and processing power on your computer. Users
with very large project areas should consider creating
multiple matrices.

You can save matrix files at even time intervals by setting a Matrix
Backup Time in the navigation parameters. The Matrix Backup file
is a binary record of the matrix of the same root name, minus the
last letter, appended with the time of backup (hh_mm). It is stored
in the project Archive folder.

The color bar in the map window gives you a general idea of the
depths displayed in your matrix, but you can also view the exact
depth in any matrix cell in the right-click display.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 51

HYPACK® SURVEY • Matrix Files in SURVEY

FIGURE 50. Right-click Display from a Matrix

More Information
• “Creating a Matrix File with the Matrix Editor” on page 2-108

LOADING AND UNLOADING MATRIX FILES IN SURVEY

If matrix files (*.MTX) have been enabled in the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM project screen, they are automatically loaded into the
SURVEY program. You can also “Load” and “Unload” matrix files
in real time.

NOTE: You should be aware that there are limits as to the maximum
size of a matrix that can be used successfully. The
maximum size depends on the amount of RAM, free hard
drive space and processing power on your computer. If you
are working in a very large project area, consider creating
multiple matrices.

Loading a Matrix Select MATRIX-LOAD and select the Matrix File from the project
File selection dialog.
If you have loaded a "filled" matrix and wish to remove the
sounding data, select MATRIX-CLEAR CURRENT DATA.You can
choose to save the data to a backup matrix file in the project's
backup directory or just discard it.

NOTE: If you clear the data, you can not later use the MATRIX-
SHOW ORIGINAL DATA option to compare previous data
from the survey area with current ones.

Unloading a Select MATRIX-UNLOAD.

Matrix File

3- 52 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

MULTIPLE MATRIX FILES

In certain projects, it may be advantageous to have a series of
smaller matrix files, rather than one huge matrix file. It is more
efficient for the program to concentrate on one, small matrix file at
a time and automatically change from one to the other according to
the vessel position rather than to manage and re-draw one matrix
that is hundreds of megabytes in size.
The SURVEY program loads multiple matrix files. It displays and
updates any matrix while the main vessel falls within its boundary.
As the vessel moves through the project area, the program
continues to load and unload the individual matrix files, depending
on its location.
Note that only one matrix can display data at a time while you are
logging data. All matrices may be displayed simultaneously
(complete with sounding data) only when you are not logging data
by selecting MATRIX-DISPLAY ALL MATRICES.

SAVING SOUNDINGS TO A USER-DEFINED MATRIX IN

SURVEY
As you log data to a user-defined matrix during SURVEY, you can
‘paint’ either an empty matrix with only the current survey data or a
matrix filled with data from a previous survey.
If you begin with a filled matrix, the new sounding data will
overwrite what was previously entered.

The soundings you record to the matrix will be saved according to

the criteria set in the matrix options. Select MATRIX-OPTIONS and
the Matrix Options dialog will appear.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 53

HYPACK® SURVEY • Matrix Files in SURVEY

FIGURE 51. Matrix Options Dialog

Record Depth determines the depth reading to be stored to each

Matrix Cell. Note how they are affected by Elevation or Depth
Mode that you have set in the Matrix Menu.
Minimum will record the smallest depth value received in that cell.
• In Depth Mode, the smallest value is at the shoalest point.
• In Elevation Mode, the smallest value is at the deepest point.
Maximum will record the largest depth value received in that cell.
• In Depth Mode, the largest depth is deepest, while the
smallest depth is shoalest.
• In Elevation Mode, the largest depth is shoalest, while the
smallest depth is deepest.
Last will record the last sounding received.
Use Depth Filter option can be used to eliminate depths outside a
user-defined range (Min Depth to Max Depth) from being saved to
the matrix. This function can be used in either Depth or Elevation
Mode. Since soundings are output as positive values, the Min. and
Max values are always positive and the depths saved will fall in
that range.
Save only strikes in XYZ file: When you select MATRIX-SAVE
TO XYZ, it saves the difference between the sounding value and
the user-defined Strike Depth. This is useful to see how much must
be dredged to level the area to the strike depth.

3- 54 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

• If selected in depth mode, it only saves sounding if the Z-

value of the As Dredged Depth is less than the Strike Depth. In
this case, it saves the difference of the Strike Depth minus the
Z-value of the As Dredged Depth
• If selected in elevation mode, it only saves sounding if the Z-
value of the As Dredged Depth is greater than the Strike Depth.
In this case, it saves the difference of the As Dredged Depth
minus the Z-value of the Strike Depth
• If unselected, this option saves all depths.
BEWARE! This function is influenced by the Elevation Mode setting.
If you are in Elevation Mode, this will record depths deeper than
the strike mode. Probably not a very useful set of data!
Matrix Update Basis:
• Always updates your Matrix continuously. This option enables
you to follow your dredging in the Matrix while not recording the
Raw data if you don't need it.
• While Logging updates your Matrix only when you are logging
Raw data.
• Never causes the program not to update the matrix with dredge
depths.
Use Uncorrected Depths: The Matrix is updated, by default, with
corrected depth information. If your device outputs corrected data,
check ‘Use Uncorrected Depths’ to avoid double corrections in the
matrix.
Gap Interpolation Span fills empty cells between filled cells in
SURVEY. The interpolated data is not saved in the matrix, but you
may export it with the all of the other cell depths to and XYZ file
from SURVEY.
Backup to XYZ at Midnight: At midnight, the program saves the
value of each cell to an XYZ file at the position of the cell center.
Dredge Data in Empty Cells: This option, available only in
DREDGEPACK®, enables you to paint matrix cells in
DREDGEPACK® even if they contain no survey data. Use this
option to paint an empty matrix or when you are working beyond
the filled area of the matrix.

INTERPOLATING 1. In SURVEY, select MATRIX-OPTIONS to open the Matrix

MATRIX DEPTHS Options dialog.
WHILE LOGGING 2. Select the appropriate Interpolation Span to limit the
interpolation distance.
3. Start logging. The program will interpolate the data to fill
unpopulated cells with no additional intervention.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 55

HYPACK® SURVEY • Matrix Files in SURVEY

INTERPOLATING 1. In SURVEY, open the Matrix Options dialog. Select

MATRIX DEPTHS MATRIX-OPTIONS.
WHEN NOT 2. Disable the Gap Interpolation Span and click [OK].
LOGGING 3. Log your data.
4. When you stop logging, return to the Matrix Options
dialog and select the desirable Gap Interpolation Span.
5. Select MATRIX-FILL GAPS.
Tip: If the results are unsatisfactory, remove the interpolated data
(MATRIX-CLEAR GAPS) and try again.
You can experiment with different Gap Interpolation Span values
until you get a satisfactory result.

EDITING MATRIX DEPTHS IN SURVEY

The Matrix menu in the Map window in SURVEY has a group of
selections that, together, enable you to use a border file to modify
the matrix soundings inside or outside its boundaries.

NOTE: The options and their effects on the data are a little different
according to the module in which you perform them.

1. Create a Border File describing the area you wish to edit. You
can:
• Create it in the BORDER EDITOR and load it into
SURVEY by selecting MATRIX-LOAD BORDER.
• Create it in SURVEY.
i. Select MATRIX-CREATE BORDER.
ii. Click as many points as you need to outline your
area.
iii. Right-click either inside or outside of the border you
have created according to which portion of your data
you want to modify. The polygon will automatically
connect the first and last left-clicked points.

3- 56 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 52. Border File Superimposed son Matrix File

iv.Save your border file by selecting MATRIX-SAVE

BORDER and providing a name. The file will be saved
to your project directory with the *.BRD extension.
2. Modify your data. Select MATRIX-EDIT BORDER and the Edit
Matrix Region dialog will appear. For all soundings inside or
outside the border (depending on where you right-clicked when
you created the border) you can do the following:

TABLE 3. Editing your Matrix—Options and Actions

Dialog Option Action in SURVEY Action in DREDGEPACK®

Erase Deletes the survey data. Deletes both the survey and
dredge data.

Reset Dredge Depth (Not Available) Copies the survey depth to the
dredge depth.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 57

HYPACK® SURVEY • Matrix Files in SURVEY

Dialog Option Action in SURVEY Action in DREDGEPACK®

Shift by and enter a Increases or decreases the Increases or decreases the
positive or negative survey depth by the user- dredge depth by the user-
amount defined amount. defined amount.

Set to and enter a Sets the survey depth to the Sets the dredge depth to the
depth user-defined depth. user-defined depth.

3. Click [OK]. The dialog disappears and the matrix display

updates to reflect the modification.
4. Remove the border file from your display. (Optional) Select
MATRIX-REMOVE BORDER.

MATRIX DISPLAY OPTIONS IN SURVEY

The matrix file display can be independently configured in each
area map using the Matrix Appearance dialog (In the Map window,
select MATRIX-DISPLAY OPTIONS.)

3- 58 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 53. Set Matrix Appearance Dialog

Matrix files have two depth fields. This allows you to choose for the
matrix to be color-coded according to any of the following values:
Show : In Sub-bottom surveys, only the Survey option is
applicable.

NOTE These settings do not affect the values that are stored in the
matrix. They are for display purposes only. You can change
them at any time.

The other options in this dialog are not particularly useful for sub-
bottom data.

MATRIX COLOR SETTINGS IN SURVEY

The matrix file colors default to the project colors set in HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM Sounding Colors.
If a matrix is loaded in your area map, the matrix file legend
appears along the left-hand side of the Area Map. This displays the
current color zones used to display the matrix depths.
FIGURE 54. Sample Matrix Legend

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 59

HYPACK® SURVEY • Matrix Files in SURVEY

To modify the colors, right-click on the legend and select

Settings. The COLOR EDITOR appears for you to make any
changes.
FIGURE 55. Color Editor

SAVING MATRIX FILES IN SURVEY

You can manually or automatically save your matrix data at any
time as you work in your project.
Manual Saves At any time, you can manually save your MTX or extract the data to
an XYZ file based on the settings in your Matrix Options dialog.
• To save your MTX to its current file location and in its current
state, select MATRIX-SAVE MATRIX.
• To save the MTX data in XYZ format, select MATRIX-SAVE
TO XYZ to the current data in XYZ format. In this case, the data
will be saved according to the choices in the Matrix Options
dialog.
Automatic Saves. At user-defined time intervals, the filled matrix is saved to a binary
record in the project Archives folder. SURVEY names each binary
backup using the original matrix file name appended with the time
and an MXB extension (FileName_HH_MM.MXB). This provides
you with a series of MXB files generated over the course of a day.
The binary files are quite small; the improved security against data
loss is well worth the storage space.

3- 60 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

NOTE: The time for the first MXB is rounded to a time at or previous
to the backup time and divisible by the time interval. For
example, an MXB record generated at 10:23 will be named
FileName_10_20.MXB. After that, the time extension will
match the file generation time.

You can use any of these MXB files to restore your project MTX to
its state at the time the file was generated. This provides an easy
recovery from power failure.
To automatically generate binary backups of your matrix:
1. Select OPTIONS–NAVIGATION PARAMETERS and the
Navigation Parameters dialog will appear.
2. Enter a number, in minutes, in MTX Backup Time. This is
the frequency that the program automatically saves the MTX
file. (A value of ‘0’disables this option.)
Tip: A value of 10 to 15 is recommended.
To restore your MTX from an MXB file:
1. In the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen, right-click on the
Matrix Files folder in the Project File list and select
‘Convert Mxb->Mtx’. A File Select dialog will appear.
2. Select the MXB file you want to restore to MTX and click
[Open]. A File Save dialog will open.
3. Name your restored matrix (MTX) and click [Save]. The
name defaults to the root name of the selected MXB file.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 61

HYPACK® SURVEY • Corrections in SURVEY

FIGURE 56. Navigation Parameters Window

CORRECTIONS IN SURVEY
Draft: Dynamic draft corrections are not required in Sub-bottom
surveys. For hull-mounted SBP systems, configure the static draft
as a vertical offset relative to the waterline.

IMPORTANT! Take care with your positional offsets in HARDWARE.

There is no way to correct them after acquisition in
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM.

Tide and Sound Velocity Corrections: SURVEY records tide

corrections to the RAW data files, but the SEG-Y files are
unaffected. You apply tide and sound velocity corrections to sub-
bottom data in post-processing. You can then export corrected All
format (*.EDT) and XYZ data from the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR.

3- 62 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

Layback: You can enter the layback value of the common midpoint
behind the attachment point in SURVEY. In the Towfish device
window, enter this value in the Cable Out field.

More Information
• “Harmonic Tidal Predictions” on page 4-4
• “Manual Tides Program” on page 4-6
• “Corrections in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR” on
page 4-34
• “Layback for Towed Sub-Bottom Systems” on page 3-42

NAVIGATING PLANNED LINES IN SURVEY

The Navigation Parameters dialog in SURVEY provides options to
help automate the planned line navigation and data logging. This
allows the helmsman to focus on driving while SURVEY handles
the survey data.
To access the Navigation Parameters, select OPTIONS-
NAVIGATION PARAMETERS.
FIGURE 57. Navigation Parameters Dialog

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 63

HYPACK® SURVEY • Navigating Planned Lines in SURVEY

SELECTING SURVEY LINES IN SURVEY

The active planned line file in your project will be loaded to the
SURVEY program. You can load a different line file by selecting
LINE-SELECT FILE and choosing the new line file from the file
selection dialog. SURVEY will unload any active line file and load
the selected file. Only one planned line file may be enabled at a
time. (You can unload any active line file and work with no lines
loaded by selecting LINE-UNLOAD.)
When you first enter the SURVEY program, it will select the first
line in the queue as the current active line. When you exit the
SURVEY program, it writes the current active line to a default file.
When you re-start the SURVEY program, it reads this default file
and re-establishes the last active line as the current active line.
To select the line you wish to survey, use one of the following
methods:
• Right-click on a line handle and then click the “Select”
item. The “handles” are located at each line origin (the first
point entered when creating the line) and are drawn as little
boxes at the origin of a planned line.
FIGURE 58. Selecting a Line Using "Handles"

• Use the LINE–INCREMENT LINE menu item or Ctrl-I to move

ahead by the number of lines defined under Line Increment in
the Navigation Parameters.
• Use the LINE–DECREMENT LINE menu item or Ctrl-D to
move back by the number of lines defined under Line
Increment in the Navigation Parameters.
• Enter the desired line number under Next Line in the
Navigation Parameters. You may enter either the number or
name (“34+00”) associated with a line.

CHANGING SURVEY DIRECTION

When you select a new planned line or when the SURVEY
program selects a new planned line, it sets the “Start Line” end
according to the Line Direction Mode in Navigation Parameters,
and assumes you will be running the line from that end to the far
end. It draws a red circle about the “Start Line” end (when off-line)

3- 64 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

to show you which end it has selected as the “Start Line” end. It
also superimposes a series of arrows along the line to indicate the
expected direction of travel.
• Line Direction Mode tells SURVEY the pattern the survey
vessel will normally follow when a new planned line is selected.
• Closest looks for the end of the line closest to the vessel
and assumes you want to run the line starting from that
end.
• Line Origin starts the line at the first set of coordinates for
the line in the Planned Line File. This is useful for surveyors
who want to run all of their lines in the same direction.
• Line Terminus starts the line at the last set of coordinates
for the line in the Planned Line File. This is useful for
surveyors who want to run all of their lines in the same
direction.
• Alternate Direction starts the next line in the opposite
direction from the direction of current one based on the
coordinates entered in the Planned Line File. (Alternates
Origin-to-Terminus, then Terminus to Origin.)
To change the selection of the “Start Line” end:
• Select LINE-SWAP.
• Right-click on the line handle and clicking “Swap”.
FIGURE 59. Swapping line direction using the ‘handles’."

• Select the line and press Ctrl + W.

SELECTING SEGMENTS ON MULTIPLE SEGMENT LINES

IN SURVEY

This is used by SURVEY to determine how to step through multiple

segment planned lines.
Select OPTIONS–NAVIGATION PARAMETERS. The available
choices are:
• While Logging: Using this method, the current segment is
fixed until the program goes “On Line”. It then automatically
switches to the closest segment, based on the off-line distance
of each segment.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 65

HYPACK® SURVEY • Adding New Lines in SURVEY

• Always: This method constantly updates to the most

appropriate segment, whether the program is “On Line” or “Off
Line”.
• Never: This will not change the current segment. You may
manually change segments using the Ctrl+F (Forward
Segment) or Ctrl+B (Backward Segment) key commands.

ADDING NEW LINES IN SURVEY

Surveyors can create a new planned line in SURVEY using any of
the following methods:
• Create a parallel offset from an existing planned line.
• Use the cursor to digitize a new planned line in the Map
window.
• Connect targets with a planned line.
• Connect the vessel tracking point to the current target.

DIGITIZING PLANNED LINES IN SURVEY

At any time that you are off line while in SURVEY, you can use the
cursor to define path of one or more additional planned lines. Each
new line will be defined by two or more waypoints that describe its
path.
When you are not logging, the first of two icons in the toolbar of
Map window becomes enabled for you to begin this process.
1. Click on the red icon.
2. Use your cursor to click at the location of each
waypoint in the new planned line. Each waypoint will
be marked with red and connected with black line segments.
As soon as you have defined at least two waypoints, the
second (blue) icon is enabled.
3. When you have finished digitizing the line, click the
blue icon. The new planned line becomes the active
planned line.
If you have a planned line loaded in SURVEY, the new line will be
appended to the active planned line file. Otherwise, a line file
containing the new planned line file, manual_entry.LNW, will be
created.
Each digitized line will be automatically named using the time at
which it was created. For example, a line created at 9:05:25 will be
named 09_08_25.

3- 66 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

More Information
• “Creating Parallel Line Offsets in SURVEY” on page 3-67
• “Connecting Targets with Survey Lines in SURVEY” on
page 3-50
• “Connecting Targets to the Boat Position in SURVEY” on
page 3-50

CREATING PARALLEL LINE OFFSETS IN SURVEY

To create a new planned line a parallel offset from an existing
planned line.
Select LINE-ADD and the Add New Line dialog will appear. This
example, tells SURVEY to create a new line named “33”. This line
will be created 15’ (or meters, according to the current grid units)
from line number “1”. Positive offset values create lines to the right
of the “Base Line” when you stand at point 1 of the base line and
look at point 2. The new line created is saved to the LNW file and
becomes a permanent line in the planned line file.
FIGURE 60. Add New Line Window

LOGGING DATA IN SURVEY

Typically, when you set up a survey project, you create a set of
planned survey lines to guide your navigation as you collect data.
They help insure that you achieve the proper coverage of your
survey area. Most surveyors begin on the first line of the line file
and navigate up one line and down the next, logging data for each
line, until they reach the end.
When you begin logging data at the beginning of each planned line
(start line), the SURVEY program opens a data file and begins to
record data. The status in the Data Display window will change to
‘Logging’. This is your indication that you have started line and the
SURVEY program is logging data.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 67

HYPACK® SURVEY • Logging Data in SURVEY

To Start Logging: You can start line manually or automatically.

• Manually by selecting LOGGING-START LOGGING (Ctrl+S)
• Automatically using the automatic Start Line Gate feature.
The automated Start Line Gate feature begins logging
automatically if the vessel tracking point passes within the
specified distance of the start line point.
The Start Line Gate is specified in the Navigation Parameters
window. Select OPTIONS–NAVIGATION PARAMETERS.
• Start Line Gate = “0.0”, the feature is disabled and the
SURVEY program only starts and ends logging if you manually
intervene.
• If the Start Line Gate > 0, the program starts logging
automatically when the distance from the tracking point to the
starting point of the planned line is less than the absolute value
of the Start Line Gate. This "trigger area" is shown as a circle at
the beginning of the planned line. A positive Offset shifts the
circle down line by the specified amount, while a negative offset
shifts it backward along the line.
FIGURE 61. Start Line Gate = 25 (left), with Offset=10 (right)

• Start Line Gate < 0, the SURVEY program only starts logging
when the tracking point breaks the perpendicular projection of
the start line point and the distance from the tracking point to
the starting point of the planned line is less than the absolute
value of the Start Line Gate.
FIGURE 62. Negative Start Line Gate

Tip: The Approach Line Distance option in the Navigation

Parameters draws a dotted extension from the planned line for a
user-defined distance. The approach line is a visual guide for your
helmsman align your vessel with the line before you reach the start
line.

3- 68 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 63. Approach Line Extends 50 Meters from the Start Line

To Suspend Log- At any time while logging, select LOGGING-SUSPEND LOGGING

ging: (Ctrl+U). The status in the Data Display window will display the
word “Suspended”. A target with the name “Paused” will be placed
on the screen at the tracking point position. You will still receive
screen updates and position information, but the program will not
write information to disk. This is useful if the survey boat needs to
pause for traffic.
To Resume Log- Select LOGGING-RESUME LOGGING (Ctrl+R).
ging:
To Abort Logging: At any time while “On-Line”, select LOGGING-ABORT LOGGING
(Ctrl+A). SURVEY stops logging data and saves the data logged to
that point with an *.XXA extension. (If this would cause a duplicate
file name, the extension becomes *.XXB, *.XXC...). The aborted
file is not included in the current catalog file.
To End Logging: Once logging has been started, it can be ended (end line) as
follows:
• Manually by selecting the LOGGING-END LOGGING (Ctrl+E).
• Automatically if you are using the Start Line Gate. The line will
be ended automatically when the tracking point breaks the a
line projected perpendicular from the end segment point of the
planned line.
To disable the automatic end line, select the Disable End
Line Gate option in the Navigation Parameters dialog. In this

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 69

HYPACK® SURVEY • Logging Data in SURVEY

case, you must stop logging manually, though a start line gate
automatically starts logging.
When the SURVEY program executes an “End Line” event, it
closes and saves the data file and then selects the next line in the
line queue. It determines the start line point based on the Line
Mode in the Navigation Parameters dialog. A small red circle is
drawn about the start line point and arrows indicate the direction of
travel.
BEWARE! Logging data to a network location has not been done
successfully. All data should be logged on the survey computer.

More Information
• “Raw Data File Naming Convention”.

PROJECT INFORMATION IN SURVEY

The project header data, which is written to the header of the raw
data files, is defined in the project information. The header data is
optional, (for display purposes only) but a year from now you may
be thankful that somebody took the time to fill out the available
fields.

To enter your project information:

1. Access the project information dialog by selecting
OPTIONS–PROJECT INFORMATION.
2. Describe your project and click [OK].
• The Project, Job, Area, Boat and Surveyor fields are self-
explanatory.
• Choose your file-naming convention.
• ‘Override Project Path’: Define alternate location to store
your raw survey data. The default location is the
ProjectName\Raw folder.
BEWARE! Logging data to a network computer is unreliable. All data
should be logged on the survey computer.

3- 70 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

FIGURE 64. Project Information Window

RAW DATA FILE OPTIONS IN SURVEY

Raw files are the data files that result from the SURVEY or
DREDGEPACK® program. Every time you log data, a new “Raw”
data file is created. They are ASCII format files that contain the
header information and time-series information for each survey
device.
By default, they have the RAW extension and, in a standard
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM project, are stored in the \HYPACK
Sub-bottom\Projects\ProjectName\Raw folder.
A list of individual data files is provided in a catalog (*.LOG) file.
You can quickly draw or process a group of files by specifying the
*.LOG name, instead of entering the name of each data file.

RAW DATA FILE Each time goes “on-line”, it creates a new data file with a unique
NAMING name.
CONVENTION To set your file naming format, select OPTION-PROJECT
INFORMATION and choose from the following options:

Naming Format Description Example

Standard HYPACK® (See details below.)
SUB-BOTTOM
Named Lines LineName.RAW 34P00.RAW
Unnamed Lines LineNumber_start line 014A1325.RAW
time.RAW

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 71

HYPACK® SURVEY • Logging Data in SURVEY

Naming Format Description Example

Long Filenames YR+ 1ST 2 char. of boat + 00BO0911325_014.RAW
Julian day +
time(HHMM)_Line Number
CHS Filenames YR + 1ST 2 char. of boat + 00BO0911325.RAW
Julian day + time(HHMM)
Julian Day as HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM 014A1325.091
Extension name with Day Number as
the extension
Other Extension You define the extension in 014A1325.NEW
the adjoining box.
Use File Prefix You define the prefix in the JJB_014A1325.RAW
adjoining box.
Append Julian Day to Julian day is applied as a 153_014A1324.RAW
Prefix prefix.

Standard HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Details:

• If your lines have names, your data file will be the name of the
planned line, plus the extension. For example, if you are
logging data on a line named “34+00”, the resulting data file will
be named “34P00.RAW”. If you log on the same line again, it
creates a data file named “34P00A.RAW”. If you log on the
same line once again, it creates a data file named
“34P00B.RAW”, etc.
Line names of three or less numeric characters are an
exception; they are named as if the lines do not have names.
• If your lines do not have names, your data file will be named
using a combination of the start line time from the computer
clock and the number associated with the line. For example, if
you begin line #14 at 13:25, the survey information will be
stored in a data file named “014_1325.RAW”. If you start the
same line again during the same minute, a data file named
“014A1325.RAW” will be created.
• If you are not using survey lines, the line names will begin
with “000” in place of the line number.
You may also choose to append a prefix to any of these file name
formats. Use the Julian Day, define your own prefix or use both
options together.
It is impossible to duplicate or overwrite existing files in the
program.

3- 72 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

DATA When you create a new project, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM creates

DIRECTORIES FOR a sub-directory under the \HYPACK Sub-bottom\Project directory
RAW DATA FILES with the name of your project. It then creates a sub-directory
named ‘Raw’. For example, if your new project was named
“Richmond 1998”, your raw data files from the program would be
stored in the “\HYPACK Sub-bottom\Projects\Richmond
1998\Raw” directory.
The program stores your survey data, by default, in the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM “Raw” format in the \RAW directory under the
current project.
To specify another directory path, select OPTIONS-PROJECT
INFORMATION from the menu and set a path under ‘Override
Project Path’.

CLOSING DATA If you anticipate being ‘on line’ for extended periods of time, you
FILES BASED ON can instruct the program to automatically close the current data file
TIME and open a new data file without changing the current survey line.
To set an automatic Log Backup Time:
Select OPTIONS–NAVIGATION PARAMETERS and enter a non-
zero value in the “Log Backup Time”. The value entered represents
the number of minutes elapsed before closing the current data file
and opening a new file. New files that are opened using this feature
are named using the conventional naming scheme for data files
which eliminates duplicate file names.

LOGGING EVENTS IN SURVEY

Event marks are also called “Fix Marks”. They are used to mark
recorders to allow you to correlate digital (HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM) and analog records. Include the beep.dll in your
hardware setup to sound a user-defined tone each time an event
mark is created. Configure the basis on which events are
generated in the Navigation Parameters dialog (OPTIONS–
NAVIGATION PARAMETERS).
Automatic events Next Event sets the number of the next event mark.
Reset Events on Startup causes your event numbers to begin at
one, each time you launch SURVEY. If you deselect this option,
SURVEY remembers the last event number when it is shut down
and, when restarted, will begin numbering event marks
accordingly.
Event Marks are always generated when you pass a waypoint
(switch legs) in your survey line.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 73

HYPACK® SURVEY • Logging Data in SURVEY

Event Marks can also be automatically generated based on time or

distance along line. Choose the Event Basis.
• If you select "Time", the Event Increment is expressed in
seconds.
• If you select "Distance", the Event Increment is the distance
in survey grid units (feet or meters) between events.

NOTE HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM does not predict when your survey

vessel passes over precise fix locations. It simply generates
a fix mark at the first position update which is equal to or
farther down-line from the pre-defined event location

Marking Events Check Events on Even Intervals.

on Even Intervals • If your event basis is time, automatic, mid-line events are
generated at even second intervals. For example, if your event
interval is 5 sec. and your start line event is at xxx12.072 sec.,
the next event will be at xxx15.000 (plus or minus .001 sec).
• If your event basis is distance, SURVEY attempts to place
the events at even distance intervals based on DBL as you
progress down the line.
Generating a At any time, select LOGGING-MANUAL EVENT (Ctrl+N).
Manual Event
Mark
SURVEY KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
TABLE 4. SURVEY Keyboard Commands

Functions Commands
Line Functions Decrement line by 1 Ctrl+D
(Works only when not logging.)
Increment line by 1 Ctrl+I
(Works only when not logging.)
Swap planned start end Ctrl+W
Decrement line segment by 1 Ctrl+B
Increment line segment by 1 Ctrl+F
Logging Functions Start Logging Ctrl+S
Pause Logging Ctrl + U
Resume Logging Ctrl + R
Manual Event Mark Ctrl+N
Abort Logging Ctrl + A
End Logging Ctrl+E
Target Commands Mark target at tracking point F5

3- 74 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

Functions Commands
Target Properties dialog F6
Marks a Waters Edge Target F7
Tide Corrections Increment by current increment Alt+Y
Decrement by current increment Alt+Z
Map Zoom Commands Zoom In +
Zoom Out -
Move left, right, up and down Arrow Keys
Rotate Starboard Ctrl++
Rotate Port Ctrl + -
Center Map Home
North Up Ctrl+Home
L/R Indicator Contract scale Ctrl+C
Commands
Expand scale Ctrl+V
Profile Window Contract horizontal scale Ctrl+C
Commands
Expand horizontal scale Ctrl+V
Decrease Vertical scale Alt+C
Increase vertical scale Alt+V

RECORDING COMMENTS IN SURVEY

The Comment window stores your input to the project log.
FIGURE 65. Sample Comments Window

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 75

HYPACK® SURVEY • Printing Survey Data

Enter your notes in the field at the top. Each time you press your
Enter key, your comment drops down to the display in the lower
part of the window and a copy is stored to the project log. In the
single beam and HYSWEEP® editors, you can refer to these
comments during the editing process.

PRINTING SURVEY DATA

You can print survey data to any printer while logging. The location
of the printer is specified under the Device menu of the
HARDWARE program. The message to be printed is defined in the
SURVEY program.
1. Configure HARDWARE to perform this function.
a. Click on PREPARATION -HYPACK HARDWARE.
b. Select ‘Hypack Configuration’ and the System tab to
the right.
FIGURE 66. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM System Tab

c.Set your Printer Connection to Data File. This will send

the information you want to a text file. The Data file
configuration options will appear.
d. Click [Browse], navigate to where you want to save the
file, enter a name.
2. Configure your output to the file. SURVEY is where we
configure exactly what we want to output to the file and at what
frequency: Time, Distance, or Event.
a. Launch SURVEY. Click the whale icon on the Icon Bar or
select SURVEY-SURVEY from the menu.

3- 76 Survey
HYPACK® SURVEY

b. Select LOGGING-PRINT-CONFIGURE to open the Printer

Configuration window. The Printer Configuration window,
first appears with the “Printed” list blank.
c. Configure each item you want sent to your data file.
i. Move items you want to have printed from the
Available list to the Printed list in the order you
want them printed. You can move an item by clicking
on an item in the Available list and then clicking [Add->]
or by double-clicking on the item in the Available list.
ii. Enter the number of characters you want to reserve
for each item in the Printed list. Click on the item,
then enter a value in the Width box. Click [Apply Width].
You can see the actual message constructed beneath
the list windows.

NOTE: Take care that your printer message does not exceed
80 characters.

FIGURE 67. Printer Configuration in SURVEY

3. Set other output options.

• Print Basis is the frequency, in seconds, at which the data
is sent to the data file.
• Print While Off-line: Check this option to print regardless
of your logging status. Clear this option to print only while
logging.
• Page Advance at End of Line: This option begins a new
page at the start of each new planned line.
4. Test your report generation in SURVEY.

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 77

SURVEY DATA TRANSFER • Printing Survey Data

• If the ‘Print while offline’ option is selected, SURVEY

will automatically begin sending data to the text file as long
as you are in SURVEY.
• If the ‘Print while offline’ option is not selected, you
must manually start the print function when you first open
SURVEY. (Select LOGGING- PRINT- START.) After that,
the printing will turn on and off with your logging status.
• Print Basis: You can elect to have your message printed
based on distance, time or events. In most operations, you
should select “Events” with an increment of “1”. This prints
the requested data at each event mark.
To begin printing, select LOGGING–PRINT–START.
To shut down printing, select LOGGING–PRINT–STOP.
To print the header, at any time, select LOGGING–PRINT–
HEADER.

NOTE You may elect to print the information to a text file instead of
sending the text to the printer. This can be done by
specifying a “Data File” under the Connect information for
the Printer in the HARDWARE program and then providing a
name for the text file.

To print a full page-sized screen capture of your Area

Map window, click the Print Screen icon in the toolbar.

SURVEY DATA TRANSFER

SURVEY DATA TRANSFER sends a copy of your data files out via
a LAN or an Internet connection. It is a separate program that you
run simultaneously with HYPACK® SURVEY.
Each time you end logging, SURVEY tells SURVEY DATA
TRANSFER that there’s data available. SURVEY DATA
TRANSFER sends the data to user-defined destination. In a very
short time after the end of line, the data can be in post-processing
elsewhere on the boat (via your LAN), at the office on shore, or
half-way around the world.
Alternatively, you can instruct the program to send the files only
when you close HYPACK® SURVEY.
To transfer data over the Internet, both the survey computer and
the receiving computer must have access to a Dropbox account.
The file transfer occurs through the Dropbox folder.

3- 78 Survey
SURVEY DATA TRANSFER

In the Options area of the program, you can configure the program
to transfer the raw data types according to your project type: RAW,
BIN (echogram data), and HSX files. The program must compress
HSX files in a ZIP or EXE file before the transfer, but if you send
only RAW files, the program can transfer them directly when you
end logging.
FIGURE 68. Running the SURVEY DATA TRANSFER to Dropbox

1. Open SURVEY DATA TRANSFER. In the HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM menu, select SURVEY-SURVEY DATA TRANSFER.
2. Configure your output destination.
• Browse for your LAN destination or Dropbox folder.
• Send Data When Survey Closes: SURVEY sends no data
until you close the program. To send data at the end of
each line, clear this option.
• Zip Files Before Sending enables you to compress your
data before the transfer. When you select this option, also
select your preferred extension (ZIP or EXE). To send
uncompressed data, clear this option.
3. Click [Start]. SURVEY DATA TRANSFER waits for an end line
message from SURVEY.
4. Run SURVEY as usual. Each time you stop logging, the
SURVEY DATA TRANSFER copies the data to your destination

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 79

SURVEY LOG • Printing Survey Data

folder, adds a message in the dialog that the transfer was

successful, and updates the Status field.
5. When your survey session is finished, or you no longer
want to transfer data, click [Stop] and close the program.

SURVEY LOG
The SURVEY LOG program runs simultaneously with HYPACK®
SURVEY and generates a log sheet for your survey session based
on the main vessel.
1. Open the SURVEY LOG. Select SURVEY-SURVEY LOG from
the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM shell menu.
FIGURE 69. SURVEY LOG Interface

3- 80 Survey
SURVEY LOG

2. Enter the project information in the top section of the dialog.

3. Configure your spreadsheet.
• Select columns. Right-click on the spreadsheet header
and select them.
• Adjust column widths. Drag the dividers.
4. Run HYPACK® SURVEY. You can enter any remarks as you
run the line then, at the end of each line, the program
automatically completes the record with the survey line
statistics and adds a new blank record for the next survey line.
5. At the end of each survey session. output the log
information output the log to a PDF document or Excel
spreadsheet (*.xls). Click [Export]. In the File Save dialog,
select the output file type and name your report.
When you close SURVEY LOG, the program stores the header
data and restores it when you next open the program.
At any time, you can clear the project information or the survey line
statistics using the [Delete Header] or [Delete Data] button,
respectively.
FIGURE 70. Sample Survey Log

Last Updated May / 2017 3- 81

SURVEY LOG • Printing Survey Data

FIGURE 71. Sample Survey Log in Excel

3- 82 Survey
CHAPTER 4 Sub-bottom Post-
processing

Post-processing is the work done with the data after acquisition

and before you generate your final products. It describes two
typical processing work flows, as well as the steps required for
each one.

SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSING WORK FLOWS

The first step in processing sub-bottom data is always digitizing the
seabed and sub-bottom layers in the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR.
The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR displays SEG-Y sub-bottom
data and provides tools with which you mark targets, and digitize
your layers. The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR displays the sub-
bottom profiles and converts the digitized points to the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM All format or XYZ format, which may then be
displayed with the targets in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen,
plotted from HYPLOT or converted to other formats in EXPORT.
When you create and load tide and sound velocity correction files
to the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR, the output soundings will
include those corrections.
Depending on the density of your data, and the intended output,
you may use the SORT program to thin your data.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes two final product programs:
HYPLOT and EXPORT.
• HYPLOT defines the features to be plotted and sends the
information to the plotter.
• EXPORT converts HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM data files to
other formats, primarily digitized chart files.
The Flowcharts in this section provide overview work flows for
processing sub-bottom data.

Last Updated May / 2017 4-1

Sub-bottom Processing Work Flows • Plotting Sub-bottom Data

For more information, click any program block and jump to the
corresponding manual section.

PLOTTING SUB-BOTTOM DATA

HYPLOT defines the features to be plotted and sends the
information to the plotter. It requires a plotting sheet file (*.PLT) that
you can create for your project in the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR.
FIGURE 1. Plotting Sub-bottom Data

More Information
• “Creating a Sound Velocity File in the SOUND VELOCITY
Program” on page 4-16
• “Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM” on page 4-4
• “HYPACK® SURVEY” on page 3-1
• “Sub-bottom Processing” on page 4-22
• “SORT Program” on page 4-53
• “HYPLOT” on page 5-1

4- 2 Sub-bottom Post-processing
Sub-bottom Processing Work Flows

GENERATING CAD CHART FILES FROM SUB-BOTTOM DATA

EXPORT converts HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM data files to other
formats, primarily digitized chart files.
FIGURE 2. Exporting Sub-bottom Data to CAD Charts

More Information
• “Creating a Sound Velocity File in the SOUND VELOCITY
Program” on page 4-16
• “Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM” on page 4-4
• “HYPACK® SURVEY” on page 3-1
• “Sub-bottom Processing” on page 4-22
• “EXPORT” on page 5-44

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 3

Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Harmonic Tidal Predictions

TIDE (WATER LEVEL) CORRECTIONS IN HYPACK® SUB-

BOTTOM
You can use any of the tide drivers provided to record tide
corrections to the RAW data file during acquisition; however this
data is not recorded or applied to the SEG-Y files.
In HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, you must apply tide corrections to
sub-bottom data in post-processing. You can then export corrected
All format (*.EDT) and XYZ data from the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR.
1. Create a Tide Correction file.
• Harmonic predictions in the HARMONIC PREDICTION
program.
• Predicted high-low water times in the MANUAL TIDES
program.
• Actual tide levels and times in the MANUAL TIDES
program.
2. Load it to the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR in the Tide tab of
the Settings dialog.
The important thing to remember in all of these methods is that the
tide correction is added to the raw sounding. Tide corrections
relate raw soundings to the chart (low water) datum. Since you
normally want to remove the water column above the sounding
datum, the overwhelming majority of the time your tide corrections
will be negative numbers! The HARMONIC PREDICTION program
takes care of this automatically. You have to make some mental
adjustments when entering tidal heights in the MANUAL TIDES
program.
• When creating a tide file for depth mode, enter tide values as
negative numbers.
• When creating a tide file for elevation mode, enter tide values
as positive numbers.
Tide corrections are measured in survey units.
Any sounding with a timetag before the first time of your *.TID file
will get the value of that first time. Any sounding with a timetag after
the last time of your *.TID file will get the value of that last time.

HARMONIC TIDAL PREDICTIONS

We don’t intend to teach you about Harmonic Tidal Predictions and
harmonic constituents. All we want to do is show you how to create

4- 4
Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

a Tide Correction file (*.TID) using the HARMONIC PREDICTION

program.
The routines in this program are taken from the British Admiralty
publication N.R.203. It uses combined constituent data for M2, S2,
O1, and K1. This means that the minor constituents of them are
combined into these four values. The harmonic constituents
published by the French hydrographic authorities take a slightly
different approach, so they won’t give the correct answer if you
plug them into these formulae.
In order to compute a harmonic tidal prediction, you need the
following information:
• The harmonic constituents for the desired port
• The day factors (0000H) for the day in question
• The day factors (0000H) for the next day
It needs the day factors. for both days in order to perform an
interpolation throughout the day. All of these constituents and
factors are published in the British Admiralty publication N.R.203. It
comes out every year and is divided into three volumes. One is for
the Atlantic Ocean, Caribbean, and Mediterranean. The second is
for the Pacific Ocean. The third is for the Indian Ocean ports. You
can buy these from your Admiralty chart agent.

1. Start the program from the tides icon or by clicking

PROCESSING-TIDES-HARMONIC TIDES. The Harmonic
Tides dialog will appear.
2. Enter the necessary information.
• The Date for Prediction, Site for Prediction, Mean Level and
Seasonal Correction come from the Port Factor page.
• Enter the Harmonic Constituents for the port.
• Enter the day factors (0000H) for the day of the prediction
• Enter the day factors (0000H) for the day after the
prediction
3. Save the input data by clicking [Save Tide Ref].
4. Click on [Compute And Graph]. A graph of your tide
corrections over a 24 hour period will appear. You can return to
the spreadsheet to recheck your data by clicking [Exit] or
continue on.
5. Save your corrections by clicking on [Save To *.TID]. You will
be asked for a name for the Tide Correction file. Give it a name
you can remember, one that reminds you both of the area and
the day for which the corrections are made.
In the input dialog:
• [Get Last Reference] reloads the last saved data.
• [New Prediction] presents an empty dialog.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 5

Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Manual Tides Program

In the graph dialog:

• [Print Graph] sends the graph display to the Windows® default
printer.
• [Print Corrections] sends a copy of your entries in the
spreadsheet and a listing of time ranges and their predicted
tide corrections over the specified time range.

MANUAL TIDES PROGRAM

In the MANUAL TIDES program, you will enter a series of dates,
times and tide correction values spanning the time of your data
collection. The program creates two files:
• A *.TDX file contains the date, time, correction information. It is
used to repopulate the spreadsheet if you want to reload it in
MANUAL TIDES.
• A *.TID file contains the tide correction value for every minute
of each day. It is used in the editing programs to correct your
Raw data for changing water levels.
Your tide corrections will almost always be negative numbers
because HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM adds your tide correction to
the raw sounding, but you are removing the water column from
your sounding value.

TIDE CORRECTIONS FROM HIGH-LOW WATER TIMES

AND HEIGHTS

1. Open the MANUAL TIDES program by selecting

PROCESSING-TIDES - MANUAL TIDES. The Manual tides
dialog will appear.
2. Enter your tide data. The program requires date (mm/dd/
yyyy), time (hh:mm) and water level (survey units) data for the
period of your survey. It can read up to 14400 records.
3. Select Min-Max. This tells the program to use the high water-
low water prediction algorithm developed by NOAA. The
program calculates a tide height for every minute of each day.
The results are graphed on the right. You can use the left and
right arrows to view the graph for each day.
4. Save the tide data. Select FILE-SAVE and enter the file name.
The program saves the table data to the FileName.TDX file and
the tide corrections to the FileName.TID file.

4- 6
Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

NOTE: If you are using the NOAA tide book and you are working in
depth mode, place a minus sign in front of all of your height
entries. For example, if the NOAA book shows a high tide
that is 5.6’ above gauge, you need to remove 5.6’ from the
water column. You, therefore, must enter -5.6’ in HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM.

The following is an example of using MANUAL TIDES with High-

Low Water Times and Heights.
Example: Creating Tide Files using MANUAL TIDES
Create a Tide Correction (*.TID) file using the following information
from the NOAA book.
Solution:

Day Time Height

February 13 05:05 -0.20
10:59 -3.70
13:55 -2.30
16:48 -0.50
18:00 -2.40
22:35 -3.20
February 14 5:10 -0.20
11:02 -3.60
13:37 -2.30
16:45 -0.6
18:05 -2.50
22:30 -3.10
1. Open the MANUAL TIDES program and enter the data so it
looks like the figure below. All of the NOAA heights have a
minus sign placed in front of them because we want to remove
the water from the sounding.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 7

Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Manual Tides Program

FIGURE 1. Entering Data for High-Low Waters

2. Click on Min-Max. Your graph will be drawn as shown on the

right side of the dialog.
FIGURE 2. Tide Graph

3. Save the tide data. Select FILE-SAVE and enter the

BOS_1125 file name.

TIDE CORRECTIONS WITH MANUAL OBSERVATIONS

1. Open the MANUAL TIDES program by clicking
PROCESSING-TIDES-MANUAL TIDE or from the TIDES icon.
2. Enter the time and tide correction pairs in the grid. A handy
feature with the MANUAL TIDES program is the AutoTime

4- 8
Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

feature. Enter a Starting Time and Ending Time, along with a

time increment, click [OK] and the program will automatically fill
the time column with the requested times.
Tip: It works best to include a tide reading from before you start
your survey and one after you finish so the program can finish the
tides for the period of survey.
FIGURE 3. Auto-time Dialog

3. Select either the Linear or the Spline method. The Spline

method fits the curve through your data points.

NOTE: You need at least five points to run the spline algorithm.

4. Save your tide corrections. The MANUAL TIDES program

saves your table of data to a *.TDX file and your tide
corrections to a *.TID file. The TDX file allows you to later
retrieve the tide table should there be any questions about what
values were used. The TID file is used in post-processing to
correct your soundings.
5. Save the tide data. Select FILE-SAVE and enter the file name.
The program saves the table data to the FileName.TDX file and
the tide corrections to the FileName.TID file.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 9

Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Manual Tides Program

The following is an example of using Manual tides with observed

high low water values.
Example: Manual Tides
During the day, our crackerjack tide staff reader made the following
readings of times and gauge heights.

Time Gauge Height

08:00 -3.20
09:00 -2.80
09:55 -2.10
11:00 -2.00
11:45 -2.10
13:00 -2.30
14:00 -2.70
14:45 -4.20
Your mission is to make a *.TID file named “TideData.TID”, using a
straight-line interpolation between the points. Once you’re done,
click on [Spline] to see what it looks like.
Solution:
1. Open the MANUAL TIDES program by clicking
PROCESSING-TIDES-MANUAL TIDE or from the TIDES icon.
2. Enter the values as given above. Since we are given the
height of the water above the gauge zeros, we have to enter
the correction values as negative numbers.
3. Click [Linear] and the points will be connected with a straight
line.
FIGURE 4. Tide Data with Linear Interpolation

4- 10
Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

4. Save the tide data. Select FILE-SAVE and enter the file name.
The program saves the table data to the FileName.TDX file and
the tide corrections to the FileName.TID file.
5. Click [Spline]. Your graph should now look like the following
figure.
FIGURE 5. Tide Data with Spline Interpolation

IMPORTING TIDE DATA TO THE MANUAL TIDES

PROGRAM
While you can manually type tide corrections data into the
spreadsheet, it is a time-consuming process. The MANUAL TIDES
program has routines that efficiently import tide data to the
spreadsheet.

IMPORTING TIDE The Import feature enables you to load your tide data from a text
DATA FROM A file in one simple operation.
TEXT FILE Each line of the text file is one tide record and must all be
structured in the same pattern which you will describe in the Import
dialog.
Tip: You can download NOAA tide data as a CSV (comma
separated value) text file which you can then import to MANUAL
TIDES. The program can import text files in other formats as well.
1. Access the Import dialog by clicking [Import File].

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 11

Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Manual Tides Program

FIGURE 6. Import Dialog

2. Load your text file.

a. Click [Load File]. The File Open dialog will appear.
b. Select the text file and click [Open].
3. Define the structure of each tide record.
a. Check the data elements included in your text file and
arrange them in the proper order.
• Use the ‘Ignore’ field to indicate data the editor
should omit. If there is more than one item in each line,
use [Add Ignore Field] to create more.
• Arrange the order of the fields by dragging them to
their proper positions in the list with your cursor.
b. Define the delimiter between the items in each record.
The program supports spaces, commas or tabs. You can
select one or more delimiters as required by your text file.
(The NOAA CSV format requires both space and comma
delimiters.)
c. Define the format in which the date appears in your text
file.
d. If the tide correction value in your text file is positive,
check the ‘Invert Tide’ option.
e. If there are any lines that don’t conform to the same
structure, you can omit them by checking ‘Skip Problem
Lines’.
4. Confirm the record structure you have described matches
the text you have loaded by clicking [Check Syntax].

4- 12
Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

If your defined structure is incorrect, adjust your settings and try

again.
FIGURE 7. Correct Syntax Configuration Parses All But 1 Line

5. Click [Convert] to import the data from the text file to the
Manual Tides spreadsheet.
6. Save the tide data. Select FILE-SAVE and enter the file name.
The program saves the table data to the FileName.TDX file and
the tide corrections to the FileName.TID file.

IMPORTING NOAA Historical water level data can be obtained from the NOAA website
TIDE DATA and imported into the MANUAL TIDES program.
1. Select FILE-NOAA TIDE STATION IMPORT.
2. Select the tide station nearest you.
Tip: You can get the tide station identification number from the
NOAA site (http://tidesandcurrents.noaa.gov/).
3. Enter the dates for which you want data from that tide
station.along with the correct datum, distance units and time
zone.
FIGURE 8. NOAA Tide Station Import Dialog

4. Click the button corresponding to the type of tide data you

want to load:
• Get Measured Tides
• Get Predicted Tides
MANUAL TIDES automatically downloads the requested data
and displays it in the interface.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 13

Tide (Water Level) Corrections in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM • Manual Tides Program

5. Close the NOAA Tide Station Import dialog.

FIGURE 9. NOAA Data in MANUAL TIDES

6. Save the tide data. Select FILE-SAVE and enter the file name.
The program saves the table data to the FileName.TDX file and
the tide corrections to the FileName.TID file.

EDITING TIDE FILES IN THE MANUAL TIDES PROGRAM

Tide Files (*.TID) that have been created in the MANUAL TIDES
program may also be edited in MANUAL TIDES.
1. Open the MANUAL TIDES program by selecting
PROCESSING-TIDES-MANUAL TIDES.
2. Select the file to edit by selecting FILE-OPEN and choose the
*.TDX file of the same name from the file manager

NOTE: If you open a TDX file that was generated in single-day

mode of earlier versions of MANUAL TIDES, the program
asks for the date, which it then uses to autofill the new Date
column.

3. Make any changes:

4- 14
Sound Velocity Corrections

• [Insert Row] creates a blank row above the current cursor

position.
• [Delete Row] removes the current row from the
spreadsheet.
• [Fill Column] copies the entry from the current cell to the
last filled cell in the column.
• ADJUST-ADJUST TIME: Add a user-defined constant to
each time.
• ADJUST-ADJUST MAGNITUDE: Multiply the correction by
a user-defined multiplier.
• ADJUST-MAGNITUDE OFFSET: Add a user-defined
constant to each correction.
FIGURE 10. Adjust Dialogs—Adjust Time (left), Adjust Magnitude (center),
Magnitude Offset (right)

• ADJUST-INVERT TIDES: Multiply all tide values by -1.

4. Save your file. Changes will be saved, both to the *.TID File
and the *.TDX File.

SOUND VELOCITY CORRECTIONS

Sound Velocity Corrections files are generated in the SOUND
VELOCITY program and contain depth vs sound velocity data.
They are used to correct soundings for variations of sound in the
water column. Typically, you will perform one or more sound
velocity casts in your project area. You can import the data to the
SOUND VELOCITY program which generates the sound velocity
corrections (*.VEL) file for post-processing.

In HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, sound velocity corrections are

applied in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR during post-
processing based on the data collected from a sound velocity
probe. The program assigns a sound velocity correction to each
exported sounding record based on the depth value and the depth
ranges and correction values specified in your sound velocity file.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 15

Sound Velocity Corrections • Creating a Sound Velocity File in the SOUND VELOCITY Program

In the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR, enter the *VEL file, or a

constant correction value to correct for sound velocity in the water
column. In the same tab, enter a separate correction constant for
the sediment appropriate to your bottom type.

CREATING A SOUND VELOCITY FILE IN THE SOUND

VELOCITY PROGRAM
Enter the depth and sound velocity values (in survey units & survey
units/sec) into the spreadsheet in increasing depth order. Manually
type the data or import the file generated by your sound velocity
profiler. You can use [Graph] to check for errors when you’re done.
The profiler data can be either space- or comma-delimited with
each record on a different line. It is easiest if depth and sound
velocity values are in the same position in each line.
You can enter as many depth-sound velocity pairs you choose,
however when more than 512 layers are found, down sampling
occurs, merging the layers with the most similar gradients.

NOTE: If the units of your sound velocity cast differ from your
survey units, use the Convert menu options to automatically
convert the values in one or both columns.

1. Start the SOUND VELOCITY program by selecting

PROCESSING-SOUND VELOCITY. The Sound Velocity
spreadsheet will appear.

4- 16
Sound Velocity Corrections

FIGURE 11. Sound Velocity Spreadsheet

2. Enter your cast data.

3. Click [Graph] (Optional) to display a graph the data on the
right side of the window.
4. Save your spreadsheet data. Select FILE-SAVE and name
your file. The spreadsheet data will be saved to a sound
velocity corrections file (*.VEL) in your project directory. You
may re-open the spreadsheet for editing purposes at a later
time by selecting FILE-OPEN and selecting the file.

IMPORTING SOUND VELOCITY DATA FROM A TEXT FILE

Many of you save the data from your sound velocity casts in a text
document (or format that can be easily converted to a text
document). You can quickly and easily import a text file to the
SOUND VELOCITY program.
The file can be either space- or comma-delimited with each record
on a different line. It is easiest if depth and sound velocity values
are in the same position in each line.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 17

Sound Velocity Corrections • Importing Sound Velocity Data from a Text File

The SOUND VELOCITY program limits the profile to 512 depth/

sound velocity pairs.

NOTE: You may load more than 512 SV layers from text files or VEL
files; however, when more than 512 layers are found,
downsampling occurs, merging the layers with the most
similar gradients.

FIGURE 12. Sample Import File for the Sound Velocity Program

1. Select FILE-IMPORT and a File Selection dialog will appear

for you to select your text file. The Import dialog will appear with
a display of the values from the first line in your text file.
a. If the values in your profiler data are separated by
commas, check Comma Separated Data.
b. If your profiler data is an XBT file, check XBT.
c. If the first record does not contain correction values,
click [Skip Record] to advance the program one line in
your imported file. Continue to skip records until you find a
depth/correction pair.

4- 18
Sound Velocity Corrections

FIGURE 13. Sample Import Dialog

d. Check the Accept box next to the two fields that

represent the depth and sound velocity correction
values. This tells the program which two values to read
from the displayed record.
e. Accept the data for your Sound Velocity Corrections
file.
• If your depth and correction values are always in
the same position, as suggested, click [Accept All]
and the program will extract the selected fields from
each line in the file.
• If the value position varies or if each line is not a
record, click [Accept Record]. The program will copy
only the displayed values to your Sound Velocity
Corrections file, then display the values from the next
line of the text file. This allows you to step through your
text file, one line at a time, changing the position
designations (select new checkboxes) before accepting
each record or skipping lines all together ([Skip
Record]). Continue through your file until you have all of
the values in your corrections file that you need.
f. Click [OK] to return to the SOUND VELOCITY
spreadsheet. The selected data are listed in the
spreadsheet and graphed in the SOUND VELOCITY
dialog.
2. If the depths and correction values have been reversed in
the spreadsheet, correct them by clicking [Swap
Columns].

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 19

Sound Velocity Corrections • Importing Sound Velocity Data from a SonTek CastAway

3. If your depths are not in chronological order, Sort your

depths by clicking [Sort].

IMPORTING SOUND VELOCITY DATA FROM A SONTEK

CASTAWAY
Once you have recorded a cast on your CastAway, the SOUND
VELOCITY programs provide a tools with which you can quickly
and easily import data from the CastAway into your HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM project.
Both programs convert the CastAway data to HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM sound velocity corrections files (*.VEL), stored in the
project folder.
1. Open the SOUND VELOCITY program. Select
PROCESSING-SOUND VELOCITY-SOUND VELOCITY.
2. Select FILE-IMPORT-CASTAWAY. A dialog appears with a
listing of all casts currently recorded on the device.
FIGURE 14. SonTek CastAway

3. Download the cast information:

• To download the most recent cast information, click
[Download Latest Cast].

4- 20
Calculating Sub-bottom Latency

• To download data from a selected cast, select the cast

from the list in the dialog and click [Download Selected
Cast].
The program creates a VEL for the selected CTD file and stores it
in the project folder.

CALCULATING SUB-BOTTOM LATENCY

We calculate latency by comparing data from pairs of reciprocal
lines perpendicular to an object with a well-defined edge (e.g. a
pipeline).
For the best results keep the following in mind:
• Follow the planned line as exactly as possible.
• Keep consistent boat speed. Keep record of your boat speed
for the latency calculation.
• If you are positioning with the gps.dll, monitor the number of
satellites read by your GPS. You can set your system to log
data based on the HDOP or number of satellites in the Alarm
tab of the driver setup dialog for the GPS.dll.
• Run the test three times, each with separate pairs of lines and
average the calculated latency time.
The goal is to find the correction value that will result in the best
alignment when the profiles are overlaid.
1. Collect your data. Run a line in each direction over a well-
defined object and at constant boat speed.
2. Keep a record of your boat speed.
3. Open your data in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR.
4. In each line, mark a target at the same location on the
object.
5. Close the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR.
6. In the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Map window, display the
targets.
7. Use the measuring tool to find the horizontal position
difference.
8. Calculate the latency:

(Distance between Targets/2) /boat speed (EQ 1)

Sub-bottom systems typically have a latency of 0.8 - 1 second.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 21

Sub-bottom Processing • Windows in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSING
The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR displays SEG-Y sub-bottom
data and provides tools with which you mark targets, and digitize
your layers. The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR displays the sub-
bottom profiles and converts the digitized points to the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM All format or XYZ format, which may then be
displayed with the targets in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen,
plotted from HYPLOT or converted to other formats in EXPORT.

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes two versions of the SUB-

BOTTOM PROCESSOR: 32-bit and 64-bit. Select PROCESSING -
SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSING. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
automatically runs the version matching your Windows® operating
system.

WINDOWS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR is comprised of three window
displays and a multi-tabbed dialog with all of the options with which
you can configure your displays.
Processing Win- The Processing window is the primary window. Its menu system
dow controls the data input to the display and output based on your
work in its rendering of the SEG-Y profile.

4- 22
Sub-bottom Processing

FIGURE 1. Sample Processing Window

View Tracks Win- The View Tracks window automatically displays a map view of
dow project files that are enabled when you open the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR. In the View Tracks tab of the Settings dialog, you
can configure it to show your digitized layers and targets as well.
As you move your cursor over the profile in the Processing window,
the position of an ‘X’ updates in the View Tracks window to show
your current position on the track line.
Fence Diagram The sub-bottom fence diagram shows one or more profiles
together in a 3-dimensional, interactive display. The options in the
Settings dialog enable you to customize your display.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 23

Sub-bottom Processing • Windows in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

FIGURE 2. Sample View Tracks (left), Fence Diagrams (right) and View
Tracks (right)

Settings Dialog The Settings dialog is a multi-tabbed dialog where you make the
SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR work for you. It provides settings
with which you can control the display of your SEG-Y data, as well
as the other project files that provide context in your processing;
options that control the cursor mode (digitizing, targeting or
annotation); and the opportunity to apply corrections to your
exported seabed and reflector points. You can apply all features to
the full extent of your SEG-Y data, or use a border file (*.BRD) to
focus your work within a user-defined area.

4- 24
Sub-bottom Processing

FIGURE 3. Settings Dialog

RUNNING THE SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

1. In the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM shell, enable the files you
want to display in the View Tracks display of the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR.
2. Open the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR. Select
PROCESSING-SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSING.
3. Open a sub-bottom session.
• For a new data set, select FILE-NEW SESSION (Ctrl+N).
This option provides a dialog where you will select your raw
data. The program can read SEG-Y and JSF format files.
You can multiselect individual files or create a catalog
(*.LOG) file to load them at once.
• For an existing project, select FILE-OPEN SESSION
(Ctrl+O) and choose the SBP.xml from the desired project.
The program loads the data with the associated bottom
track and digitized layers as they were when you last saved
them.
4. Modify your data set you will digitize, if necessary. You can
add or remove files from the current list.
5. Optimize the display of the acoustic profile using the
options in the first four Options tabs.
• The first time you work in the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR with data of this sub-bottom type, work
from left to right, find the optimal settings in each tab before
moving to the next.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 25

Sub-bottom Processing • Modifying your Data Set in SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

Tip: Save your settings (FILE-SAVE CONFIGURATION) to

a configuration file (*.config) which can be used to quickly
load the same settings for similar data in other projects.
• If you have worked in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR
with this type of data, load the settings from that project
by loading the configuration file (FILE-LOAD
CONFIGURATION).
6. Set your sound velocity corrections. The program defaults
to 1500 meters/second in water and 1600 meters/second in
sediment.
7. Find a clearly defined, continuous bottom track for each
line.
8. Set your view options for the View Tracks window.
9. Digitize your layers and mark any targets.
10. Save your project.

MODIFYING YOUR DATA SET IN SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR enables you to add or remove
SEG-Y files from the current session at any time.
HYPACK® SURVEY does not generate catalog (*.LOG) files for
Sub-bottom SEG-Y files. You can multiselect SEG-Y files in both
the loading and unloading processes.
Tip: To multiselect files, hold the Ctrl key and select multiple
individual records or hold the Shift key and click on the first
and last records in a range of consecutive records.
• For a new session, load the SEG-Y files you want to process.
You can select multiple SEG-Y files or a catalog of files from
the project Raw folder. The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR
recognizes an SEG-Y, SEGY or SGY extension.
• For an existing session, you can add or remove files from the
current processing session. This does not remove the files from
the project or your hard drive.
Loading SEG-Y 1. Select FILE-ADD FILES TO SESSION. A File Select dialog
Files to the Ses- appears.
sion 2. Select one or more files from the Raw folder and click
[OK].
Removing SEG-Y 1. Select FILE-REMOVE SEG-Y FROM SESSION. The File
Files from the Selection dialog appears listing the current project files.
Session

4- 26
Sub-bottom Processing

FIGURE 4. File Selection Dialog

2. Select one or more files from the list.

3. Click [OK]. The selected files are removed from the SEG-Y
Files list.

DISPLAY OPTIONS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR View Options are included with
the other tools and settings in the Settings dialog. Once you have
loaded your data, use the first four tabs, working from left to right,
to configure your acoustic profiles for optimal viewing.
Additional tabs enable you to configure the display of other project
files that provide context in your processing; options that control
the cursor mode (digitizing, targeting or annotation); the
opportunity to apply corrections to your exported seabed and
reflector points. You can apply all features to the full extent of your
SEG-Y data, or use a border file (*.BRD) to focus your work within
a user-defined area.

DISPLAY TAB IN THE SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

Use the options in the Display tab to fit the data in the displays and
choose what additional information and guides appear.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 27

Sub-bottom Processing • Display Options in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

FIGURE 5. View Options—Display Tab

Fit Trace to Window Height distributes the full range of the single
acoustic return display evenly down the display.
Align Trace With Image (recommended) shows only the portion of
the single acoustic return display that corresponds to the vertical
range of the acoustic profile.
Line Thickness: Width of the line defining the bottom track and
each isopach layer. A setting of one or two pixels is recommended.
Point Size adjusts the size (pixels) of the reflectors marking the
isopach layers.
Show Range Markers (optional) draws horizontal lines at intervals
defined under Spacing.
[SBP Channel]: Dual channel systems load separate SEG-Y
files—one for each channel, and you process them separately.
This button displays the channel currently in process.
Show Seabed (recommended) displays the thick, blue line that
shows where the program has detected the bottom.
Show Swell Correction: If the Swell Correct option is selected on
the Bottom Tracking tab, this option displays the result as a thick,
green line in the acoustic profile.
[Auto Range, TVG and Bottom Track] attempts to automatically
set the best values based on your data set. This option does not
work well on noisy data.
Display Isopach Polygon: When you have digitized one or more
isopach layers, you can color fill between user-defined layers to

4- 28
Sub-bottom Processing

highlight those areas in the profile as well as in the fence display.

The Settings dialog initially shows options for only one polygon, but
you can use [Create Additional Polygon] and [Delete Polygon]
to create and remove additional areas. For each polygon, you can
define the layers between which the color appears and a level of
transparency (0 to 100%). A high transparency allows you to see
the sub-bottom data through the coloration.

NOTE: Layers that define one or more polygons must be complete

to draw correctly. If you want to digitize more point in such a
layer, just deselect the Display Isopach Polygon option while
you do so.

FIGURE 6. Polygons (left), No Polygons (right)

Ignore delay when drawing image: For systems that intentionally

ignore the upper segment—a specified time delay—of the water
column in deep water areas. If your project includes both deep and
shallow water, your layers may not align at the transition area.
Clear this option when this misalignment occurs; otherwise, check
this option to optimize your display.
Zoom in X Direction and Zoom in Y Direction adjust the
horizontal and vertical scale respectively.
Tip: Select Zoom in Y-Direction (depth) and
use the mouse wheel to reduce data display
until it fits inside display window. Once you
find the desired Y range, clear the Zoom in Y
Direction option and continue to zoom only in the X direction until
you can see the data clearly. You can then scroll through the line
using the scroll arrows in the processing window. [80%] and

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 29

Sub-bottom Processing • Display Options in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

[100%] sets the amount of the acoustic profile scrolled for each
click.
Zoom to Fit Width automatically sets the scale in the X direction
to exactly fit the display window. It overrides the Zoom in X
direction option.
Show Targets includes targets in the acoustic profile.
Target Size adjusts the size of the target location.
Target Editing Mode: Determines whether a click in the data
generates a reflector or a target.
Annotation Tool enables annotation mode where the interface
displays the depth and the distance between each isopach layer at
the cursor location. To display the annotations at multiple locations,
click at each location.

More Information
• “Marking Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR” on
page 4-45

DYNAMIC RANGE TAB IN THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
The Dynamic Range options configure the acoustic profile.
FIGURE 7. View Options—Dynamic Range Tab

Data Minimum and Data Maximum display the range of the

signal.
Color Options: You may choose from a selection of pre-defined
color options based on personal preference.
Bipolar both positive and negative signals are displayed with the
zero signal level colored 50% gray. This works well for Boomer/
Sparker data.

4- 30
Sub-bottom Processing

Rectified shifts the negative side of the single acoustic return

display to the positive. This works well for Boomer/Sparker data.
Unipolar omits the negative side of the single acoustic return
display. This works well for Pinger/Chirp data.
Data Offset (default 0) shifts the data value by a user-defined
constant. This option is only used to improve drawing of data
outside the typical range.
Use Full Dynamic Range for Trace always shows full range of
the single acoustic return display.
Clip Trace to Match Image Clipping: If you have selected the
Rectified or Unipolar option, the single acoustic return display
shows only the positive side.

TIME VARYING GAIN CONTROLS IN THE SUB-

BOTTOM PROCESSOR
Time Varying Gain (TVG) controls enable you to adjust the TVG
levels over the range of the data to optimize your acoustic profile.
With the Enable TVG option checked, you can experiment with
different settings—alternately changing the settings then applying
them—until your you are satisfied.
FIGURE 8. View Options—TVG Tab

Enable TVG allows the settings in this tab to affect the acoustic
profile.
Gain multiplies the strength of the data rendering. As gain
increases, the single acoustic return widens and the acoustic
profile gets darker.
TVG Mode: Choose the mode with which TVG is adjusted. The
white line in the single acoustic return display shows the
adjustment across the display in either mode.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 31

Sub-bottom Processing • Display Options in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

• Exponential, for pinger or CHIRP data, mathematically

calculates a regular adjustment based on the user-defined
slope. The higher the slope, the more delay before it applies
any TVG, but when it does, it increases the strength of the TVG
over a shorter time.
• User-Defined, for boomer, sparker or airgun data, enables you
to manually set the adjustment over the full length of the single
acoustic return. Click and drag any point on the adjustment
indicator left or right to customize the adjustment over the
length of your return.
When the TVG curve is set correctly it should fill most of the
oscilloscope window (left) with the highest peaks clipped at the
edge of the display.
[Export TVG] saves your manual TVG settings so you can
reproduce them later. They are stored, by default, to
CurrentLineName.TVG in your project folder.
Use [Import TVG] to reload your saved TVG settings.
FIGURE 9. TVG Settings—Exponential

4- 32
Sub-bottom Processing

FIGURE 10. TVG Settings—User-Defined

FREQUENCY FILTER IN THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
The frequency filter removes all data outside of the user-defined
range. These are the same filters as were used to improve the
display in the sub-bottom device window during acquisition.
Tip: To see where the data range is, move the cursor over the
profile display.
FIGURE 11. View Options—Frequency Filter

Enable Bandpass allows the filter settings on this tab to affect the
acoustic profile.
• Low Frequency Cutoff and High Frequency Cutoff define
the range of power to display. The recommended starting point

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 33

Sub-bottom Processing • Corrections in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

for filtering sub-bottom data is a low pass start frequency of half

of the sub-bottom transmit frequency and a high pass end
frequency of double the sub-bottom transmit frequency.

NOTE: Generally, additional band pass filtering should not be

applied to Chirp data due to the match filtering and
correlation that is applied to the signal arrivals by the
sub-bottom profiler manufacturer.

Cutoff Sharpness rounds the curve for the cutoff range. The
Power Spectrum display shows the defined cutoff range (orange)
overlaid on a sample return.
[Apply Filter] updates your displays according to the current
settings.

CORRECTIONS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR can apply one or more of the
following corrections to the exported data.

IMPORTANT: Corrections can affect the drawing in the scrolling data

window, so it is important to apply them before you begin to
digitize your layers.

• Sound Velocity and Tide corrections are applied to the

digitized depths. When you include these corrections, the SUB-
BOTTOM PROCESSOR exports corrected data.
• Latency is included in the SEG-Y data; however, you can
correct any latency errors by entering the correct information in
the latency tab.
• Layback: Use these options only when your data is not
corrected for layback. Data logged in HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM includes layback correction from the towfish driver.

SOUND VELOCITY Sound velocity corrections are used when the SUB-BOTTOM
CORRECTIONS PROCESSOR exports your digitized data. The conversion of the
depth measured in milliseconds to depth in survey units for your
exported data files requires accurate sound velocity information.
The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR enters default sound velocity
corrections for both water (1500 meters/second) and sediment
(1600 meters/second), but you can manually enter new values.
Alternatively, for the water column only, you can enter a Sound
Velocity Correction file (*.VEL) based on a sound velocity cast and
created in the SOUND VELOCITY program.

4- 34
Sub-bottom Processing

TIDE You can use any of the tide drivers provided to record tide
CORRECTIONS corrections to the RAW data file during acquisition; however this
data is not recorded or applied to the SEG-Y files.
In HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, you must apply tide corrections to
sub-bottom data in post-processing. You can then export corrected
All format (*.EDT) and XYZ data from the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR.
1. Create a Tide Correction file.
• Harmonic predictions in the HARMONIC PREDICTION
program.
• Predicted high-low water times in the MANUAL TIDES
program.
• Actual tide levels and times in the MANUAL TIDES
program.
2. Load it to the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR in the Tide tab of
the Settings dialog.
The important thing to remember in all of these methods is that the
tide correction is added to the raw sounding. Tide corrections
relate raw soundings to the chart (low water) datum. Since you
normally want to remove the water column above the sounding
datum, the overwhelming majority of the time your tide corrections
will be negative numbers! The HARMONIC PREDICTION program
takes care of this automatically. You have to make some mental
adjustments when entering tidal heights in the MANUAL TIDES
program.
• When creating a tide file for depth mode, enter tide values as
negative numbers.
• When creating a tide file for elevation mode, enter tide values
as positive numbers.
Tide corrections are measured in survey units.
Any sounding with a timetag before the first time of your *.TID file
will get the value of that first time. Any sounding with a timetag after
the last time of your *.TID file will get the value of that last time.

FIGURE 12. View Options—Tide Tab

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 35

Sub-bottom Processing • Corrections in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

1. Select the Apply Tide File to Reflectors option.

2. Load your tide corrections file. Click [Select File] and choose
the TID file from the file selection dialog.

LATENCY The Latency tab displays the current latency value and enables
CORRECTIONS you to apply a different latency to your edited data. Just enter the
New Latency value and click [Apply].
FIGURE 13. Latency Options

LAYBACK HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM uses the Towfish Depth, Distance from

CORRECTIONS the GPS to Towfish Cable Anchor Point (A-frame connection point)
and corrected Cable Length to calculate the horizontal distance
from the A-frame connection point to the towfish. That distance is
added to the Y-offset to calculate the layback.

IMPORTANT: Use these options only when your data is not corrected
for layback. Data logged in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
includes layback correction from the towfish driver.

FIGURE 14. Layback Correction Options

4- 36
Sub-bottom Processing

Perform Layback Correction instructs the program to calculate

and apply a layback correction based on the information entered in
the Layback Correction tab.
Towfish Depth and Towfish Cable Length are user-defined
constants in survey units.
Distance from GPS to Towfish Cable Anchor Point: The Y-
offset between the GPS and cable anchor point.
[Apply Layback to Existing Targets] calculates and applies
layback based on the current settings.

More Information
• “Calculating Sub-bottom Latency” on page 4-21
• “Harmonic Tidal Predictions” on page 4-4
• “Manual Tides Program” on page 4-6

LIMITING DATA WITH A BORDER FILE

In addition to your initial data selection, you can further limit the
data in your displays and in your export operations using a border
file. Use this option to focus on a defined area of a larger survey or
to limit the extent of exported data files.
These options are in the Border tab of the Settings dialog.
FIGURE 15. Settings Dialog—Border Tab

1. In the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM BORDER EDITOR, create a

border file around your area of interest.
2. In the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR,
3. Click [Select File] and choose the border file with which to
trim your data. The checkboxes then become enabled.
4. Choose the operations where trimming should occur.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 37

Sub-bottom Processing • View Tracks View Options in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

• Trim SBP to a border for display

• Trim SBP to a border for EDT export
• Trim SBP to a border for XYZ export
• Trim SBP to a border for the fence diagram

More Information
• “Border Files” on page 2-68

VIEW TRACKS VIEW OPTIONS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
The View Tracks window automatically displays project files that
are enabled when you open the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR.
The View Tracks options configure the track line data display in the
View Tracks window.
FIGURE 16. View Tracks Window

4- 38
Sub-bottom Processing

FIGURE 17. View Tracks Tab

View Tracks displays the View Tracks window.

Show Reflector #: The View Tracks display shows only one layer
at a time. Choose to display the seabed or one of the digitized sub-
bottom layers. The color-coding depends on your selection of the
Depth or Isopach option:
• Depth color-codes using absolute depth.
• Isopach color-codes using depth below the bottom track.

NOTE: To show the seabed, you must have a valid bottom track.
To show a reflector layer, you must have digitized the
selected isopach layer in your profile.

Reflector Size adjusts the size of the digitized points in the

display.
Show Targets overlays your targets on the track line.
Target Size adjusts the size of the font and target symbols.
Color Range: The reflectors in the View Tracks window are color-
coded based on this depth range. The range is defined by the
values at each end of the spectrum.
Lock Values maintain the current color range for all levels.
Force Lower Limit to Zero sets the lower end of the color
spectrum to zero.
[Reset Position] scales the display to fit the window.
[Zoom Extents] scales the display to the extent of the sub-bottom
data.
Blank Water Column omits noise in the water column.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 39

Sub-bottom Processing • Bottom Tracking in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

[Recalculate Limits] distributes the color spectrum evenly across

the range of the data set.

More Information
• “Windows in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR” on page 4-22

BOTTOM TRACKING IN THE SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

The bottom track is our best estimate of the seabed surface. It is
essential to have a clearly-defined bottom track before you
progress to digitizing your layers, as it is used to measure the
isopach and depth of burial (distance from the seabed) when you
mark targets.

IMPORTANT: A good bottom track is essential to obtaining accurate

isopach measurements.

CALCULATING THE BOTTOM TRACK IN THE SUB-

BOTTOM PROCESSOR
Use the following process to define the bottom track for each line
before you begin digitizing sub-bottom layers.
1. In the Display tab, check the Show Seabed option.
2. Open the Bottom Tracking tab.
FIGURE 18. Bottom Tracking Tab

3. Choose the basis on which you think the program will best
find the seabed.

4- 40
Sub-bottom Processing

4. Enter the Bang Pulse Duration. Typically, the bang pulse is 0-

4 ms. In this case, 5ms should work well.
5. Enter the Threshold. Click [Estimate] to let the program
calculate the Threshold. This is a good starting point, but you
can experiment with other values if you choose.
6. Apply Swell Correct. (Optional) Swell Correct removes the
effects of heave, flattening the upper surface of the seismic data;
the underlying data is adjusted accordingly. This generally
enhances the seismic reflectors, so it is recommended before
picking the seismic reflectors.
7. Click [Calculate New Seabed]. Blue pixels overlay the
acoustic profile where the program has found the bottom.
• [Clear Seabed] removes the current seabed definition.
• [Revert Seabed] applies the previous seabed definition.
8. Experiment with different settings—alternating between
changing settings and calculating a new seabed—until you
have the best results possible.
9. Smooth the bottom track.
10. Manually digitize areas where the bottom is still unclear.
(Optional)
Tip: For best results, zoom in on your data to work with a
detailed rendering of your data.
For each segment do the following:
a. Check the Manually Pick Seabed option.
b. Use your cursor to click two or more points on the
acoustic profile where the bottom track should be
defined. At the end of the re-digitized line segment, make
the final pick as accurately as possible on the “good” line
segment.

NOTE: Your digitized points replace the calculated bottom

tracking, so make the new picks in sufficient detail.

c. Clear the Manually Pick Seabed option to accept your

work.

NOTE: If the results are unsatisfactory, just manually digitize the

same segment again. The program will update to the
newest point set.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 41

Sub-bottom Processing • Bottom Tracking in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

BOTTOM TRACK TOOLS AND OPTIONS IN THE SUB-

BOTTOM PROCESSOR
To automatically find the seabed, the SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR analyzes the full length of the first acoustic return
and draws the bottom track in blue based on the options in the
Bottom Tracking tab. Experiment with different settings to find the
combination that generates the best presentation in the acoustic
profile.

IMPORTANT: Display the entire SEG-Y file in the profile window to

see if there are any areas that require correcting. (In the
Display tab, check Zoom To Fit Width to view entire line.)

Manually Pick Seabed enables you to use the cursor to digitize

the seabed bottom or segments of it. (Seabed Picking Mode
replaces the reflectors in the toolbar.) Typically, you would use this
tool to fill small gaps in the bottom defined using the automated
settings.
[Smooth Bottom] rounds jagged contours based on the adjacent
bottom track points. The smoothing width sets the number of
points considered on each side of each point.

NOTE: Smoothing removes manually digitized points.

Swell Correct removes the effects of heave, flattening the upper

surface of the seismic data; the underlying data is adjusted
accordingly. This generally enhances the seismic reflectors, so it is
recommended before picking the seismic reflectors.
If the Show Swell Correction option is selected on the Display
tab, this option displays the result as a thick, green line in the
acoustic profile.
Median Filter Seabed calculates the median of the points it initially
defines.
Basis for Determining the Seabed: The program ignores any
data in the Bang Pulse Duration and looks for the next prominent
feature:
• Find First Peak: The first prominent increase in return
strength.
• First Threshold after Bang: (recommended) The first time at
which it reaches the user-defined Threshold strength after the
Bang Pulse duration.
• Horizontal Gradient: The most sudden change of strength.

4- 42
Sub-bottom Processing

Bang Pulse Duration: Time (msec) from the trigger until the
sound source stops ringing.
Remove Outliers (recommended) ignores scattered data in the
water column.
Use Unfiltered Data for Calculating Seabed (recommended)
calculates the seabed without excluding the data from the
frequency filters.
Threshold: The strength of return required by the First Threshold
after Bang option. Click [Estimate] to get an initial value.
Ignore First Traces skips a user-defined number of acoustic
returns at the start of each line before it analyzes one to find the
seabed. Use this to eliminate noisy data caused by logging before
the system has stabilized on the new line.
[Calculate New Seabed]: Click to apply current bottom tracking
settings.
[Clear Seabed]: Removes the current seabed calculation.
[Revert Seabed]: Restores settings and data to its original form on
loading.

DIGITIZING LAYERS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

Once you have a clear bottom track defined, you are ready to
digitize your sub-bottom layers.

NOTE: The start of line is on the right.

For each layer do the following:

1. In the toolbar, select the layer number you want to digitize
from the reflector drop-down list.
2. Clear the Target Editing Mode option in the Display tab, if
necessary.
3. Use your cursor to click a series of points that define the
selected layer.
• To indicate a break in the layer, define an End Node on
the left side of the break: right-click the node and select
Toggle End Node. (End Nodes have transparent centers.)
The program then maintains a break between the End
Node and the next node to its right.
• To insert a reflector in any defined segment, just click at
the required position. The program will automatically
update the segment according to its horizontal position.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 43

Sub-bottom Processing • Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

• To delete a reflector, hold the Shift key and click the

reflector.
FIGURE 19. Portion of Digitized Sub-bottom Layer 1

TARGETS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

As you view your data in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR, you
can mark targets at points of interest. These targets are annotated
in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR and may be displayed in other
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM modules that support targets.
Targets marked in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR are depth of
burial targets, which record the isopach depth. When you close the
SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR, each target is named with its
timestamp and stored in an SBP target group in the project. Each
target record automatically includes the X, Y and Z coordinates at
the target position, the Depth of Burial, and the time and date of the
data collection at that point (Date Acquired) as well as the time and
date you marked the target (Date Modified).

DISPLAYING TARGETS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
The Target Visibility dialog controls which targets from the SBP
target group appear in the sub-bottom profile display and,
configured separately, in the View Tracks window.
In addition, the Show Targets option in View Tracks tab of the
Settings dialog toggles the display of all targets in the group on and
off. When you use this option, the column for the tracks window
updates accordingly.
These settings do not affect the targets displayed in the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM area map.

4- 44
Sub-bottom Processing

1. Select REFLECTORS AND TARGETS-TARGET VISIBILITY.

A dialog will appear with each target listed and two columns of
checkboxes: one for each window.
FIGURE 20. Target Visibility Dialog

2. In each column, check the boxes for the targets you want
to display in the corresponding window.
3. Click [OK].
FIGURE 21. Sample Targets in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

MARKING TARGETS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
1. In the Display tab, check the Target Editing Mode option.
“Target Editing Mode” replaces the reflector options in the
toolbar.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 45

Sub-bottom Processing • Exporting your Digitized Depths

2. Use your cursor in the acoustic profile to mark targets at

points of interest on any isopach. There are two methods:
• To mark multiple targets, select Target Editing Mode in
the Display tab of the Settings dialog, then click at each
target location in the data profile. When you have finished,
deselect the Target Editing Mode option.
• To mark a single target, right-click at the location and
select Add Target.
3. When you are finished marking targets, clear the Target
Editing Mode option.
Tip: Alternatively, in digitizing mode, right-click at the location on
the isopach you want to mark and select Add Target.

REMOVING TARGETS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
The SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR provides options to remove one
or more targets. Alternatively, you can use the tools in the
TARGET EDITOR.
• To delete a single target:
a. Check the Target Editing Mode option in the Display tab.
b. Hold the Shift key and click on the target.
• To delete all of the targets on the current line select
REFLECTORS AND TARGETS-DELETE ALL TARGETS-FOR
THIS SEG-Y FILE.
• To delete all of the targets in the project, select
REFLECTORS AND TARGETS-DELETE ALL TARGETS-FOR
ALL SEG-Y FILES IN THE PROJECT.

More Information
• “Deleting Targets in the TARGET EDITOR” on page 2-123
• “Targets in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM” on page 2-111
• “Targets in SURVEY” on page 3-42

EXPORTING YOUR DIGITIZED DEPTHS

The ultimate goal of the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR is to
generate sounding data files representing the sub-bottom data.
Once you have defined the bottom track and digitized your reflector
layers, you are ready to generate the sounding files. This is
actually a two-step process:
1. Enter corrections information. The SUB-BOTTOM
PROCESSOR only draws data in the SEG-Y file. Even though

4- 46
Sub-bottom Processing

you may have recorded tide, sound velocity to the RAW data
files during acquisition, the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR does
not read those files. In addition, you can correct any layback
and latency errors.

IMPORTANT: To output corrected sounding data from your

bottom track and reflectors, you must enter the correction
information in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR before
you export sounding files.

2. Export your sounding data. SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

provides several options in various combinations: All (*.EDT) or
XYZ format; current line or all lines; and seabed, reflectors or
both.
BEWARE! Once you have exported a particular line/layer/format
combination, subsequent export operations will overwrite the exist-
ing files of the same combination.
• EXPORT EDT options convert your digitized layers to All
format files, one for each layer, and stores them in the
project Edit folder. Each file is named with the format
LineName.LayerName.edt (e.g. 003_1146.seabed.edt or
003_1146.reflector4.edt).
Additionally, it generates catalog files for each exported
layer. Each LOG file is named with the layer it represents
(e.g. seabed.log, or reflector4.log).
• EXPORT XYZ options stores the digitized points to XYZ
format files, one for each layer, in the project Sort folder.
You can choose to export depth, isopach or both as the Z-
value. Each file is named with the format
LineName.reflectorR.xyz where R indicates the layer
number. For XYZ output, you may output X, Y, Depth; X, Y,
Isopach; or X, Y, Depth, Isopach.

NOTE: Though you can choose one or more values to be

stored as the Z value, the output file names for each
option are the same. This means if you want to
generate separate sets of files (for example, a set of
X, Y, Depth files, and a set of X, Y, isopach files), you
must generate the first set then save them
somewhere other than the project Sort folder before
you generate the second set.

With each XYZ output file, the program also generates a

REF file with the same root name (e.g.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 47

Sub-bottom Processing • Fence Diagrams

001_1125.reflector1.xyzref). This text file provides

information about the soundings in the file:

TABLE 1. Sample REF File

Sound speed in water: 1500

Sound speed in sediment: 1600
Output values: Depth and Isopach
UTM Zone: Zone 50
No layback correction
No tide data applied

FENCE DIAGRAMS
The sub-bottom fence diagram shows one or more profiles
together in a 3-dimensional, interactive display. The options in the
Settings dialog enable you to customize your display.

GENERATING THE FENCE DIAGRAM

1. Select FILE-EXPORT FENCE and choose the current line
or all lines.
2. In the Fence tab, check Show Fence Diagram.
FIGURE 22. Sample Fence Display—Layers Match on Intersecting Lines

FENCE DISPLAY OPTIONS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
Many of the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR options are common to
both the sub-bottom profile and the fence diagram.

4- 48
Sub-bottom Processing

The options in the Fences Diagram tab of the Settings affect only
the Fence Diagram:
FIGURE 23. Settings Dialog—Fences Diagram Tab

• Show Fence diagram displays the Fence Diagram window. It

draws the diagrams for all lines currently loaded in the SUB-
BOTTOM PROCESSOR and any other lines in the project for
which you have already drawn fence diagrams.
• Lines to Show and Reflectors to Show: Select the lines and
reflectors to include in your Fences Diagram window.
Tip: To multiselect files, hold the Ctrl key and select multiple
individual records or hold the Shift key and click on the first and
last records in a range of consecutive records.
• Background Color: The colored square shows the current
background color in the Fences Diagram window. To assign an
alternate color, click in the color square and select a new color
from the color selection dialog.
• Reflector Line Thickness Enter a value 1-10 to control the
line weight for the reflectors.
• Constant Value Transparency
• Amplitude Dependent Transparency
• Draw Scale on Each Fence provides vertical and horizontal
reference in survey units.
• [Reload Data] updates the display for changed options.
• [Save Screenshot] generates an image file of the window
display in your project folder. A File Save dialog appears with
the default image name capturing the date and time—“Fence
Diagram Screenshot yyyymmdd hhmmss.png”— but you may
provide an alternate name if you wish, then click [Save].

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 49

Sub-bottom Processing • Storing Screen Shots from the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

When you export a screenshot, the program also stores a text

file with the same root name that includes line coordinates that
describe the extent of the image, and the sweep length.
FIGURE 24. Sample Screenshot Information File

Start: 386660.540, 6457348.810

End: 386546.710, 6458406.190
Sweep length: 38.300 meters
Hold the shift key and use your cursor in the display to pan and
rotate the display.

STORING SCREEN SHOTS FROM THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
The View menu provides multiple options to quickly and easily
store an image of the current acoustic profile or Fence Diagram.
Acoustic Profile In each case, select the menu item, name your file and click
Images [Save]. You can save the image in PNG, JPG or BMP format.
• SAVE SCREENSHOT captures the current display including
the seabed, any isopach layers, annotations and targets.
• SAVE SCREENSHOT (NO INTERPRETATION) captures the
current display but omits the seabed, any isopach layers,
annotations and targets.
FIGURE 25. Annotated Screenshot (left), No Interpretation (right)

4- 50
Sub-bottom Processing

• FULL LINE SCREENSHOT captures the complete length of

the profile including the seabed, any isopach layers,
annotations and targets.
• FULL LINE SCREENSHOT (NO INTERPRETATION) captures
the complete length of the profile, but omits the seabed, any
isopach layers, annotations and targets.
Fence Diagram In the Fences Diagram tab of the Settings dialog, [Save
Images Screenshot] generates an image file of the window display in your
project folder. A File Save dialog appears with the default image
name capturing the date and time—“Fence Diagram Screenshot
yyyymmdd hhmmss.png”— but you may provide an alternate
name if you wish, then click [Save].
FIGURE 26. Sample Screenshot Information File

Start: 386660.540, 6457348.810

End: 386546.710, 6458406.190
Sweep length: 38.300 meters
FIGURE 27. Fence Screenshot of Intersecting Lines

SAVING PROJECT CONFIGURATIONS IN THE SUB-BOTTOM

PROCESSOR
A configuration file in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR records all
of the information necessary to restore your current settings and
stores them, by default to the SBP.config file in your project folder.
Tip: If you use more than one type of equipment (eg a boomer and
a pinger), you can store a configuration file for each type. This

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 51

Sub-bottom Processing • Saving Project Configurations in the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR

enables you to quickly and easily load the settings in the control
panel for whichever type of data you are processing.
To save the configuration at any time, select FILE-SAVE
CONFIGURATION and name your file.
When you exit the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR, it asks if you
want to save the configuration file.
FIGURE 28. Saving the Configuration File on Exit

• [Save] automatically saves the settings to the default

SBP.config file in your project folder.
• [Don’t Save] retains all configuration files as they were when
you entered the program.
• [Delete Config] deletes the current configuration file. When
you return to the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR, the Settings
dialog begins with all default settings.
• [Cancel] returns you to the SUB-BOTTOM PROCESSOR.

4- 52
SORT Program

SORT PROGRAM
In HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, the SORT program reads individual
or catalogs of All format files, or XYZ format files, and saves the
final results to an ASCII XYZ file. You may sort based only on
horizontal positioning (2D sort) for cartographic selection, or based
on both horizontal and vertical (3D sort) for 3-dimensional data
displays.

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes two versions of SORT: 32-bit

and 64-bit. Select PROCESSING-SOUNDING SELECTION-
SORT. HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM automatically runs the version
according to your Windows® operating system.

TABLE 1. Advantages and Disadvantages of Sort

Advantages to SORT • It guarantees the minimum

soundings will be placed on the
smooth sheet at their proper
locations.
Disadvantages to SORT • It does not place soundings as
an eye-pleasing constant
interval.

RUNNING THE SORT PROGRAM

1. Start the SORT program by selecting PROCESSING-
SOUNDING SELECTION-SORT from the menu bar.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 53

SORT Program • Running the SORT Program

FIGURE 1. The Main Window of SORT

2. Enter specifications for the sort process.

3. Begin the sort process by clicking [Sort]. Upon completion, it
shows the Minimum and Maximum Depths encountered during
the sorting process and statistics about the sorting of your data.

4- 54
SORT Program

FIGURE 2. Statistics of the Sort

FIGURE 3. Results of a 2D Sort (left) vs 3D Sort (right)

SORT OPTIONS
• Input File: SORT supports any of the following file types:
• All format: You can load one or more All format individual
data files, or a Catalog File (*.LOG) of All format data.
• XYZ
All data files are listed in the Data Files display. Those that are
enabled in the list will be included in the sort.
To toggle the enable status for each file, right-click on it then
select or deselect the enable option.
• Choose to sort in two or three dimensions. Select the 3-
Dimensional Sort option to sort in three dimensions. Clear the
same checkbox for a 2-dimensional sort.
• Sort Mode:
• New Sort with Partitions divides the data set and sorts
each portion individually. In each partition, it looks for the
minimum sounding in two or three dimensions according to
the options you set in the dialog. It saves this sounding to a
temporary file and eliminates any data point that is within a
user-specified distance. It then repeats the process until all

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 55

SORT Program • Sort Options

points in the file have been saved to the temporary file or

eliminated. When all data is sorted, the program merges
the results
Advantage: Fewer points are loaded into memory at once
so it’s better for large data sets and for sharing resources
with other processes running on the computer.
Disadvantage: It has to parse the input data for each
partition.
• Original Sort (No Priority, No CHN) sorts the data by input
file then sorts the results again to get the overlapping data.
Disadvantage: If the input data file is very big, the program
becomes increasingly slower as it uses more system
resources and has more data to process.
• Original Sort with Priority allows you to give selected files
priority over others in the context of the Original SORT
routine. The files that have priority are sorted first. Then,
when compared to other non-priority data, priority data is
kept regardless of the comparison result.
To mark data files with priority right-click on them and
select Priority from the right-click menu. Priority files will be
red in the Data Files list.
• Original SORT with CHN Priority assigns priority to the
soundings that fall within the boundaries of any flat surfaces
in a specified Advanced Channel file (*.CHN).
To enter the CHN file for comparison, click the
corresponding [...] and browse for the correct channel file.
Tip: If you need priority, for larger files and data sets, use
partitions. For smaller data sets, the original SORT
algorithm will probably be a little better.
• Radius or X,Y distances are the basis for the SORT program
to eliminate conflicting data points. Select the sort type and
specify the Protection Values.
• In a Radius type sort, the program eliminates any other
data record that is within the radial distance in any direction,
of the accepted point. This 3-dimensional sort method is
particularly useful where your data set has steep slopes.
• In the XY type sort, it eliminates any point that is closer in
Easting than the DX distance or closer in Northing than the
DY distance. This 2-dimensional sort method will eliminate
more soundings on steep slopes, which may cause you to
lose some definition in your terrain.
Tip: Normally, Radius is preferred. DX-DY is preferable if
you have long numbers, such as magnetometer data where
you want to protect a larger direction in one axis than the
other.

4- 56
SORT Program

• The Depth Input can either be Hi Frequency (Depth 1) or Low

Frequency (Depth 2).
• Depth Mode: Enter whether you are in depth or elevation
mode. This assures that Sort will always output the minimum
depths. In elevation mode, Convert to Final Elevation may be
selected to record the Chart Datum Level minus Final Depth
• Sorted File Name: Click the [...] and enter a name for the
output file. The SORT program will write an ASCII XYZ output
file to the Sort folder.
• One Output File per Input File: SORT generates one XYZ
output file for each input named
InputFileName_Mode_TypeSize. Mode reflects the selected
sort mode: New, Old, Priority, or CHN. TypeSize represents the
integer value of the radius or the DX value.
• Golden Soundings: SORT generates golden soundings for all
soundings shoaler than the user-defined Target Depth/
Elevation.
• Rejected Data File: In addition to the sorted file, you can also
save the “rejected” soundings to a second “*.XYZ” file. This is
useful where you want to have the final sorted soundings in
one CAD layer and the surrounding soundings (rejected data)
on a second layer.

Last Updated May / 2017 4- 57

SORT Program • Sort Options

4- 58
CHAPTER 5 Final Products

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM includes two final product programs:

HYPLOT and EXPORT.
• HYPLOT defines the features to be plotted and sends the
information to the plotter.
• EXPORT converts HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM data files to
other formats, primarily digitized chart files.

HYPLOT
HYPLOT defines the features to be plotted and sends the
information to the plotter.
FIGURE 1. HYPLOT Interface

Last Updated May / 2017 5-1

HYPLOT • Running HYPLOT

The HYPLOT interface is much like the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

window. HYPLOT automatically loads all of the files that are loaded
to the project and draws all that are enabled in the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM area map and are located within the area defined
by your plotting sheet file. From there, you can draw and erase
them from the screen, and define display settings in much the
same manner as you do in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM.
Items that may be included in your plotting sheet, but have no fixed
position, such as the North Arrow, imported text and graphics, are
initially positioned in your plotting sheet using the appropriate
settings dialog. You can easily relocate them by dragging them
with your cursor in the HYPLOT display (or by entering coordinates
in the control panel). The status bar displays the current cursor
position with the current zoom scale relative to the plotting sheet
size.
The finished results can be plotted on any Windows® driven plotter
or printer.

More Information
• “Creating Plotting Sheets in the Plotting Sheet Editor” on
page 4-67

RUNNING HYPLOT
The procedure is very simple:
1. Verify that you have created an appropriate plotting sheet
file (*.PLT) for your desired output. These files are created in
the PLOTTING SHEET EDITOR and define the area to be
plotted, the size of your Plotting Sheet and the scale and
rotation of your sheet.
2. Start the HYPLOT program by selecting FINAL PRODUCTS-
HYPLOT.
3. Load the Plotting Sheet File.
• If you have no PLT file in your project, HYPLOT will ask
you to create one and close.
• If you have only one in your project, it will be
automatically loaded.
• If you have more than one PLT, the program will ask
which you want to use.
The HYPLOT screen will appear displaying all of the enabled
files in your project.

5- 2 Final Products
HYPLOT

Tip: Use alternative drag-and-drop loading: drag a plotting

sheet file (*.PLT) from the Project Files list to the HYPLOT icon
on the tool bar.
4. Draw all the files you want to plot in the Plot Design
window.
• Enable the files you want to plot by right-clicking on the
file name in the lists at the left and selecting Enable.
When single beam raw or All format files are enabled in
a project, you can choose to draw the soundings, track
lines or both.
For binary data files (HSX, HS2, HS2X), you can draw only
track lines.
To make your choice, right-click on the data folder and
select ‘Enable Soundings’ or ‘Enable Track lines’ (or both).

NOTE: Track lines can not be displayed for XYZ files as

there is no track line information available in this
format.

• Remove any files you do not wish to plot by right-

clicking on the file name in the lists at the left and clearing
the Enable option.
Tip: To disable all project or data files of a selected type,
select the folder in the Files list then select DRAW-DISABLE
FILES from the menu.
5. Define your display settings. Each type of file has a
corresponding tab in the Control Panel where you can choose
how they will be displayed.
6. Save your settings. (Optional) Click [Save Template] and
name your file. All of the settings are saved, by default to
a*.HYT file in the \\HYPACK Sub-bottom\Templates folder and
can be reloaded at a later time by clicking [Load Template] and
selecting the HYT file.
7. Choose your plotting method. Select FILE-PRINT and select
to plot a composite of raster and vector drawings or plot pure
vector data directly. When you click [OK], the Windows® Page
Setup dialog automatically appears.
8. Enter your Page Setup information. (This can also be
accessed by selecting FILE-PAGE SETUP. )
9. Export your plot. Typically, you send it to the printer or plotter
by selecting FILE-PLOT and selecting your printer or plotter
settings and clicking [OK]. You may also generate DXF charts
or georeferenced PDF and TIF files.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 3

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

SETTING DISPLAY OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

Menus and Tool- The Draw and View menus, as well as the Icon Bar (top) and
bars Screen Control Bar (right) of HYPLOT provide many of the
standard display controls:
• Designate the display of certain features in the plot itself
• Adjust the HYPLOT screen view
• Save and print your plotting sheet
Control Panel The Control Panel (F9) defines your plotting settings for each type
of file. Select a feature from the tree view of categories on the left
and the related display options will be available for viewing and
modification on the right. At any time, you can set the current
settings, for all feature types, as your default by clicking [Save as
Default]. If you then make changes and want to reload the default
settings, you can easily return to those settings by clicking
[Restore Default].
TIP: Don’t be too worried about exactly positioning features such as
added text, title blocks, the north arrow, etc. You can use the
cursor to drag them to the exact position with your cursor in the
HYPLOT display.
The Plotting Sheet Information icon accesses a tabbed
report form which displays the Control Panel settings in
textual form. Each tab displays information on a particular
type of input to your plotting sheet. You can print the content of
each tab on your default printer or save it to a text file.
FIGURE 2. Plotting Sheet Information—Sheet Info Tab

The All Tab combines all the data from the other tabs into one,
thus you can focus on only 1 feature or the entire sheet.

5- 4 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 3. Plotting Sheet Information—All Tab

Border Style The Border Style drop-down menu enables easy border selection
Menu for your plot.
Sounding Colors Define Sounding Colors by selecting SETTINGS-SOUNDING
COLORS and using the standard Colors dialog.
Screen Control Adjust your screen display using the tool in the Screen Control bar:
Bar • Zoom In/Out: When this option is selected, a left-click
decreases the scale (zoom in) and a right-click increases the
scale (zoom out).
• Zoom Window: Select this option and drag a rectangle in the
window to define the extent of your desired view. The program
redraws the screen to display the defined area optimally.
• Zoom Extents: Draws the display at a zoom scale that
displays all enabled data.
• Pan: Select this option, then click in the window and drag the
cursor to the position where that point should be displayed. As
you drag, the program displays the distance and azimuth of the
cursor motion. When you release the mouse button the display
updates accordingly.
• Default Cursor changes the cursor back to the default arrow
used for most general HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM operations.
The cursor position is displayed in the status bar.

NOTE: The Lat-Long grid is displayed in the Lat-Long of the

local datum.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 5

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

• Rotate Counter Clockwise and Rotate Clockwise rotate the

chart 5 degrees.
Chart Display
Order Dialog: Tip: The HYPLOT interface supports both the Windows® Graphic
Design Interface (DRAW-GDI) and the Open Graphics Library
(DRAW-OpenGL). The default setting is OpenGL, which works
very well with most graphic cards. In the rare case that your
graphics card may render the image better using GDL, you can
easily change the drawing method through the Draw menu.

More Information
• “Project Colors in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM” on page 1-32

BORDER OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

The Borders Tab in the Control Panel describes the border of your
plot. Select the Border Style from the list. The Line Weight can be
set for the generic styles by typing the number of pixels in the Inner
and Outer fields. Set the color by clicking [Color] and selecting the
one you want from the colors dialog.
If you select the "Double Line with Title Area" option, the Title Area
options are enabled.
• Fixed sets the width of the title area to fit the Agency Title
Block.
• Width creates a title area with user-defined width.
These options are not available for the IHO border style. The IHO
border also requires the rotation of your plotting sheet to be 0 or
divisible by 90 degrees.

5- 6 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 4. Border Display Settings in HYPLOT

The custom border styles have additional display options which are
accessed by clicking the corresponding button ( […] ).
Both the Russian, Chinese and New York standard options define
several labels that appear at pre-determined places outside the
border.

CHINESE The Chinese Standard includes a Sheet Indicator--a diagram

STANDARD where your current plot is in the center. The additional fields
BORDER OPTIONS surrounding it represent additional plots of adjacent areas. This
diagram can be included on your current plotting sheet to indicate
the adjoining sheets.
To plot the Sheet Indicator:
1. Click the […] corresponding to the Chinese Standard
border.
2. Check the Draw Sheet Indicator option. The Chinese
Standard Data Form will appear.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 7

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

FIGURE 5. Chinese Standard Border Options

3. Enter the names of the adjoining charts in the fields

surrounding the solid square and click [OK].

RUSSIAN The Russian border options provide some alternative grid labeling
STANDARD choices:
BORDER OPTIONS FIGURE 6. Russian Border Options

XY Border
• Center Labels: The center of each side is marked and labeled.

5- 8 Final Products
HYPLOT

• Center Lines: Draws a line, perpendicular to the border, at

each center label location.
• User Spacing: Intervals, in survey units, marked outside the
inner border.
• Swap X, Y Labels: Sets X as the vertical axis and Y as the
horizontal axis.
• Labels: Tic intervals where labels appear. For example, enter a
10 and every 10th tic will be larger and labeled.
Lat/Lon. Border Options:
• Spacing: Distance in degrees, of the ticks marking the outside
of the border.
• Medium Tics: Intervals of these ticks can be marked with
medium-sized marks for easy reading. For example, enter a 5
and every 5th tic will be larger.
Labels: Tic intervals where labels appear on large tics. For
example, enter a 10 and every 10th tic will be larger and
labeled.
Label Options: Define additional labels to be drawn just
outside the border at 1 or more of the listed locations and at the
user-defined font height.

NEW YORK AND The New York, New England and Norfolk USACE standards
NORFOLK include a series of custom title blocks that fit side-by-side along the
STANDARD right side of your plot.
BORDER OPTIONS FIGURE 7. New York and NAE Standard Border Options

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 9

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

FIGURE 8. Norfolk Standard Border Options

Each block is represented by a diagram in the dialog.

To enter your content:
1. For each block, do the following:
a. Click the diagram of the block. Its border will be
highlighted and the data entry fields for the selected block
will appear.
b. Enter your project information in the fields provided.
2. When you have defined each block, click [OK].

CHART OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

The Charts Tab offers display options that pertain to DXF, DGN
and DIG charts.

5- 10 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 9. Chart Display Settings in HYPLOT

DXF/DGN Color options allow you to optimize its display against

other background files.
• Display Normal draws the file using whatever colors are
stored in the file. (It can’t draw color contours unless it was
created with color!)
• Display All Black and Display All White enable you to draw
them in whichever color is best in your circumstance. If you
have a dark TIF file, a white overlay would display best. If you
have an S57 chart, a black DXF might be more appropriate.
Show Dig Text Entries: If you are plotting a DIG file, you can
choose to include or exclude the object labels.
Chart Overscale Lines: Over scale Lines tell you that you are
viewing the chart at a smaller scale than that in which it was
created. An over scale chart will appear with diagonal, white-dotted
lines.
[S57 Options] in the displays the ECDIS Display Options dialog.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 11

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

FIGURE 10. S57 Options Dialog

Symbols: Choose between Traditional and Simplified.

Boundaries: Choose to have them marked with symbols
(Symbolized) or as plain lines (Plain).
Units: Displays depths in your choice of U.S. feet or meters.
Scheme:
• S52: The industry standard where the colors progress from
darkest to lighter shades of blue as depths increase.
• Bathy Blue: The reverse of S52 where the deepest water is
the darkest color.
• Red Yellow Green: Displays three categories of depth areas:
• unsafe (red),
• safe with caution (yellow)
• safe (green)

5- 12 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 11. S57 Color Schemes: S52 (left), Bathy Blue (center), Red Yellow
Green (right)

Safety Depth displays depth labels in different colors above and

below this depth.
Safety Contour, Shallow Contour and Deep Contour define
different depth ranges which will be displayed with backgrounds of
different shades of blue.

NOTE: This option is overridden by the Two Depth Shades option.

Scale Minimum displays different map features and symbols at

varying zoom scales according to S57 standards. This option
prevents your Map window from becoming overly cluttered. If this
option is clear, everything will be displayed regardless of the zoom
scale.
Two Depth Shades uses only two shades to display depths
greater than and less than the Safety Contour.
Shallow Pattern draws a pattern in the areas of the map where
the depth is shoaler than the safety contour.
Full Sector Lights includes data regarding direction and color of
lights. If this is off, you will see only the position of the light source.
Show Soundings toggles the display of chart soundings.
Visual Quality of Data: S57 charts include markings that indicate
whether the chart has been tested for accuracy and, if so, how
accurate it is. Check this option to clear this ‘clutter’ from your
display.
Draw Information Boxes: Draws S57 markers at all points of
interest. Clearing this option will provide a less cluttered display.
Load Chart Updates: When you load a base chart (typically *.000)
and there are update charts (typically *.001, *.002…) in the same
folder, checking this option loads all related chart information to
provide the most updated display.
Seasonal/Time Period Filter: Object attributes may specify time
ranges when they would be most applicable to display. Check this

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 13

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

option to display only objects whose attributes match the current

time.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Soundings Display: When 'Show
Soundings' is checked, this option toggles between ECDIS display
and HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM display options.
Isolated Danger in Shallow Water assures that those features
coded as isolated dangers are always displayed.
Hide Extra Contours: Omits any contour that is above the deep
contour or below the shallow contour. They are valid contours, but
do not contribute to the safe navigation of your vessel.
Text Display Groups: Charts can get cluttered with excessive
text. Select only those text features you want to see in your chart
display.

GRID OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

The Grid Tabs define the format for labeling both the lines and tics.
You can choose to plot the projection grid or Lat/Long (or both) and
set different display settings for each.

PROJECTION FIGURE 12. Grid Display Settings in HYPLOT

GRIDS

Plot determines whether you want to plot the XY grid.

Given that, the rest of the settings describe how it will appear.
Inside: Grid labels plot inside the border parallel to the grid lines.
Otherwise, they plot perpendicular to the grid lines outside the
border.

5- 14 Final Products
HYPLOT

Style is a choice of drawing the lines or tics at the user-specified

spacing. If you plot tics, Tic Length determines their size.
Projection Spacing determines the distance between grid lines or
tics.
• Automatic Spacing adjusts according to the zoom factor to
provide a useful display.
• Fixed Spacing keeps the grid markings at the constant
distance defined in the corresponding field.
Label Projection selects which sides of the plotting sheet will
display grid labels.
Tip: We find that Left and Bottom works well.
Auto Font Size automatically sizes the labels to fit the number of
grid lines specified. The labels will be as large as possible and still
fit side by side on your plotting sheet.
Labels can display as X,Y or E, N.
Line Weight sets the thickness of the lines or tics.
[Font] displays the standard Windows® Font dialog for you to
adjust the appearance of the grids and grid labels. Sample results
of each change can be viewed in the area below each set of
buttons.

LAT./LON. GRIDS HYPLOT enables you to display WGS-84 or Local Lat./Lon.. Their
setup tabs are identical.
FIGURE 13. Grid Display Settings in HYPLOT

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 15

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

Lat/Lon. Grid settings are the same as Projection Grid settings,

but the Format options replace the Labels option.
Format defines how the Lat./Lon. positions are expressed and
whether to use the common symbols for degrees, minutes and
seconds. If you choose not to use symbols, HYPLOT inserts a
dash to separate the values.

TRACK LINE OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

The Track Lines Tab affects the drawing and labeling of events and
track lines. You can toggle the display of track lines to the screen
by right-clicking the data file folder in the list at the upper left and
selecting Enable Track Lines.
FIGURE 14. Track Line Options in HYPLOT

Draw Event Symbol draws a circle at each event location with the
user-defined label. You can choose to label your track lines with
the Event Numbers or the Time of the soundings. You may label
every event (Label Increment=1) or at even intervals by entering an
integer greater than one.
Event Increment defines how often the event marks will be
labeled. An increment of 1 means every event mark is labeled. An
increment of 5 means every 5th event mark is labeled.
Event Labels tells the program whether to label with Event
Number or Event Time.
Label Orientation sets the angle at which event labels will be
drawn. Elect to label events Perpendicular or Parallel to the
planned line, or define another angle. Fixed Angle is the angle the
text is drawn relative to the map window. (It is unrelated to the map
orientation.)
[Font] is used to determine the color and font of the event labels.

5- 16 Final Products
HYPLOT

Draw File Name enables you to label the track lines with its file
name.
File Name Orientation affects track line labels in the same manner
as the Label Orientation affects the event labels.
Draw Additional Track Lines enables drawing the track lines of
up to 6 vessels (positioning systems) to the screen. We all know
that towfish don't follow the same track of the vessel towing it. Now
you can see both track lines accurately displayed. Track line 1 will
always belong to the vessel designated as the main vessel in
Survey.

More Information
• “Specifying the Main Vessel in SURVEY” on page 3-27

SOUNDINGS IN HYPLOT
The Soundings Tab enables you to set how the soundings are
presented and plotted.
To toggle the display of the soundings, right-click the data file
folder and select ‘Enable Soundings’.

To enable and disable the golden sounding display, right-click

Golden Soundings in the HYPLOT Project Files list and select or
deselect the Enable Golden Soundings option.
FIGURE 15. The Soundings Tab

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 17

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

Orientation draws XYZ data at a user-specified angle relative to

the first LNW file listed in the project files list. Elect to plot
soundings:
• Perpendicular to the planned line,
• Parallel to the planned line
• At a user-defined Fixed Angle. This is the angle the text
appears relative to the map window. (It is unrelated to the map
orientation.) Any angle from -360 to +360 is permissible

Style: Choose the format with which to write your sounding.

• Decimal Point on the Mark (USACE) option places the
decimal point at the location of the sounding and writes a
normal size fraction.
• Cartographic (IHO) centers the integer portion of the sounding
at the sounding location and then writes a smaller, lower
fraction.
• Spanish Navy (IHM) places the decimal point at the location of
the sounding and then writes a smaller, lower fraction.
• Pixel: represent the location of each sounding with a color-
coded Pixel (dot) of a user-defined size.
• Russian: The sounding location is marked with a dot with the
sounding value from the TIN MODEL Input file to its right. If you
have a second TIN model, the depth from the Additional file
appears left of the sounding position.

Color: Defines predefined sounding color settings (Black or

ECDIS) or the value HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM is color-coded
according to a user-defined palette.
When you select the Color by Depth option, click [Color Table] to
assign and configure the color palette in the COLOR EDITOR from
within the Control Panel. This also affects the palette displayed in
the Color Bar.
• Black: HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM ignores the project colors
and draws all soundings in black.
• Color By File enables you to set specific colors for each
catalog or individual file through the right-click menus in the
Project Items list. Files loaded as part of a catalog all inherit the
color of the catalog. When you assign a color to a file, the file
name appears in the same color in the Project Items list.

NOTE: To color individual files, you must first load them to the
project separately.

5- 18 Final Products
HYPLOT

• ECDIS Colors: HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM ignores the project

colors and draws all soundings according to ECDIS
convention.
• Color by Depth colors your data based on the Z-values.
Configure your palette according to your expected Z range.

These changes only affect this session of HYPLOT.

Resolution enables you to specify soundings to either one 1
Decimal (Tenths) resolution or 2 Decimal (Hundredths) resolution.
Rounding enables you to determine how the soundings are
presented.
• None displays the soundings decimal places according to the
resolution setting.
• Truncate to Tenth just leaves off the hundredth digit. For
example, 6.97 is written as 6.9.
• HYPACK:
• Depth below Nearest Tenth value: Round to nearest tenth
using a x.05 rounding point (e.g 12.46 -> 12.5)
• Depth below Nearest Half value: Round using 3 rounding
points:
<x.3 =x.0 (e.g 42.28 -> 42.0)
<=x.8 = x.5 (e.g. 42.6 -> 42.5)
> x.8 = (x + 1).0 (e.g. 42.83 -> 43.0)
• Depth above Nearest Half value: Round to a whole
number using x.8 rounding point (e.g. 123.7 -> 123.0, but
123.8 -> 124.0).
• ROK Rules (Republic of Korea):
• Depth < the specified Nearest Tenth threshold, it is
displayed at the specified decimal resolution.
• Depth >= 31, it is truncated to a whole value, otherwise it is
truncated to the first decimal.

NOTE: The rule stated 31 meters as the whole value threshold

but, if you are using depths in feet, the threshold will be
interpreted as 31 feet by the sounding engine.

• UKHO Rules (United Kingdom Hydrographic Office):

• Depth < 0: Drying Heights are rounded nearest tenth using
a x.03 threshold.
• Depth below Nearest Tenth value: Round to nearest tenth
using a x.08 threshold.
• Depth below Nearest Half value: Output x.0 or x.5 using a
x.5 threshold.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 19

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

• Depth above Nearest Half value: Round to a whole

number using a x.75 threshold.
• NOAA (National Oceanographic and Atmospheric
Administration):
• Depth < 0: Drying Heights are rounded to nearest whole
number using a x.5 threshold.
• Depth below Nearest Tenth value: Round to nearest tenth
using a x.075 threshold.
• Above Nearest Tenth (Nearest Half not used) Round to a
whole number using a x.75 threshold.
• AHOI (Australian Hydrographic Office):
• Depth < 31: (designed for meters) Display in Tenths, round
at a x.065 threshold.
• Depth >= 31: Display as a whole number, round at a x.65
threshold.
[Test Rounding] provides a quick test platform to aid in
understanding how your current settings affect your sounding
display, and to ensure that the rounding rules have been
implemented correctly. Just enter any sounding value in the dialog
provided and see the display value based on the current option set.

The Options settings contain the following items:

• Negative Soundings get "+" does just that. If you have
processed your sounding data in elevation mode (z values are
negative), this setting will display them on the screen in depth
mode (z values are positive).
• Hide Soundings Above a user-defined level plots only
soundings deeper than the specified depth.
• Hide Soundings Below a user-defined level plots only
soundings shoaler than he specified depth.
• Depth 1 Text and Depth 2 Text (HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
Control Panel only) are the terms by which you, personally, call
the depths in a dual frequency data string. If you prefer a term
other than ’Depth 1’ and ‘Depth 2’, enter them in the fields
provided. Your terms will then replace ‘Depth 1’ and ‘Depth 2’ in
this and other HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM dialogs.

NOTE: These labels have not been fully implemented . They

occur initially in the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM and
HYPLOT Control Panels, and in the SB SELECTION
program.

The Plot Depth options are used to tell the plotting program which
depth to present.

5- 20 Final Products
HYPLOT

• Plot High Frequency plots depth 1.

• Plot Low Frequency plots depth 2.
• Plot Difference plots Depth 2-Depth 1. This may provide a
general idea of the thickness of bottom material.

Draw Mode: Select a method and set the corresponding

]\

parameters.
• Fonts: [Font] displays the Windows® Font dialog where you
can set font, and font size for bit-map style text. (Ignore the
remaining options; HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM does.)
• For Vector text, select the Vector option and enter a Vector
Size that appears as you wish.

MATRIX OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

The Matrix Tab enables you to choose to plot your matrix border,
the depths (if it is a filled matrix) or both.
Paint Matrix Depths toggles the matrix depth data on and off.
The [Matrix Border Color] displays a color selection dialog to
customize the color of the matrix border.
Matrix Display: Matrix files contain two depths for each matrix cell:
the predredge Survey Depth and the Dredge Depth. The matrix
display options enable you to plot either depth value or the
difference between them (Dredge Depth – Survey Depth or Survey
Depth - Dredge Depth).

NOTE: If you have a HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM matrix file, select

Survey Depth. The Dredge Depth and Difference options
will display an empty matrix.

If you have a Seabed ID matrix from SEABED MAPPER, select

Seabed ID to color the matrix based on your seabed colors.

NOTE: With SEABED MAPPER, you can also store your seabed
colors to a HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM color file (*.HCF). To
display seabed ID colors, you must load this color file as
your project colors.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 21

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

FIGURE 16. Matrix Options in HYPLOT

More Information
• “Matrix Files (*MTX) in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM” on
page 2-108
• “Matrix Files in SURVEY” on page 3-51

PLANNED LINE OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

The Planned Lines tab contains display settings for any survey
lines that you plot.
FIGURE 17. Planned Line Settings in HYPLOT

Draw Lines includes your Planned Line file in the plotting sheet.
Label Lines places the line name at the start of each line in the
plotting sheet.

5- 22 Final Products
HYPLOT

Label Orientation rotates the label relative to the planned line. It

can be Perpendicular, Parallel or set at a user-defined Fixed
Angle.
[Font] displays the Windows® font dialog to designate the size and
color of the line labels. HYPLOT supports only true type fonts.
[Line Color]: Click the button to select a new color from a colors
dialog. The current color is displayed in the color box.
To modify the line color, click [Line Color] and select the color
from the color selection dialog.

More Information
• “Planned Survey Lines” on page 2-45
• “Navigating Planned Lines in SURVEY” on page 3-63

TARGET OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

The Targets dialog in the Control Panel provides choices about
plotting target labels.
FIGURE 18. Target Options in HYPLOT

If you choose to plot them, set the color and font using the [Font]
button. The targets themselves are black.
Orientation sets the angle at which target labels will be drawn
when the circle target display is selected. Elect to label targets
Perpendicular or Parallel to the planned line, or to define another
angle. Fixed Angle is the angle the text is drawn relative to the
map window. (It is unrelated to the map orientation.)

TITLE BLOCKS IN HYPLOT

The Title Block Tab enables you to select one or more Title Blocks
to plot. You can plot without a Title Block or you can plot with one
or more blocks. Several Title Block templates are included in the
\HYPACK Sub-bottom\Templates\Hyplot Title Blocks folder.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 23

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

To add a title block to your plotting sheet, you can:

• Load an existing title block and modify it for your current
plotting sheet if necessary.
• Build a custom title block.
Loading a Title To load a title block to your plot:
Block Template 1. Open the HYPLOT Control Panel.
2. Select the ‘Title Blocks’ item in the list on the left. The Title
Blocks options will appear on the right.
FIGURE 19. Title Block Options in HYPLOT

3. Click [Add].
4. Select the title block you want and click [Open]. You can
select a template from the \HYPACK Sub-
bottom\Templates\Hyplot Title Blocks folder, or another existing
title block. If you choose a title block outside of the project,
HYPLOT will make a local copy of the selected title block,
renaming it by appending the project name to the beginning of
the title block file name. The new file will then appear in the list
in the Title Blocks dialog.
5. Plot one or more title blocks listed by checking only the
boxes for the blocks you want to print.
6. Click [OK] to return to the HYPLOT screen.

Loading the The SHOM title block has more complex set of requirements.
SHOM Title Block: Therefore, it has its own routine for loading and editing it for your
plotting sheet.

NOTE: To display the SHOM title block, you must also select the
‘Double Border with Title Area’ border option.

To include a SHOM title block in your plotting sheet:

1. Check the ‘Plot’ checkbox.
2. Click [Edit SHOM...] and the SHOM template appears.

5- 24 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 20. SHOM Title Block Editor

3. Check the checkboxes to select each section you want to

write in your title box.
4. Modify the text in all selected fields to make them correct
for your current plotting sheet.
5. Choose whether the selected fields draw at the top or
bottom of the title area.
6. Load the correct logo by clicking the [...] and browsing for the
correct image file.
7. Set the Paper Size to A0 or A3.
8. When you are satisfied, click [OK] to return to the Control
Panel.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 25

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

More Information
• “Creating a Custom Title Block Title Block Editor” on
page 5-33
• “Border Options in HYPLOT” on page 5-6

IMPORT OF GRAPHICS IN HYPLOT

The Import of Graphics tab enables you to import image files to
your plots. This enables you to include your company logo, a
plotting sheet layout graphic or any other graphic in your plot.
FIGURE 21. Importing a Graphic File to HYPLOT

1. Load one or more graphic files. For each image, click

[Browse] and choose your graphic using the file selection
dialog.
2. Set your graphic properties. There are two methods.
• To set graphic properties through a dialog, highlight the
graphic you want to modify and click [Properties]. The
Import Graphics dialog will appear.
FIGURE 22. Import Graphics Dialog

• X and Y Offsets set its position relative to the lower left

corner of the plot.

5- 26 Final Products
HYPLOT

• Plot on Sheet is an additional place where you can tell

HYPLOT to include this image. It stays synchronized
with the checkboxes in the Import of Graphics dialog.
• Maintain Aspect Ratio forces the image to retain its
vertical to horizontal proportions when you change
either the Height or Width. Otherwise, you can change
Height and Width independently of each other and the
image will stretch to fit.
• If you check the ‘Opaque’ box, the image will cover any
data it overlays. Otherwise, it will be transparent and
you can see data that may be plotted behind it.
• Check Frame to draw a narrow black outline around the
image.
• To set graphic properties with your mouse:
• Position the graphic by clicking anywhere inside the
graphic display in your plotting sheet and drag it to its
new position.
• Resize the graphic by selecting the graphic then
clicking and dragging the handles any of its sides.
• Set the graphic to plot by checking its checkbox in the
Import Graphics tab.
To delete an entry, select the File Name and clicking [Delete].
To delete all of your entries, click [Clear].

More Information
• “Generating Plotting Sheet Layout Graphics” on page 4-70

TEXT OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

You can insert text other than the labels to your plot. Do this
through the text settings in the Control Panel.
FIGURE 23. Text Tab

1. Click in the Text column and then on [Add]. The Insert Text
dialog will appear.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 27

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

FIGURE 24. Text Insert Dialog

2. Enter the X and Y offsets (cm) from the bottom left corner of
the plotting sheet to the point where the text will begin.
3. Set the font using [Font] and the standard Windows® font
dialog.
4. If you want to enclose your text in a box, check Text
Border and enter the line width (mm).
5. If you want the text to appear at any angle other than what
you see in the text box, enter a rotation angle. The text
rotates counterclockwise around the bottom, left corner of a
text border (whether you draw the border or not).
6. Enter the text you want to appear under Text.
7. Click [OK].

NOTE: You can later edit your text by selecting it in the Text Tab and
clicking [Properties]. The Text Edit dialog will appear with the
data corresponding to the selected text loaded. Make your
changes and click [OK].

NORTH ARROW OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

To plot a North Arrow select DRAW-NORTH ARROW in the
HYPLOT menu or check Plot North Arrow in the North Arrow Tab.
Display settings for the North Arrow symbol include:

5- 28 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 25. North Arrow Tab

Arrow Styles provides a selection of North Arrow styles. Scroll

through the options and click on your choice.
Text labels the arrow . If you choose the first arrow style, you can
Edit the text that bisects the arrow. If no text is entered, a solid
arrow will be drawn.
Color affects the color of the arrow symbol.
Offset X and Offset Y positions the arrow on your plotting sheet
where settings of zero indicate the lower left corner.
Arrow Height and Arrow Width are the vertical and horizontal
measurements of the arrow.
[Font…] affects only the text in the North Arrow display.

COLOR BAR OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

To plot a legend of the colors and corresponding depths:
• Select DRAW-COLOR BAR from the HYPLOT menu or
• Check Plot Color Bar in the Color Bar Tab and define the
settings for its position and size.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 29

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

FIGURE 26. The Color Bar Tab

X Offset and Y Offset designate the position for the lower left
corner of the color bar.
Font Size enables you to adjust the size of the labels.
Tip: If your labels are overlapping or crowded too closely together,
select the Prevent Label Overwrite option.
Bar Width and Bar Height defines the size of the color bar. There
are two methods:
• Bar Height * Color Entries: Select this option to apply the Bar
Height to each color range in your project colors. In this case,
the Bar Height value should be quite small so the whole color
bar fits in the plotting sheet.
• Set Height to Bar Height: Select this option to apply the Bar
Height to the full height of the color bar. The color ranges will
be evenly distributed across the set distance in the color bar. In
this case, set a size no more than the size of your plotting
sheet.
Plot Color Bar toggles the Color Bar display on and off.
Labels in Black prints the color bar ranges in black. If this is
cleared, they will be printed in colors matching the color of the
range they describe.
Label first value of range prints only the upper depth of each color
range.
Black Outline borders the color bar and each color range in black.
Mode: By HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM convention, positive depths
are downward in depth mode and upward in elevation mode. In
HYPLOT all depth values are positive. Selecting Elevation Mode
places the larger value at the top of the color bar display. (Greater

5- 30 Final Products
HYPLOT

value indicates greater height.) Depth Mode places the larger value
at the bottom.

COMPASS OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

You can include a compass on your plot using the settings in the
Compass Tab.
FIGURE 27. Transparent Compass (left), Compass Tab (right)

Center X Offset and Center Y Offset determines the position of

the compass center on the plot.
Magnetic Deviation enables you rotate the compass by a user-
defined amount to show the difference between the direction to
Geodetic North and Magnetic North.
Compass Size sets the diameter of the plotted compass.
Check Opaque to draw a solid white background behind the
compass. If this is not selected, other plotted objects will be visible
through the compass.
Plot Compass instructs HYPLOT to draw the compass according
to these settings. If you prefer to omit this feature from your plot,
deselect this option.
Alignment determines whether the compass will be pointing to
Grid North or Geodetic (True) North.
Compass Color is the background color when the compass is
opaque.
Gradation Color is the color of the markings and numbers on the
compass.
You can set each color by using the coordinating [Color] and
selecting your color from the dialog.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 31

HYPLOT • Setting Display Options in HYPLOT

RULER OPTIONS IN HYPLOT

You can plot a ruler to show the scale of your drawing.
FIGURE 28. A Sample Scale Ruler

FIGURE 29. The Ruler Tab

X Offset and Y Offset position the left end of the scale.

Opaque draws it with a white background.
Plot Ruler tells whether the ruler will be drawn.

PLOTTING SHEET INFORMATION IN HYPLOT

The Date, Time and Plotting Sheet Number can be included in
your plot.
Date Time Format provides a selection of formats for the
presentation of the date and time that the sheet is plotted.
X and Y Offsets can be used to position the text on your plotting
sheet where settings of 0,0 begins the line in the lower left corner.
[Font] displays the Windows® Font dialog to set the type.
Plot Sheet Number begins at "1" when you initially open a PLT file
and it is automatically increased each time you print it. Check this
option to append the plotting sheet number to the end of the Date
Time string.
The Plot Sheet Info option toggles the display on and off.

5- 32 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 30. The Sheet Information Tab

CREATING A CUSTOM TITLE BLOCK TITLE BLOCK EDITOR

Whether you modify an existing title block or create a custom one
of your own, you work in the Title Block Editor.
FIGURE 31. Sample Title Block in the Title Block Editor

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 33

HYPLOT • Creating a Custom Title Block Title Block Editor

To create a new title block:

1. Open the Title Block Editor by selecting SETTINGS-TITLE
BLOCK EDITOR. The program will display an empty title block.
2. In the Title Block Editor, select FILE-NEW. The Title Block
Editor will appear with only a ‘container’ rectangle defined.
3. Set the Title Block properties.
4. Add the required elements to your Title Block, setting the
properties and entering the content for each one.
5. When you are finished, save the title block by selecting FILE-
SAVE and naming your Title Block. The new title block will be
saved, by default, to the \HYPACK Sub-
bottom\Templates\Hyplot Title Blocks folder where it can be
reused in future plots.

EDITING A TITLE BLOCK

If you have loaded a title block template, or another existing title

block, you may need to customize the title block for the current
plotting sheet.
To edit an existing block:
1. Select the title block to be modified in the Title Blocks dialog.
2. Click [Edit]. The selected title block will appear in the Title
Block Editor. By default, the title block properties are displayed
on the right.
3. Modify the title block as necessary.
• Set the title block properties
• Work with the elements. You can change any number of
the following:
• number
• properties
• layout
• content
4. When you are satisfied, click [OK] to return to HYPLOT.

SETTING TITLE BLOCK PROPERTIES

Title Block Properties apply only to the ‘container’ rectangle of the
title block.
1. Select the title block by clicking outside the title block in
the design area.
2. Modify the title block properties (right).
• X1, Y1: Fixed at 0,0.
• X2, Y2: Defines the size of the title block.

5- 34 Final Products
HYPLOT

• Edges: Check those edges that should be visible.

• Block Name: Name your title block, preferably something
that will indicate the content so you’ll know if it will be useful
in future plotting sheets.
• Parent Area determines whether the title block will appear
in the plotting sheet area or in the title block area.
• Parent Anchor is the position in the Parent Area where the
title block will reside. If you want the title block in some
position other than one of the corners, select ‘Bottom Left’
and set X and Y Offsets to shift the block up and right
respectively.
Tip: Alternatively, you can quickly position the title block
anywhere in the plot by selecting the ‘Bottom Left’ option,
then using the cursor in the plot display to drag the title
block into position.
• Opaque: If you check the ‘Opaque’ box, the title block will
plot with a solid background covering any data it overlays.
Otherwise, it will have a clear background; you can see
data that may be plotted behind it.
FIGURE 32. Title Block - Non-Opaque (left) and Opaque (right)

• Box Color: Click [Box Color] and select the background

color to be used for opaque title blocks.

WORKING WITH TITLE BLOCK ELEMENTS

Think of a title block as a rectangular container with one or more
rectangular elements within. The title block and each of its
elements is drawn according to the properties which you will set in
the area on the right-hand side of the editor. You can change the
content; the number, arrangement and appearance of the
elements and the display of the ‘container’ block.

Adding an Ele- Click the Add Element Icon. A ‘generic element’ will appear
ment in your title block for which you must now position and set
properties.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 35

HYPLOT • Creating a Custom Title Block Title Block Editor

Deleting an Ele- Select the element you want to remove from the title block
ment and click the ‘Delete Element’ Icon.

Setting Element 1. Select the element. It’s current properties appear at the right.
Properties 2. Set the properties as desired for the selected element.
• X1, Y1: Position coordinates for the upper left-hand corner
of the element relative to the upper left-hand corner of the
block
• X2, Y2: Position coordinates for the lower right-hand corner
of the element relative to the upper left-hand corner of the
block.
Tip: You can also use your cursor to reposition and resize
elements within the title block.
Position the element by clicking anywhere inside the
element display in your plotting sheet and drag it to its new
position.
Resize the element by selecting the element then clicking
and dragging the handles any of its sides.
• Edges: Check those edges that should be visible.
• Text: If you want text in the selected element, type the text
you require in the field below ‘Text’.
• Picture: If you want to display an image file, check the box
then click [...] to browse for the required image location.
The Title Block Editor supports JPG and BMP images.
• Text Alignment: Horizontal and Vertical positioning of your
text within the selected element.
• [Font] accesses a font selection dialog.
• Opaque: If you check the ‘Opaque’ box, the element will
plot with a solid background covering any data it overlays.
Otherwise, it will have a clear background and you can see
data that may be plotted behind it.
• Box Color: Click [Box Color] and select the background
color to be used for opaque elements.
3. Save the changes by selecting FILE-SAVE. The Title Block
Editor will automatically return you to the Control Panel.

TITLE BLOCK EDITOR DISPLAY OPTIONS

The program provides several display options that enable you to
optimize your view while you work. These affect only the display
within the Title Block Editor.
• In the Options menu:
• Units: Choose to work in inches, centimeters or millimeters.
• Ruler: Toggles the vertical and horizontal rulers on and off.

5- 36 Final Products
HYPLOT

• Snap to Grid: Automatically aligns each side of your element

to the nearest 0.625 inch [one sixteenth] or millimeter.
• Zoom In/Out icons adjust the scale by 25%.
• [1:1]: Sets the zoom scale to real world dimensions.
• WYSIWYG Factor adjusts the scale of the drawing in the Title
Block Editor. It does not affect the size of the title block itself.

PLOTTING SHEET TEMPLATES

One of the great things about HYPLOT is the extensive selection of
display options that enable you to plot exactly what you want. If you
had to configure the numerous options each time you want to plot
data, it would be a time-consuming task. However, most of you use
a standard set of options to plot your project data because you use
the same plotter and require specific chart items at certain plot
locations. If this is the case, plotting sheet templates will save you
a lot of time.
Plotting sheet templates store all of the plotting options set in
HYPLOT at the time you save it. You can then quickly restore all of
those settings, applying them to the same or to a different plotting
sheet file (PLT) at a later time, by loading the plotting sheet
template file.

NOTE: The template plots items based on the offset measurements

specified when the template was saved. If you load the
template to a smaller plotting sheet, it is possible to "lose"
chart features off the top or right edges of your new chart.

Saving the Plot- When you have configured your plotting sheet with the options in
ting Sheet Tem- the HYPLOT Control Panel, click [Save Template] and name your
plate file. HYPLOT saves your settings, by default, to a *.HYT (HYPLOT
Template) file in the \HYPACK Sub-bottom\Templates folder.
Loading a Plot- Once you have configured a plotting sheet template, you can apply
ting Sheet Tem- it to any plotting sheet (*.PLT) in any project; it can be the same
plate project area or a new location.
1. Open HYPLOT using a plotting sheet appropriate for your
project area.
2. Click [Load Template] and select the *.HYT file containing
the Control Panel settings you require. The display options
from the template will be applied to the plotting sheet (*.PLT)
and data of your current project.
3. Make any plot-specific modifications. (For example: do you
have to change date and location in your title block?)
4. Plot your sheet.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 37

HYPLOT • Plotting Methods in HYPLOT

PLOTTING METHODS IN HYPLOT

When you have all of your data chosen and your display options
configured, you’re ready to send it to the plotter. With the exception
of bitmap-based (raster) files, such as ARCS, BSB or TIF charts,
HYPLOT can easily plot almost anything you can display on your
computer screen.
To send your plot to the plotter:
1. Select FILE-PRINT and the Plotting Options dialog will
appears with the recommended settings based on the files
included in your plot.
2. Verify your plotting settings. HYPLOT offers 2 plotting
method choices:
• Composite: This option is more reliable if your plot
includes raster data. It uses a process in memory that
reproduces the more complex features found in raster
charts.
If HYPLOT detects raster data in the plot, the dialog
defaults to this method with a resolution of 300 DPI.
Remember that resolution directly affects the size of the
output file. If your system doesn't have enough memory, or
if it's just taking too long to print, choose a lower resolution.
FIGURE 33. Composite Plotting Options

• Direct Plotting is faster and uses less memory, but it is only

reliable for vector objects. It sends the data directly to the
printer.
If you have raster data, you can choose to override the
Composite default. If this is your choice, you must also choose
how HYPLOT will handle the complex colors of the raster data.

5- 38 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 34. Direct Plotting Options

• Pixels converts the bitmap into a very large number of pixel

color cells. So many that the normal speed of direct plotting
might be completely negated.
• Bitmaps option doesn't add too much overhead, but it is
likely to generate an incorrect or unacceptable plot,
because the program can’t perform the coloration
processes required for the more complex chart displays.
3. Click [OK] and wait for the plotter to finish!

EXPORTING YOUR PLOTS TO CHART FILES IN HYPLOT

In addition to printing or plotting your data from HYPLOT, you can
output the data in your plotting sheet to CAD DXF or DWG formats,
or to georeferenced PDF and TIF charts.

EXPORTING YOUR PLOTTING SHEET TO CAD FORMATS

HYPLOT can export your entire plotting sheet to DXF and DWG
formats for our CAD users. The exported file includes borders,
labels, scale bar, compass rose and most of the other display
features offered in HYPLOT. We are not yet able to handle
complex background files, such as Ortho-TIF, BSB and ARCS
charts.
1. Click the Export icon on the toolbar and select your
output. The corresponding Export dialog will appear.
Whether you export to DXF or DWG, all of the CAD
export dialogs are the same except DWG does not include the
Version option.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 39

HYPLOT • Exporting your Plots to Chart Files in HYPLOT

FIGURE 35. HYPLOT Export to CAD Options

2. For each item listed, enter a layer name to which that item
will be drawn.
3. Select your output version of your choice.
4. Click [Convert], enter a name for your output chart and click
[OK].

SAVING YOUR PLOT TO PDF FORMAT

HYPLOT prints your plot directly to PDF format with no need for a
third-party printer driver. It georeferences the PDF according to the
Open Geospatial Consortium best practices, which means you can
open the PDF in a variety of programs, including HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM, and they will be able to recognize the geospatial
coordinates of areas on the plot.
1. Select FILE-EXPORT TO PDF. The Export to PDF dialog
appears.

5- 40 Final Products
HYPLOT

FIGURE 36. Export to PDF Dialog

2. Enter your export instructions and click [OK].

• Format: Select Raster or Vector output.
• Resolution in dots per inch. This is enabled only for Raster
output. Remember that resolution directly affects the size of
the output file. If your system doesn't have enough memory,
or if it's just taking too long to print, choose a lower
resolution.
3. Name your chart and click [Save]. The file is saved, by
default, to the current project folder.
FIGURE 37. Sample Georeferenced PDF in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

SAVING YOUR PLOT TO A GEOREFERENCED TIF

GRAPHIC
You can save a georeferenced TIF image of your plot at your
choice of six resolutions. When you choose your resolution,
HYPLOT calculates and displays the dimensions and size of your
potential image file. If the file size does not suit you, choose a
different resolution before generating the file.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 41

HYPLOT • Exporting your Plots to Chart Files in HYPLOT

1. Click the Export to CAD icon on the toolbar and

select ‘To TIF’. The HYPLOT TIF Output dialog will
appear.
FIGURE 38. HYPLOT TIF Output

2. Choose the resolution of the image and check the calculated

size of the proposed TIF.
3. Click [Output TIF]. The TIF Save Options dialog will appear.
4. Set your TIF Save options and click [OK]. The Save As
dialog will appear.
• Write GeoTif (embedded TFW).
• Write TFW file enables you to generate a separate file that
contains coordinates that describe the location, scale, and
rotation of the TIF. It is used by geographic information
systems (GIS) software for locating areas in raster map
images.
• Use LZW Compression: This is a lossless compression
algorithm that significantly reduces the resulting file size
without losing resolution of the image.
5. Name your file and click [Save]. The TIF file will be saved, by
default to your project folder. HYPLOT displays the generation
progress in the status bar and a pop-up message at its
completion.

NOTE: Plotting large, high resolution plots may require more

memory than is available in your system. In this case,
HYPLOT tells you that you are out of memory. You
should reduce the resolution and try again.

5- 42 Final Products
HYPLOT

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 43

EXPORT •

EXPORT
EXPORT converts HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM data files to other
formats. The primary formats supported are DXF, DWG, DGN and
XYZ.

• HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM File to CAD: You can convert most

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM files to DXF, DWG or DGN format.
This can be very useful if you integrate HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM data with work in CAD systems or if you want to
display them as chart data in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM.
• CAD to XYZ: You can also convert point and text objects from
DXF, DWG or DGN files (as well as a few HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM files) to XYZ format.
This two-way file conversion capability gives you several options:
• Export the sounding data from the charts (point features)
to XYZ format, which can then be displayed in HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM or loaded to several of the other program
modules.
• Append XYZ sounding data to your chart file and display all
of the data as a background file in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
or your favorite CAD program.
• All Format and XYZ to Custom FormatsAll Format sounding
files can be exported to a choice of several custom formats.
The following table summarizes the types of conversions possible
through the EXPORT program:

TABLE 1. EXPORT Conversion Summary.

Output Formats Input Formats

DXF ALL DWG Tics
DWG BRD Edited ALL Targets
DGN DIG LNW XYZ
PLT
XYZ (and ALL DGN
variations) BRD DXF
Custom Formats ALL

More Information
• “Running the Export Program” on page 5-45
• “Export Options in Export” on page 5-47
• “Exporting Map Features to Google Earth” on page 2-197

5- 44
EXPORT

RUNNING THE EXPORT PROGRAM

1. Start the EXPORT program by selecting FINAL PRODUCTS-
EXPORT. All files associated with the project are loaded in their
current enabled or disabled state to the EXPORT interface.
Tip: To quickly enable or disable all files, the File menu
includes Check All and Uncheck All options.
FIGURE 1. The Main Window of the EXPORT Program

2. Select the Output file type to which you want to export from
the Output File Format drop-down menu.
FIGURE 2. Selecting the Target Format

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 45

EXPORT • Running the Export Program

3. Click the File Open icon and name your output file. The
path will default, in most cases, to your project directory. XYZ
output formats default to the Sort directory.
4. Select the file or files you want to convert by enabling and
disabling them in the file tree on the left side of the window as
you would in the main HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM screen. Files
of types that can not be converted to the designated output
format are marked with X's.
5. Add External files (optional). These are files that were not
part of your project when you started EXPORT TO CAD, but
you want to add them to your exported project data. Select
FILES-ADD FILES or right click on the Files folder in the
External Files list and select "Add File(s)". A File Selection
Dialog will appear for you to browse for additional files.
6. Set your Input and Output Options.
FIGURE 3. Export Options Dialog

a.Click [Options] or F9 to access the Options dialog.

b. For each option applicable to your output file type on
the left, select the option and set the related options
displayed on the right.
c. Click [OK].
7. When your list is complete and all parameters have been
set, click on [Convert] (or select FILE-CONVERT). The
conversion will be made and you can see its progress in the
conversion log which is displayed on the screen.

5- 46
EXPORT

FIGURE 4. Conversion Log

NOTE: This shows which files have been successfully converted

and if, for some reason, any have not.

EXPORT OPTIONS IN EXPORT

[Options] opens the Export Options dialog where you can control
how your data is output. It is a multi-tabbed dialog. Access each
tab through the navigation bar.
FIGURE 5. Export Options Dialog

Enter your settings on each tab applicable to your chosen output

format.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 47

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

INPUT OPTIONS IN EXPORT

For dual frequency data, use this dialog to elect to convert either
Depth 1 or Depth 2 to your exported files.
FIGURE 6. Input Filters

CAD OUTPUT SETTINGS IN EXPORT

Define the output settings pertinent to creating DXF, DGN or DWG
Files and the Source File types you are exporting to them. The
Origin and Units information must only be provided if you are
converting to DGN format.
FIGURE 7. CAD Parameters Menu

CAD The CAD settings are for creating the chart regardless of which
PARAMETERS features are included.

5- 48
EXPORT

FIGURE 8. CAD Parameters Dialog

3D Position of Sounding: When any object (point, text, or line

object) is stored in a CAD file, it has a physical X, Y, and Z position
in the model. A sounding at a depth of 25.0 has a default Z value of
25.0. This option lets you manipulate that physical position in the
model as follows:
• 2D Sounding: For older CAD formats, there is no Z value
associated with the object. This is essentially the same as the
3D Sound at Level = 0 option.
• 3D Sounding at Level = 0: Stores the object at Z = 0.
• 3D Sounding at Level = Z (Default): The object’s Z value is the
actual depth/elevation of the sounding.
• 3D Sounding at Level = -Z: Stores the object at the inverse of
the actual depth/elevation of the sounding.
Sounding Text Object specifies how the object is displayed. A
sounding will be represented either by a text object or by a polyline
object (vector soundings). With this option, you can manipulate
that. The options are:
• Do Not Negate Text (Default) leaves the text as it is. If the
sounding is 25.0, you see the text ‘25.0’.
• Negate Text inverts value of the sounding. If the sounding is
25.0, you see ‘-25.0’. If it’s -25.0, you see ‘25.0’.
• Absolute Value of Text displays the absolute value of the
sounding (both 25.0 and -25.0 are displayed as ‘25.0’).

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 49

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

NOTE: The 3D Position of Soundings and Sounding Text Object act

separately. Each will consider the source depth/elevation
and make their adjustments accordingly.

FIGURE 9. 3D Position of Sounding and Sounding Text Object with Positive

Soundings

Do Not Negate Absolute Value of

Sounding: 25.0 Text Negate Text Text
2D Sounding Object: 0.0 – n/a Object: 0.0 – n/a Object: 0.0 – n/a
Text: “25.0” Text: “-25.0” Text: “25.0”
3D Sounding at Level = 0 Object: 0.0 Object: 0.0 Object: 0.0
Text: “25.0” Text: “-25.0” Text: “25.0”
3D Sounding at Level = Z Object: 25.0 Object: 25.0 Object: 25.0
Text: “25.0” Text: “-25.0” Text: “25.0”
3D Sounding at Level = -Z Object: -25.0 Object: -25.0 Object: -25.0
Text: “25.0” Text: “-25.0” Text: “25.0”
FIGURE 10. 3D Position of Sounding and Sounding Text Object with
Negative Soundings

Do Not Negate Absolute Value of

Sounding: -25.0 Text Negate Text Text
2D Sounding Object: 0.0 – n/a Object: 0.0 – n/a Object: 0.0 – n/a
Text: “-25.0” Text: “25.0” Text: “25.0”
3D Sounding at Level = 0 Object: 0.0 Object: 0.0 Object: 0.0
Text: “-25.0” Text: “25.0” Text: “25.0”
3D Sounding at Level = Z Object: -25.0 Object: -25.0 Object: -25.0
Text: “-25.0” Text: “25.0” Text: “25.0”
3D Sounding at Level = -Z Object: 25.0 Object: 25.0 Object: 25.0
Text: “-25.0” Text: “25.0” Text: “25.0”
Text X-Scale Factor: Scales the text width to the user-specified
text height.
DXF/DWG Output Version and DGN Output Version: Select the
output version number for in the field appropriate to your chosen
output format.

DGN ORIGIN AND The DGN Origin and Units are used for two purposes:
UNITS • To combine project data with previously created DGN data (the
seed file)

5- 50
EXPORT

• To specify the origin, Master Unit and Sub Unit for a new DGN
file.
FIGURE 11. DGN Parameters Window

Source enables you to select a DGN file from which you will read
all data or only the header information. Reading the data will
combine all data together in your exported DGN file.
Header Only reads the header from a previously created DGN
file—the Seed File—to the header of the one you are creating,
thus assuring the two files will overlay accurately.

Export File Source Header Only XYZ, mu +su

New DGN Custom No Yes
New DGN to overlay Existing File + Seed File Yes No
DGN
New DGN combining Existing File + Seed File No No
DGN with new data

CAD PLANNED The Planned Line Parameters set what layer (DXF or DWG) or
LINE Level (DGN) in the output file the survey lines will be and provides
PARAMETERS labeling directions.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 51

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

FIGURE 12. Planned Lines Parameters Window

Layer Name / Level Number is the layer or level your data will be
written on in AutoCAD.
To label the survey lines, set Label Planned Lines to True and
enter the Text Height and Angle Style.
Text Height is based upon “drawing units”, which will usually be
feet or meters.
Text Angle Style can either be written perpendicular to the
planned line, or at a user-defined, fixed angle.
Export Template Where Available extracts any line template
information from a planned line file to include in the exported DWG,
DXF, or DGN file.

CAD SHORELINE The Shoreline Parameters set the location and label size of
PARAMETERS exported shoreline files.
FIGURE 13. Shoreline Parameters Window

Layer Name / Level Number is the layer or level your data will be
written on in AutoCAD.
Text Height is based upon “drawing units”, which will usually be
feet or meters.

CAD SOUNDING The Sounding Parameters dialog defines how soundings will be
PARAMETERS output to the CAD output file. The input sounding file may be All,
HS2, HS2X or XYZ format, or golden sounding point features.
EXPORT honors the project rounding rules for CAD output formats
only.

5- 52
EXPORT

NOTE: Be sure to check the 3D CAD Dimension in the CAD

Parameters. 2D DXFs contain no Z values, which defeats
the purpose when you are exporting soundings.

FIGURE 14. Sounding Parameters Window

Layer Name/Level Number displays the default layer/level name

of “Soundings”.
Soundings saved to CAD format can be saved to more than one
layer according to depth ranges or source file names.
To create layers based on depth ranges, check Use Sounding to
Layer Ranges. You can elect to create a different layer for every 1,
2, 5 or 10 survey units of depth, or you can define your own depth
increments. Just click [User-Defined] and enter your depth ranges
and layer names to the User-defined Range dialog.
FIGURE 15. User-Defined Depth Ranges for Each Exported Layer

To create layers by source file name, you must first choose

whether to name your layers according to each individual data file

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 53

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

name or use the catalog file name. The following table compares
each choice where the input data is the Hal0405.log which
contains Hal0405.1, Hal0405.2 and Hal0405.3.

Option Resultant Layer Name(s)

Use Source File Name as Layer Hal0405_1, Hal0405_2 and
Name Hal0405_3
Use Log File Name as Layer Hal0405
Name
Use HYPACK Color File sets layers and colors objects based on
the selected HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM color file (project colors).
Text Height, and Text Angle Style are the same as for Planned
Lines.
Text Italic Angle affects the amount of slant in italicized text. The
results are not visible in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM; they are only
visible in the CAD program.
Decimal Places tells the program how many decimal places to
export. Truncation and Rounding Rules are taken from the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Control Panel.
Flip Perpendicular: Available only for All format files when the
soundings are written perpendicular to line, this option rotates the
text 180 degrees.
Point Objects Only places a dot at the sounding position. In a
DXF file, it will appear as a dot. In a DGN file, it will appear as a
small ellipse.
Single Object Soundings and Double Object Soundings:
• The Single Object Soundings option exports soundings, each
as a complete object on the chart layer/level with the decimal
point approximately on the sounding.
• The Double Object Soundings option places the decimal
point separately and more accurately at the sounding position.

NOTE: The Single and Double Object Sounding options are

unavailable for DGN v7 output.

Cartographic Soundings centers the integer portion of the

sounding at the sounding location and then writes a smaller, lower
fraction. If this is not selected, the decimal point will be centered on
the sounding location. If the sounding is a negative value, the
integer is underlined.
Tip: To more accurately position Cartographic soundings in your
display, you should also select the Vector Soundings option.

5- 54
EXPORT

Vector Soundings draws the soundings as a polyline instead of

text. This option improves the precision of positioning the
soundings in your display because it can better adjust for different
fonts and export styles. This option can be used together with the
Cartographic Soundings option. Otherwise, it places the decimal at
the sounding location.
Export Colored Soundings color-codes the exported soundings
according to the current project color settings. You can modify the
colors through the standard Color Settings dialog. Click [Colors] to
customize your sounding colors.

CAD TARGET EXPORT only displays the target groups (not individual targets).
PARAMETERS However, when you select a target group in EXPORT, the exported
file includes only the targets that are enabled in the HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM window.

NOTE: When you open a project with legacy TGT format target files
from earlier HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM versions, HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM automatically converts each TGT file to a
target group.

The Target Parameter dialog sets the layer/level number and

labeling information. It also enables you to input the Target Circle
Radius and the Number of Circles that are drawn around each
Target.
FIGURE 16. Target Parameters Window

CAD PLOT/TIC This routine is used to include a Plotting Sheet File (*.PLT) marked
PARAMETERS with projection tic marks and labels into a CAD drawing. (You
probably want only one PLT file enabled at a time.)
In the Plot/Tic Parameters dialog, you can specify whether to draw
the plotting sheet border (Plot Border) and grid tics (Plot Tics). You
can also enter the Distance Between Tics and Tic Size (measured
in "drawing units"—typically feet or meters), and choose on what

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 55

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

sides of the plotting sheet area you wish to label the tic marks. The
grid labels will be formatted according to the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM display settings set in the control panel.
FIGURE 17. Tic Parameters Window

CAD TRACK LINE The Track Line Parameters sets labeling information for the event
EXPORT marks on the Track Lines layer.
PARAMETERS Elect to label Events by selecting either Events (Event Number)
or Time in the Label Events field. Set the Text Height and Text
Angle Style as you did for Planned Lines. A Circle Radius greater
than 0 draws a circle at that distance around each event.
Use Line Name as Layer Name exports the track line for each
survey line to a separate DXF layer and names the layers
according to the survey line name. If this is not selected, all track
lines will be stored on 1 layer.

NOTE: This option is unavailable for DGN v7 output.

5- 56
EXPORT

FIGURE 18. Track Line Parameters Window

EDIT FOLDER Track lines and Soundings: Right-click on each catalog or edited
PARAMETERS ALL2 format file and choose to export the track lines, the
soundings or both.
Select Files for Perpendicular Flipping: Available only for All
format files whose soundings are drawn perpendicular to the line.
Check this option and, when you click [Convert], a dialog will
appear where you choose the lines on which the soundings will be
rotated 180 degrees.
FIGURE 19. All Output Options

To select the each line individually, check its associated ‘flip’

box.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 57

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

To work with multiple lines:

1. Select multiple lines by clicking the Filenames. (The files
highlight.) Use the Shift key to select contiguous files or the Ctrl
key to select multiple noncontiguous files.
2. Use the buttons at the bottom to manage the checkbox
status of the selected files.
• [Set On] checks all selected files.
• [Set Off] clears the checkboxes for all selected files.
• [Toggle] reverses the check status of all selected files.
3. Click [Export] to continue the conversion process.

ANCHOR SWEEP Anchors.DG2 represents the project anchor sweeps. When

PARAMETERS exported to CAD formats, an anchor symbol of user-defined size
(survey units) appears at the anchor drop position.
FIGURE 20. Anchor Sweep Options

FIGURE 21. Anchors.DG2 (left) and Anchors.DXF (right)

XYZ PARAMETERS IN EXPORT

If you prefer to export your data to XYZ format, use the XYZ
Parameters to specify how the data will be output. You can use this
method to convert a DXF file to a TIN Model. Just export the
soundings and polylines from the DXF file to an XYZ file that can
then be used in the TIN MODEL program. You could also export

5- 58
EXPORT

soundings from a DGN or DXF chart by selecting the sounding

level/layer and export the soundings to XYZ format which can be
displayed in HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM.
Output Format provides a choice of data combinations and
orders.
The Decimals options set the number of decimal places to be
exported with the data. The X and Y values will have the same
number of places. You may choose a different number for the Z
value.

NOTE: Reducing the number of decimal places reduces the

accuracy and affects volumes calculations.

Z-Offset adds the offset value to the Z value in your data set
before it is exported to your file. If you have selected Invert Z
Value, that operation occurs first. This combination comes in handy
for those surveying at elevations but prefer to keep everything in
depth mode until the end. In this case, if you have a depth of 20
and Z Offset of 1000, the exported Z value will be 980 (-20 + 1000).
Comma Delimited set to True will insert commas between each
field in the output; otherwise there will be a space.
Invert Z Value negates the current depth value in the export file
unless you are also exporting XYZ soundings. In this case, the sign
designated for soundings in the XYZ Parameters dialog may
override this option.
Absolute Value of Z outputs the current depth value as a positive
number.
Export XYZ Height above CHN works with the XY Height above
Channel output option to export the height difference between a
user-specified channel file (*.CHN) and the soundings. (Negative
values indicate the sounding is below the channel level.) It exports
nothing where the soundings fall horizontally outside the channel.
• To select the channel against which you want to compare
your soundings, click [...] and select the CHN file.
• To include only soundings above the channel, check the
Omit Points Below Channel option.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 59

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

FIGURE 22. XYZ Parameters Window with Output Format Options

If you are exporting CAD Formats to XYZ, EXPORT analyzes

the DXF or DGN file and displays a listing of the layers/levels in the
file and the number of convertible (point, polyline and text) objects
on each. By default, all of the layers/levels are selected (the light
bulb icon is yellow).
1. Select which layers you want to include in the exported file
by double clicking the corresponding icon in the Export column
(or by selecting the icon and clicking [Toggle On/Off]). A gray
light bulb is not selected.
FIGURE 23. Exporting CAD to XYZ

2. Choose whether to export text, point, polygon objects or

any combination by checking the corresponding checkboxes.
3. Click [Export] to continue the conversion.

5- 60
EXPORT

EXPORT converts object type a bit differently as follows:

• Point objects: The X,Y,Z values are written to the text file.
• Text objects: Writes the X and Y values of the objects, but
uses numeric values of the text as the Z value.
• Polyline Points: Writes X and Y values of each vertex, but
uses 0 as the Z value.
FIGURE 24. Original DXF Chart

FIGURE 25. Exported XYZ Overlaid on the Original DXF

CUSTOM OUTPUT FORMATS IN EXPORT

There are several pre-defined custom formats that can be selected
in the Custom Formats dialog. The ISRP, Terra Model and Tulsa
COE formats require additional information in their corresponding
dialog. GPX format has additional options below the output
selection.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 61

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

FIGURE 26. Selecting Custom Output Formats

FIGURE 27. Custom Output Parameters Vary with the Selected Output

USER-DEFINED OUTPUT FROM EXPORT

The user-defined output options enable you to extract data from
edited ALL Format files and custom format your output strings. Just
select the User-Defined option and define your ASCII output
sequence.

5- 62
EXPORT

FIGURE 28. User-defined Output Dialog

1. Select each item to include by checking the corresponding

checkbox in the list.
2. If you need to add a constant string that is not listed, select
one of the “Text String” options and type the string in the
corresponding field.
3. Arrange the order of the items in the string by selecting an
item and moving it up or down in the list using the arrow
buttons.
4. Choose the Space or Comma delimiter.
5. If you want to invert your depths, check the “Invert Depth”
box.
6. Choose whether to generate separate files for each input
file.
7. Set your KP options (Optional).
8. Click [OK] to return to the EXPORT interface.
One Output File EXPORT generates one text file for each input named
per Input File OutputFileName_InputFileName.txt. In the following figure, the
Output File Name is ‘Export’ so, when we convert 010-1114.x27,
the resulting output file is Export_010-1114.txt.

Last Updated May / 2017 5- 63

EXPORT • Export Options in Export

FIGURE 29. Exporting One File per Input File

KP Options Select the ‘KP’ export item, you must enter the information in the
KP Options section. For each sounding in an XYZ or All format file,
the KP item exports the distance from the beginning or end of a
user-defined center line.
• Center Line File: The line file (*.LNW) defining the center line.
It should contain only the center line.
• Offset: The distance either side of the defined center line
where EXPORT should include.
• Start with Last Point: Select this option to export distance
from the end of the center line.
• Kilometers: The default unit of measure is meters. Check this
option to output kilometers instead.
The program will take the selected information from each record in
the Input file and send it to the specified Output file. Lat/Lon
formatting is determined by your settings in the HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM Control Panel.

5- 64
CHAPTER 6 Appendix

The following sections include information and tasks for the system
administrator to reference after the initial installation to the
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM computer and typically before building
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM projects.
• Install your software.
• Configure your system settings.
• Importing Global Settings simplifies the process of upgrading
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM by copying a lot of HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM configuration settings that are not specific to a
particular project.
• User Permissions can be configured to limit which modules
are available to each person or group of people who use
HYPACK®.

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM MINIMUM SYSTEM

REQUIREMENTS
The following are the minimum requirements to run these
programs. Particularly if you are working with multibeam or side
scan data, a good gaming computer (large RAM, multiple CPU
cores and fast graphics) will be much more efficient.

NOTE: To run the 64-bit modules, you must install HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM on a computer with 64-bit capability.

Last Updated May / 2017 6-1

Installing your Software •

TABLE 1. Minimum System Requirements

HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM HYSWEEP®
Operating System Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 10
Processor Windows® 7,8 1 GHz or faster
or 10
RAMa Windows® 7, 8 4 Gb
or 10
Hard Drive 20 Gb 120 Gb with
backupb
Monitor Resolution 1024x768
Colors 32-bit
Dongles Dongles are USB devices required by
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to activate the
program modules associated with the
license purchased.
a. Increased RAM will speed the performance of many programs significantly. In this case more is
better.
b. Multibeam and side scan data files are very large. Depending on your project, you may need a
larger hard drive.

INSTALLING YOUR SOFTWARE

The HYPACK® Sub-Bottom program can be installed from a CD or
by downloading the HYPACK_SubBottom_Setup.exe file from the
HYPACK website (www.hypack.com).
1. Start the installation program. The following screen appears.
FIGURE 1. First Installation Screen

2. Click on the “Install HYPACK® Sub-Bottom” menu item.

The program checks your available memory on your hard drive.
If there is enough space to install the package, the Welcome
page appears.

6- 2 Appendix
Installing your Software

FIGURE 2. The Welcome Page

3. Click [Next] button to continue the installation.

4. Review the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM End-User License
Agreement. Read it carefully.
FIGURE 3. HYPACK® Sub-Bottom End User License Agreement

5. If you agree to the terms, check the “I accept the terms in

the License Agreement” checkbox and click [Next]. The
Custom Setup dialog appears next.
If you don’t agree to the terms, contact HYPACK Sales and
arrange to return the software.

Last Updated May / 2017 6- 3

Installing your Software •

6. In the Custom Setup dialog, select the folder where the

software will be installed and click [Next]. It defaults to the
C:\HYPACK Sub-bottom SubBottom folder. We recommend
you use this folder.
FIGURE 4. HYPACK® Sub-Bottom Custom Setup Dialog

IMPORTANT! If you have other HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM

software installed on the computer, do not install the
HYPACK® Sub-Bottom package to those folders
(HYPACK 20xx).

7. In the Install window, click [Install] and the software will be

copied onto your hard drive. This might take a couple of
minutes. The HYPACK® Sub-Bottom dialog shows the install
progress.

6- 4 Appendix
Windows® System Settings

FIGURE 5. Installing HYPACK® Sub-Bottom

8. When the installation has finished copying the files, click

[Finish] and the Install window reappears.
9. Close the Installation program. Click the “Exit” menu item.

More Information
• “Windows® System Settings” on page 6-5
• “Network System Requirements” on page 6-8
• “HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Licensing” on page 6-9

WINDOWS® SYSTEM SETTINGS

There are a few system settings that affect the proper function of
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM. For best results, check the following
options before you begin.
• Windows® User Account Controls
• Windows® Regional Options
• Windows® 7 Data Execution Prevention setting
• Firewall
• Windows® updates: HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, like any
software that runs on Windows® machines, uses the most up-
to-date Windows® drivers and runtime libraries. So should you.

Last Updated May / 2017 6- 5

Windows® System Settings • User Account Controls in Windows®

USER ACCOUNT CONTROLS IN WINDOWS®

User account controls (UAC) have been responsible for various
erratic HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM issues. Some of these occur
during installation. The UAC also interferes with time
synchronization capabilities. For this reason, we recommend that
you turn the user account control off.
To turn off the User Account Control:
1. In the Windows® Control Panel, go into ‘User Accounts
and Family Control’.
2. Select ‘User Accounts’.
3. Click on the option to ‘Turn User Account Control on or
off’. A new dialog will appear.
4. Clear the ‘Use UAC to help protect your computer’
checkbox.
5. Restart the computer to put your change into effect.

WINDOWS® REGIONAL OPTIONS

There are varying conventions for numerical notation throughout
the world. In the United States, we use a comma for digit grouping
(ex. 12,345) while some of our users abroad use a period.
Similarly, where in the States we use a period as the decimal
symbol (56.13), some of our users use a comma.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM uses the American convention using a
period for the decimal symbol and a comma for digit grouping.
Problems arise if your Windows® settings for these options are not
set to use the same convention.
When you install HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM, you may see a small
warning that your settings are not compatible.
To change your conventions for numeric notation:
1. Click the Windows® Start button-SETTINGS-CONTROL
PANEL.
2. Select REGIONAL AND LANGUAGE OPTIONS.
3. In the General tab, click [Customize]. The Customize
Regional Options dialog appears.

6- 6 Appendix
Windows® System Settings

FIGURE 6. Customizing your Numeric Notation Conventions

4. In the Numeric tab, set the Decimal Symbol to ‘.’ and your
Digital Grouping symbol to ‘,’.
5. Click [OK].

WINDOWS® 7 DATA EXECUTION PREVENTION SETTINGS

Some of our users on Windows® 7 machines have had periodic
exception errors when they tried to launch certain HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM modules (GEODETIC PARAMETERS and SURVEY).
The problem originated with the Windows® Data Execution
Prevention (DEP) function. The solution: limit this function to
Windows® programs and services.
To modify your DEP setting:
1. In the Windows® Control Panel, open ‘System and
Security’ and click the System link.
2. Click on the Advanced system settings link in the
navigation bar. The System Properties dialog will appear.
3. In the Advanced tab, click [Settings]. The Performance
Options dialog will appear.
4. In the Data Execution Prevention tab, select ‘Turn n DEP
for essential Windows® programs and services only’ and
click [OK].
5. Restart your computer for these changes to take effect.

Last Updated May / 2017 6- 7

Network System Requirements • Firewalls

FIREWALLS
Your firewall settings can affect HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
performance when you are working with network connections. As
technology advances, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM uses network
connections increasingly more often. These applications include
such uses as:
• Network dongles
• Network connections in the hardware configuration
• Using the OPC server in dredge configurations
Any time you have network connections, the firewall can interfere
with required HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM function of these
connections.
The solution: Take your computer off the Internet and turn off your
firewall.

NETWORK SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Users can share project data across a network. You can elect to
share projects on your computer with other users on your network
or you can use a designated computer as a central storage facility
and all users can access projects from that location.
Unless you specify otherwise, HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM still
defaults to the directories in your \HYPACK Sub-
bottom\Projects\ProjectName folder so, if you prefer, you can use
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM without the network capability.

NOTE: If you decide to have a computer act as your storage

location, that computer does not need a HYPACK® SUB-
BOTTOM dongle. Only computers that actually run
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM require a dongle.

The network capability was originally developed to access and

share your projects in the office. During SURVEY, it is possible to
load a network project and log the data directly back to the network
computer only if you have totally reliable Ethernet (not WiFi)
connections. If your hardware configuration includes serial devices,
we recommend that you only log data to the same computer that is
running the SURVEY program.
Tip: Alternatively, you can use the SURVEY DATA TRANSFER
program, which runs simultaneously with HYPACK® SURVEY, to
send a copy of your data files to a user-defined location via a LAN

6- 8 Appendix
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Licensing

or Internet connection. You can instruct the program to send the

data at the end of each line or when you close HYPACK®
SURVEY.
There are some system rules that must be followed for networked
projects to work completely. All further references in this manual to
working with projects over the network will assume that these
conditions have been met.
• All computers to which the project refers must stay on the
network. If your project refers to a computer that has been
disconnected from the network, those files will be listed in the
Project Items list, but they will be marked with a red 'X' to
indicate that they are unavailable. Of course, if the computer
with the project file is off of the network, no one can open the
project at all!
• All computers with files included in the project must share
those directories with both read and write capabilities
through the Windows® operating system. An unshared folder is
as unavailable as if the computer was turned off. A read-only
file can not interact with the other files in the project in order to
do the work that you are trying to accomplish.
• All files included in the project must remain in the same
location. If you move files, you must reload them to your
project. Otherwise, the file will be marked with a red X
indicating that it is unavailable.

More Information
• “SURVEY DATA TRANSFER” on page 3-78

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM LICENSING

Anyone, whether they own a HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM license or
not, can use the HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM shell to view project
data. You can change display options, and enable and disable files
to view your data as you choose.
A dongle is required by HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM to activate the
program modules associated with the license purchased. The
dongle is also encoded with permit numbers required to display
S63 or ARCS electronic charts.
The License Manager runs the dongle test. The program reads
your license information and displays your dongle status and
permit numbers.
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM dongles have the following features:

Last Updated May / 2017 6- 9

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Licensing • License Manager

• Programmable expiration date: The keys will be burned with

the your maintenance plan expiration date. After this date, the
dongle will not allow you to run further program upgrades until
your license is renewed. (Leased dongles will not allow you to
run HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM after the lease expiration.)
• Allows renewal over the Internet: When your license is
renewed, HYPACK will email you a license file which is used to
update your dongle information.
• Allows multiple users to use one dongle on a local
network. One dongle on a specified computer in your office
can be used for ‘n’ users (5, 10, 12, 25, etc.). The dongle
automatically limits the number of users at any one time to the
number of license purchased for this key.
All of these functions will be managed through the License
Manager.

LICENSE MANAGER
The LICENSE MANAGER reads your HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
license information from your dongle and displays your dongle
status.
FIGURE 7. LICENSE MANAGER

• All dongle types detected will be listed under Modules. If it

detects no key, it displays a dialog with direction to either attach

6- 10 Appendix
HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Licensing

your key and try again or define a new network location where
your network key is found.
• MP (Maintenance Plan) Ending: HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM
continues to function, but any program updates after this date
will not run. You can arrange with our Accounting department
([email protected]) to renew your Maintenance Plan over the
Internet.
• Leased: If this option is checked, the dongle will not be
recognized and HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM will not run on
leased keys after the expiration date.
[Rescan] repeats the test.

UPDATING YOUR LICENSE

When your maintenance plan or lease nears expiration, you must
contact HYPACK to arrange for renewal if you want to continue to
receive program updates and new releases past your expiration
date. When the proper arrangements have been made with our
accounting department, we will email you a license file. (You may
receive these burned to CD by special request.)
1. Copy the license file to your hard drive. The location on the
hard drive is unimportant. (If you copy it from a CD, be sure the
file on your hard drive is not read only.)
2. Select SETTINGS-CHECK HARDLOCK to access the License
Manager.
3. Click [Load License File]. A File Select dialog will appear
4. Select your license file and click [Open]. The new license
information will display in the License Manager.
5. Verify the new information is correct. The MP Ending date
should match your new Maintenance Plan Expiration date.

IMPORTANT! If, by chance, an error is made in generating your

license file, you may not be able to run the modules for
which you have purchased licenses.

6. Click [Update Key]. This checks that the key number matches
the license information, then updates the key to run HYPACK®
SUB-BOTTOM according to your license.

Last Updated May / 2017 6- 11

HYPACK® SUB-BOTTOM Licensing • Updating your License

6- 12 Appendix